Em 25

td.
., L
Co
FINISHED PLAN
KANDA SHIPBUILDING CO.,LTD.
SNo.513
ing
NAVIGATIONAL EQUIPMENT
uild
1． GPS NAVIGATOR (No.1) GP-150
GPS NAVIGATOR (No.2) GP-150
ipb
2． DATA SELECTOR MD-200

3． MULTI-DISTRIBUTOR MD-550
4． U-AIS TRANSPONDER FA-150
5． DOPPLER SPEED LOG DS-80
Sh
6． NAV. ECHO SOUNDER FE-700

DA
N
KA
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

No. 2601 - 6344 - 038
ＥＭ-２５
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF GP-150 (No.1)
PAGE ITEM DWG. NO. NOTE
1 SPECIFICATIONS (1/2)
2 (2/2)
3 SYSTEM DIAGRAM 2601-6344-SS-16
4 COMPLETE SET (1/2)
., L
5 (2/2)
6 OUTLINE DRAWING ANTENNA UNIT C4400-G01-F GPA-019S
7 INSTALLATION MPROCEDURE C4384-Y02-B GPS ANTENNA
8 DISPLAY UNIT C4440-G01-A GP-150
9 ACCESSORIES C4440-F01-A FOR DISPLAY UNIT
10 SPARE PARTS C4354-P01-D FOR DISPLAY UNIT
11 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM 2601-6344-ID-16
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／1 2010/8/18
1
FURUNO GP-150
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF GPS NAVIGATOR
GP-150
No.1
., L
1 GPS RECEIVER
1.1 Receiving frequency 1575.42 MHz
1.2 Tracking code C/A code
1.3 Number of channel GPS: 12 channels parallel, 12 satellites
1.4 Position fixing method All-in-view, 8-state Kalman filter
Co
1.5 Accuracy
GPS: 10 m approx. (2drms)
DGPS: 5 m approx. (2drms)
WAAS: 3 m approx. (2drms)
1.6 Ship’s speed accuracy 0.2kt (10kt or less), 2 % of ship’s speed (more than 10kt)
1.7 Course accuracy ±3° (within 1 to 17kt), ±1° (more than 17kt)
ing
1.8 Position fixing time Warm start: 12 s typical, Cold start: 90 s typical
1.9 Tracking velocity 999 kt
1.10 Position update Interval 1 s
1.11 Beacon receiver (internal kit, option)
uild
Frequency range 283.5 to 325.0 kHz
MSK rate 50, 100, 200 bps; select auto or manual
2 DISPLAY SECTION
2.1 Display type Monochrome LCD 122 x 92 mm, 320 x 240 dot matrix
2.2 Display modes Plotter 1 (NU), Plotter 2 (CU), Highway, Navigation, Data
ipb
2.3 Projection Mercator

2.4 Track plotter display
Scale 0.02 to 320 nm, 14 steps
Latitude limits Between 85ﾟN and 85ﾟS
Sh
Plot interval By time 0 to 60m00s or by distance 0 to 99.99 nm, sm/km or halt

2.5 Memory capacity
Track and Marks 2,000 points (include marks)
Waypoints 999 points with 12 characters comment each
Route 30 (containing 30 waypoints/route) and 1 simplified route
2.6 Alarms Arrival and anchor watch, XTE, Speed*, Trip*, Water temperature*,
DA
Water depth*
*: external sensor required
2.7 Satellite information Satellite number, Bearing, Elevation, Signal level, DOP, Status
N
KA
SP-1 E4440S01C
KAND_513 090730
2
FURUNO GP-150
td.
3 INTERFACE
3.1 Number of ports 4
., L
3.2 Data format IEC61162-1 (JUL-2000), NMEA0183 Ver1.5/2.0
3.3 Data port 1 and 2
IN: AGFPA, DBT, DPT, MTW, TLL
OUT: AAM, APA, APB, BOD, BWC, BWR, BWW, DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL,
GNS, RMB, RMC, Rnn, RTE, VTG, WCV, WNC, WNR, WPL, XTE,
Co
ZDA
3.4 Data port 3
IN: MOB from external device (contact closure)
ZDA or LOGOUT (exchange by jumper on circuit board)
ing
3.5 Data port 4
IN: DGPS correction data in RTCM SC-104 V2.0
Waypoint data downloaded from YEOMAN plotter
Waypoint data or navaids information from conventional PC
uild
ZDA
Waypoint data to conventional PC
4 POWER SUPPLY
ipb
4.1 Display unit 24VDC: 0.4A (w/ internal beacon receiver)
5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
5.1 Ambient temperature
Antenna unit -25ﾟC to 70ﾟC
Sh
Display unit -15ﾟC to 55ﾟC

5.2 Relative humidity 95 % at +40ﾟC
5.3 Degree of protection
Antenna unit IPX6
Display unit IPX5 (USCG CFR-46)
DA
5.4 Vibration IEC 60945 ed.4
6 COATING COLOR
6.1 Antenna unit N9.5 (white)
6.2 Display unit N3.0
N
7 COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE

7.1 Display unit Standard: 0.50 m Steering: 0.35 m
KA
SP-2 E4440S01C
KAND_513 090730
3
td.
ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT
., L
GPA-019S GPA-019S
0.2m
0.2m
NJ-TP-3DXV-1,1m,φ5.3 NJ-TP-3DXV-1,1m,φ5.3
Co
8D-FB-CV,30m,φ14.3
8D-FB-CV,30m,φ14.3
MJ-A2SPF0014-030C,
MJ-A2SPF0014-030C,
FROM NJ-TP-3DXV-1,1m,φ5.3 NJ-TP-3DXV-1,1m,φ5.3
GMDSS RADIO STATION
ing
3m,φ6
3m,φ6
RC-1800F2
*
*DPYC-1.5 2A DISPLAY UNIT 2A DISPLAY UNIT
24VDC J.B.
GP-150 GP-150 (No.2)
*IV-1.25sq. *IV-1.25sq.
*
*DPYC-1.5 J.B.
24VDC
uild
MJ-A6SPF0003-050C,
5m,φ6 MJ-A6SPF0003-050C,
5m,φ6
DATA SELECTOR
MD-200
*IV-1.25sq.
*TTYCS-1 U-AIS TRANSPONDER
FA-150
*TTYCS-1
MULTI *TTYCS-1 GMDSS RADIO STATION
DISTRIBUTOR RC-1800F2
ipb
*DPYC-1.5
*TTYCS-1 NAVTEX RECEIVER
MD-550 NX-700A
(No.1)
*TTYCS-1 INMARSAT-FB
FELCOM500
*TTYCS-1 MARINE RADAR/ARPA
FAR-2827
FAR-2837S
Sh
*TTYCS-1 VOYAGE DATA RECORDER

VR-3000
*IV-1.25sq.
*TTYCS-1 ECHO SOUNDER
FE-700
*TTYCS-1
MULTI *TTYCS-1
AUTO PILOT
DISTRIBUTOR
*DPYC-1.5 MD-550
(No.2)
DA
NOTE
＊：SHIPYARD SUPPLY
：CONNECTOR （：FACTORY-FITTED）
：CRIMP-ON LUG（：FACTORY-FITTED）
：GROUNDING COPPER STRAP
：GROUNDING WIRE IV-8sq. *IV-1.25sq.
N
DRAWN TYPE
23/Jul/09 N.Takata GP-150
CHECKED NAME
23/Jul/09 S.Yamashita GPS NAVIGATOR
KA
APPROVED
23/Jul/09 R.Esumi SYSTEM DIAGRAM
REMARKS
DWG.No.
2601-6344-SS-16 E4440-D01- C
KAND_513
FURUNO 4
td.
構成表 GP-150
GPS航法装置
COMPLETE SET GPS NAVIGATOR
., L
番名称型式質量数量備考
号 NAME TYPE MASS Q'TY REMARKS
No. (kg)
空中線部 0.2mケ－ブル付
1 ANTENNA UNIT GPA-019S 0.54 1 W/0.2m CABLE
Co
受信演算部卓上型
2 DISPLAY UNIT GP-150 2.4 1 TABLETOP MOUNT
アンテナケ－ブル組品 30m延長用
3 ANTENNA CABLE ASSY. 8D-FB-CV 1 30m EXTENSION
*30m*
ing
アンテナケ－ブルセット
4 ANTENNA CABLE SET CP20-01701 1
ケ－ブル組品MJ
5 POWER CABLE MJ-A2SPF0014-030C 1
uild
*3m*
6 SIGNAL CABLE ASSEMBLY MJ-A6SPF0003-050C 1
*5m*
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／2
KAND_513 FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
FURUNO 5
td.
構成表 GP-150
GPS航法装置
., L
No. (kg)
工事材料式
7 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP20-01101 1
SET
Co
工事材料式
SET
付属品式
9 ACCESSORIES FP20-01100 1
SET
ing
予備品式
10 SPARE PARTS SP20-00500 1
SET
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
2／2
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
6
7
td.
1 2 3
., L
A
空中線部
Co
ANTENNA UNIT
パーカークランプ
HOSE CLAMP
ing
B uild
マスト
* MAST
シリコン剤で固定する
φ25-70
APPLY SILICONE SEALANT
ipb
*
ステンレスバンド
STAINLESS STEEL CABLE TIE
Sh
空中線ケーブル
ANTENNA CABLE
*
ケーブル保護材
CABLE PROTECTOR
DA
＊：造船所手配。
*: SHIPYARD SUPPLY.
N
DRAWN TITLE
Mar. 23 '05 T.YAMASAKI GPS ANTENNA
CHECKED 名称
Mar. 23 '05 T.MATSUGUCHI 空中線ケーブル
APPROVED
装備要領
KA
SCALE MASS ±10％ NAME

kg ANTENNA CABLE
DWG.No.
C4384-Y02- B INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
KAND_513
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
8
9
td.
., L
GP-150
FOR DISPLAY UNIT
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
KAND_513
10
td.
000-040-717-00 20AI-X-9301 -2 1/1
SP20-00500
., L
GP-150 FOR DISPLAY UNIT
513
Co
ﾋｭｰｽﾞ FGB0-A 125V
2A PBF
1 FUSE 1 3
FGBO-A 2A 000-155-849-10
AC125V
000-549-062-00
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
C4354-P01-D 1/1
KA
KAND_513
1 2 3 4
空中線部
ANTENNA UNIT
GPA-019S
KAND_513
受信演算部 *3
0.2m
*3 DATA1
KA TNC-J-3 DISPLAY UNIT J5 MJ-A6SPF MJ-A6SPF0003-050C,5m,φ6
A TD-A 1 シロ WHT DATA SELECTOR
GP-150 P
*3 TD-B 2 クロ BLK MD-200
IEC61162-1/ *4
N NJ-TP-3DXV-1,
1m,φ5.3
TNC-P-3 NMEA0183-1.5/2.0 RD-H
RD-C
NC
GND
3
4
5
6
P
キ YEL
ﾐﾄﾞﾘ GRN
*3
N-J-3
*3
N-P-8DFB GPS ANT DATA2
DA
*3
J7
N-P-8DFB
N-J-3
TNC-P-3
J12 TD-A 1
8D-FB-CV,30m,φ14.3 NJ-TP-3DXV-1, 1 ANT TD-B 2
1m,φ5.3
2 GND IEC61162-1/ *4 RD-H
NMEA0183-1.5/2.0 3
RD-C 4
NC 5
GND 6
Sh
DATA3
J6
TD-A/ALM-H 1
TD-B/ALM-C 2
IEC61162-1/
ipb 3
B FROM NMEA0183-1.5/2.0 MOB-H
OR *5 MOB-C 4
GMDSS RADIO STATION LOG PULSE NC 5
RC-1800F2 GND 6
*3 INPUT
FUSE
*1 2A MJ-A2SPF J1 *4 DATA4
*1 DPYC-1.5 J.B. MJ-A2SPF0014-030C アカ RED 1 (+) RS422/RS232C J8
24VDC
uild
3m,φ6 クロ BLK 2 (-) TD-A 1
TD-B 2
RD-A/RD 3
COM OR DGPS RD-B 4
SD 5
注記 *1 DPYC-1.5 MULTI DISTRIBUTOR
ing
SG 6
＊１）造船所手配。 No.1 MD-550 FG 7
＊２）オプション。 *1 DPYC-1.5 MULTI DISTRIBUTOR
＊３）コネクタは工場にて取付済。 No.2 MD-550 GND *1
＊４）メニューにて選択。 IV-1.25sq.
＊５）ジャンパー線JP3/JP4/JP10(NP基板)にて選択（工場設定：IEC61162-1)。
Co
＊６）使わない芯線は絶縁する。
C NOTE
DRAWN TITLE
*1. SHIPYARD SUPPLY GP-150
*2. OPTION 18/Jun/10 T.Tsunetomo
., L
CHECKED 名称
*3. CONNECTOR PLUG FITTED AT FACTORY. 18/Jun/10 S.Hori GPS航法装置
APPROVED
*4. SELECT FROM MENU. 相互結線図
18/Jun/10 R.Esumi
*5. SELECT BY JUMPER WIRE JP3/JP4/JP10 ON NP BOARD. SCALE MASS NAME
kg GPS NAVIGATOR
(DEFAULT: IEC61162-1)
DWG NO.
td.
*6. INSULATE WIRES WHICH ARE NOT USED. 2601-6344-ID-16 C4440-C01- F INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
11

td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF GP-150 (No.2)
2 (2/2)
., L
5 (2/2)
6 OUTLINE DRAWING ANTENNA UNIT C4400-G01-F GPA-019S
7 INSTALLATION MPROCEDURE C4384-Y02-B GPS ANTENNA
8 DISPLAY UNIT C4440-G01-A GP-150
9 ACCESSORIES C4440-F01-A FOR DISPLAY UNIT
10 SPARE PARTS C4354-P01-D FOR DISPLAY UNIT
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／1 2010/8/18
1
FURUNO GP-150
td.
GP-150
No.2
., L
1 GPS RECEIVER
Co
1.5 Accuracy
1.6 Ship’s speed accuracy 0.2kt (10kt or less), 2 % of ship’s speed (more than 10kt)
1.7 Course accuracy ±3° (within 1 to 17kt), ±1° (more than 17kt)
ing
1.10 Position update Interval 1 s
uild
2 DISPLAY SECTION
ipb

Scale 0.02 to 320 nm, 14 steps
Sh
Plot interval By time 0 to 60m00s or by distance 0 to 99.99 nm, sm/km or halt

2.5 Memory capacity
Track and Marks 2,000 points (include marks)
2.6 Alarms Arrival and anchor watch, XTE, Speed*, Trip*, Water temperature*,
DA
Water depth*
N
KA
SP-1 E4440S01C
KAND_513 090730
2
FURUNO GP-150
td.
3 INTERFACE
., L
3.2 Data format IEC61162-1 (JUL-2000), NMEA0183 Ver1.5/2.0
3.3 Data port 1 and 2
IN: AGFPA, DBT, DPT, MTW, TLL
Co
ZDA
3.4 Data port 3
IN: MOB from external device (contact closure)
ZDA or LOGOUT (exchange by jumper on circuit board)
ing
3.5 Data port 4
IN: DGPS correction data in RTCM SC-104 V2.0
Waypoint data downloaded from YEOMAN plotter
uild
ZDA
Waypoint data to conventional PC
4 POWER SUPPLY
ipb
4.1 Display unit 24VDC: 0.4A (w/ internal beacon receiver)
Sh

Antenna unit IPX6
DA
6 COATING COLOR
N
7 COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE

7.1 Display unit Standard: 0.50 m Steering: 0.35 m
KA
SP-2 E4440S01C
KAND_513 090730
3
td.
ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT
., L
GPA-019S GPA-019S
0.2m
0.2m
NJ-TP-3DXV-1,1m,φ5.3 NJ-TP-3DXV-1,1m,φ5.3
Co
8D-FB-CV,30m,φ14.3
8D-FB-CV,30m,φ14.3
MJ-A2SPF0014-030C,
MJ-A2SPF0014-030C,
FROM NJ-TP-3DXV-1,1m,φ5.3 NJ-TP-3DXV-1,1m,φ5.3
GMDSS RADIO STATION
ing
3m,φ6
3m,φ6
RC-1800F2
*
*DPYC-1.5 2A DISPLAY UNIT 2A DISPLAY UNIT
24VDC J.B.
GP-150 GP-150 (No.2)
*IV-1.25sq. *IV-1.25sq.
*
*DPYC-1.5 J.B.
24VDC
uild
MJ-A6SPF0003-050C,
5m,φ6 MJ-A6SPF0003-050C,
5m,φ6
DATA SELECTOR
MD-200
*IV-1.25sq.
*TTYCS-1 U-AIS TRANSPONDER
FA-150
*TTYCS-1
MULTI *TTYCS-1 GMDSS RADIO STATION
DISTRIBUTOR RC-1800F2
ipb
*DPYC-1.5
*TTYCS-1 NAVTEX RECEIVER
MD-550 NX-700A
(No.1)
*TTYCS-1 INMARSAT-FB
FELCOM500
FAR-2827
FAR-2837S
Sh
*TTYCS-1 VOYAGE DATA RECORDER

VR-3000
*IV-1.25sq.
*TTYCS-1 ECHO SOUNDER
FE-700
*TTYCS-1
MULTI *TTYCS-1
AUTO PILOT
DISTRIBUTOR
*DPYC-1.5 MD-550
(No.2)
DA
NOTE
：GROUNDING WIRE IV-8sq. *IV-1.25sq.
N
DRAWN TYPE
23/Jul/09 N.Takata GP-150
CHECKED NAME
23/Jul/09 S.Yamashita GPS NAVIGATOR
KA
APPROVED
REMARKS
DWG.No.
2601-6344-SS-16 E4440-D01- C
KAND_513
FURUNO 4
td.
構成表 GP-150
GPS航法装置
., L
No. (kg)
空中線部 0.2mケ－ブル付
1 ANTENNA UNIT GPA-019S 0.54 1 W/0.2m CABLE
Co
受信演算部卓上型
2 DISPLAY UNIT GP-150 2.4 1 TABLETOP MOUNT
*30m*
ing
5 POWER CABLE MJ-A2SPF0014-030C 1
uild
*3m*
6 SIGNAL CABLE ASSEMBLY MJ-A6SPF0003-050C 1
*5m*
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／2
FURUNO 5
td.
構成表 GP-150
GPS航法装置
., L
No. (kg)
工事材料式
SET
Co
工事材料式
SET
付属品式
9 ACCESSORIES FP20-01100 1
SET
ing
予備品式
SET
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
2／2
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
6
7
td.
1 2 3
., L
A
空中線部
Co
ANTENNA UNIT
パーカークランプ
HOSE CLAMP
ing
B uild
マスト
* MAST
シリコン剤で固定する
φ25-70
APPLY SILICONE SEALANT
ipb
*
ステンレスバンド
STAINLESS STEEL CABLE TIE
Sh
空中線ケーブル
ANTENNA CABLE
*
ケーブル保護材
CABLE PROTECTOR
DA
＊：造船所手配。
*: SHIPYARD SUPPLY.
N
DRAWN TITLE
Mar. 23 '05 T.YAMASAKI GPS ANTENNA
CHECKED 名称
Mar. 23 '05 T.MATSUGUCHI 空中線ケーブル
APPROVED
装備要領
KA
SCALE MASS ±10％ NAME

kg ANTENNA CABLE
DWG.No.
C4384-Y02- B INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
KAND_513
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
8
9
td.
., L
GP-150
FOR DISPLAY UNIT
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
KAND_513
10
td.
000-040-717-00 20AI-X-9301 -2 1/1
SP20-00500
., L
GP-150 FOR DISPLAY UNIT
513
Co
2A PBF
1 FUSE 1 3
FGBO-A 2A 000-155-849-10
AC125V
000-549-062-00
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
C4354-P01-D 1/1
KA
KAND_513
1 2 3 4
空中線部
ANTENNA UNIT
GPA-019S
KAND_513
受信演算部 *3
0.2m
*3 DATA1
KA TNC-J-3 DISPLAY UNIT J5 MJ-A6SPF MJ-A6SPF0003-050C,5m,φ6
A TD-A 1 シロ WHT DATA SELECTOR
GP-150 P
*3 TD-B 2 クロ BLK MD-200
IEC61162-1/ *4
N NJ-TP-3DXV-1,
1m,φ5.3
TNC-P-3 NMEA0183-1.5/2.0 RD-H
RD-C
NC
GND
3
4
5
6
P
キ YEL
ﾐﾄﾞﾘ GRN
*3
N-J-3
*3
N-P-8DFB GPS ANT DATA2
DA
*3
J7
N-P-8DFB
N-J-3
TNC-P-3
J12 TD-A 1
8D-FB-CV,30m,φ14.3 NJ-TP-3DXV-1, 1 ANT TD-B 2
1m,φ5.3
2 GND IEC61162-1/ *4 RD-H
NMEA0183-1.5/2.0 3
RD-C 4
NC 5
GND 6
Sh
DATA3
J6
TD-A/ALM-H 1
TD-B/ALM-C 2
IEC61162-1/
ipb 3
B FROM NMEA0183-1.5/2.0 MOB-H
OR *5 MOB-C 4
GMDSS RADIO STATION LOG PULSE NC 5
RC-1800F2 GND 6
*3 INPUT
FUSE
*1 2A MJ-A2SPF J1 *4 DATA4
*1 DPYC-1.5 J.B. MJ-A2SPF0014-030C アカ RED 1 (+) RS422/RS232C J8
24VDC
uild
3m,φ6 クロ BLK 2 (-) TD-A 1
TD-B 2
RD-A/RD 3
COM OR DGPS RD-B 4
SD 5
注記
ing
SG 6
＊１）造船所手配。 FG 7
＊２）オプション。
＊３）コネクタは工場にて取付済。 GND *1
＊４）メニューにて選択。 IV-1.25sq.
＊５）ジャンパー線JP3/JP4/JP10(NP基板)にて選択（工場設定：IEC61162-1)。
Co
＊６）使わない芯線は絶縁する。
C NOTE
DRAWN TITLE
*1. SHIPYARD SUPPLY GP-150
*2. OPTION 18/Jun/10 T.Tsunetomo
., L
CHECKED 名称
*3. CONNECTOR PLUG FITTED AT FACTORY. 18/Jun/10 S.Hori GPS航法装置
APPROVED
*4. SELECT FROM MENU. 相互結線図
18/Jun/10 R.Esumi
*5. SELECT BY JUMPER WIRE JP3/JP4/JP10 ON NP BOARD. SCALE MASS NAME
kg GPS NAVIGATOR
(DEFAULT: IEC61162-1)
DWG NO.
td.
*6. INSULATE WIRES WHICH ARE NOT USED. 2601-6344-ID-17 C4440-C01- F INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
11

td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF MD-200
1 SPECIFICATIONS
2 COMPLETE SET
3 OUTLINE DRAWING DATA SELECTOR C4009-001-C MD-200
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／1 2010/8/18
1
FURUNO
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF DATA SELECTOR
MD-200
., L
This equipment is used to change over signals among three channels for navigational data or
video signals.
1 GENERAL
Co
1.1 Input Port 3 ports
1.2 Output Port 1 port
1.3 Signal CIF, NMEA0183 or Radar video signal
2.1 Ambient Temperature -15°C to +55°C
ing
2.2 Relative Humidity 95% at 40°C
2.3 Waterproofing IPX0
3 COATING COLOR
uild
N3.0 (not changed)
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
KAND_513
FURUNO 2
td.
構成表 MD-200
信号切替器
COMPLETE SET DATA SELECTOR
., L
No. (kg)
信号切替器
1 DATA SELECTOR MD-200 0.5 1
Co
工事材料式
SET
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／1
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
3
4
td.
1 2 3
., L
A
Co
1B1 14P0350
H8P-SHF-AA J2
MJ-A6SPF0003, 1
GPS NAVIGATOR 5m,φ6.0
No.1 GP-150 2
3
ing
4
5
6
B 7
8
H8P-SHF-AA J3 1 S1 SRRM43 J1 H8P-SHF-AA

1 1 *TTYCS-1
2 MULTI DISTRIBUTOR
2 2 No.1 MD-550
3
uild
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
H8P-SHF-AA J4
MJ-A6SPF0003, 1
GPS NAVIGATOR 5m,φ6.0
No.2 GP-150 2
3
ipb
4
5
6
C 7
8
J1-J4: B8P-SHF-1AAK
Sh
*1
IV-1.25sq.
DA
D
N
DRAWN TITLE
17/Jun/10 T.Tsunetomo MD-200
CHECKED 名称
17/Jun/10 S.Hori 信号切替器
KA
APPROVED
17/Jun/10 R.Esumi 回路図
NAME
DATA SELECTOR
DWG No.
2601-6344-ID-23 C4009-002- D SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
KAND_513
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF MD-550
1 SPECIFCATIONS
2 SYSTEM DIAGRAM (1/2) 2601-6344-ID-18(1/2)
3 (2/2) 2601-6344-ID-18(2/2)
4 COMPLETE SETS
., L
5 OUTLINE DRAWING MULTI-DISTRIBUTOR C4408-G01-D MD-550
6 SPARE PARTS C4408-P01-C
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／1 2010/8/18
1
FURUNO MD-550
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF MULTI-DISTRIBUTOR
MD-550
., L
2 SETS
This equipment is used for distribution of navaids data from navigation equipment. It provides four
outputs each from two independent inputs or eight outputs from one input by changing an internal
setting. AD-10 format signal is also available to distribute four outputs from one input.
Co
1 GENERAL
1.1 Distribution 1-input 4-outputs (2 circuits) or
1-input 8-outputs (1 circuit, change JP7 setting)
1.2 Type of Signal Serial data: RS-422 or current loop
IEC 61162-1, NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0 or AD-10 format
ing
2 POWER SUPPLY
24 VDC: 0.15 A
uild
3.4 Vibration IEC 60945
ipb
4 COATING COLOR
2.5GY5/1.5 Newtone No.5 (not changed)
Sh
N DA
KA
SP-1 E4408S01E
KAND_513 090730
1 2 3 4
NMEA データのとき
FOR NMEA DATA
KAND_513
MD-550
TB1 TB1
KA DATA SELECTOR *1 TTYCS-1 *2 *1 TTYCS-1 U-AIS TRANSPONDER
1 RD1-A/RD1-H TD1-A 4
MD-200 2 RD1-B/RD1-C TD1-B 5 FA-150
A
N 3 FG FG 6
TD2-A 7
TD2-B 8
*1 TTYCS-1 GMDSS RADIO STATION
RC-1800F2
FG 9
DATA-OUT
No.1 *1 TTYCS-1
DA TD3-A 10 MARINE RADAR/ARPA
TD3-B 11 FAR-2827
FG 12
TD4-A 13 *1 TTYCS-1 MARINE RADAR/ARPA

TD4-B 14 FAR-2837S
FG 15
Sh NC 16
TB1 *2
*1 TTYCS-1 NAVTEX RECEIVER
18 RD2-A/RD2-H TD5-A 21
19 RD2-B/RD2-C TD5-B 22 NX-700A
20 FG FG 23
ipb
*1 TTYCS-1 INMARSAT-FB
TD6-A 24
B TD6-B 25 FELCOM500
FG 26
DATA-OUT
No.2 TD7-A 27 *1 TTYCS-1 VOYAGE DATA RECORDER
TD7-B 28 VR-3000
uild
FG 29
*1 TTYCS-1 MULTI DISTRIBUTOR
TD8-A 30
TD8-B 31 No.2 MD-550
TB1 FG 32
*1 DPYC-1.5
ing
24VDC 34 V-IN(+) NC 33
17 V-IN(-)
GND
*1 IV-1.25sq.
Co
C DRAWN TITLE
30/Jul/09 N.Takata MD-550 (No.1)
注記＊１）造船所手配
., L
CHECKED 名称
＊２）工場設定：カレントループ。 30/Jul/09 S.Yamashita 分配器
APPROVED
30/Jul/09 R.Esumi 相互結線図
NOTE *1. SHIPYARD SUPPLY.
NAME
*2. DEFAULT SETTING: CURRENT LOOP. MULTI-DISTRIBUTOR
td.
DWG No.
2601-6344-ID-18 (1/2) C4408-C01- G INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
2

1 2 3 4
FOR NMEA DATA
KAND_513
MD-550
TB1 TB1
KA MULTI DISTRIBUTOR *1 TTYCS-1 *2 *1 TTYCS-1 ECHO SOUNDER
No.1 MD-550 2 RD1-B/RD1-C TD1-B 5 FE-700
A
N 3 FG FG 6
TD2-A 7
TD2-B 8
*1 TTYCS-1
AUTO PILOT
FG 9
DATA-OUT
No.1
DA TD3-A 10
TD3-B 11
FG 12
TD4-A 13
TD4-B 14
FG 15
Sh NC 16
TB1 *2
18 RD2-A/RD2-H TD5-A 21
19 RD2-B/RD2-C TD5-B 22
20 FG FG 23
ipb
TD6-A 24
B TD6-B 25
FG 26
DATA-OUT
No.2 TD7-A 27
TD7-B 28
uild
FG 29
TD8-A 30
TD8-B 31
TB1 FG 32
*1 DPYC-1.5
ing
24VDC 34 V-IN(+) NC 33
17 V-IN(-)
GND
*1 IV-1.25sq.
Co
C DRAWN TITLE
30/Jul/09 N.Takata MD-550 (No.2)
注記＊１）造船所手配
., L
CHECKED 名称
＊２）工場設定：カレントループ。 30/Jul/09 S.Yamashita 分配器
APPROVED
30/Jul/09 R.Esumi 相互結線図
NAME
td.
DWG No.
2601-6344-ID-18 (2/2) C4408-C01- G INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
3

FURUNO 4
td.
構成表 MD-550
信号分配器
COMPLETE SET MULTI DISTRIBUTOR
., L
No. (kg)
信号分配器
1 MULTI DISTRIBUTOR MD-550 1.6 2
Co
工事材料式
SET
予備品式
SET
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／1
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
5
6
td.
004-010-880 14CK-X-9301 -1 1/1
SP14-03001
., L
MD-550
513 2SETS
Co
ﾋｭｰｽﾞ
1 FUSE 1 1
FGMB 125V
0.5A PBF
000-157-462-10
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
C4408-P01-C 1/1
KA
KAND_513
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF FA-150
PAGE ITEM DWG.NO. NOTE
2 (2/2)
., L
5 (2/2)
6 OUTLINE DRAWING TRANSPONDER UNIT C4431-G02-B FA-1501
7 MONITOR UNIT C4431-G01-C FA-1502
8 CONBINED ANTENNA UNIT C4417-G02-F GVA-100
9 DISTRIBUTOR C4417-G04-C DB-1
10 PILOT PLUG UNIT C4417-G08-D OP24-3
11 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT C5003-G03-H PR-240
Co
12 ACCESSORIES C4431-F01-B FOR MONITOR UNIT
13 SPARE PARTS C4431-P01-B FOR MONITOR UNIT
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／1 2010/8/18
1
FURUNO FA-150
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF U-AIS TRANSPONDER
FA-150
., L
1 TRANSPONDER UNIT
1.1 TX/RX frequency 156.025 MHz to 162.025 MHz
1.2 Output power 1W, 2 W, 12.5 W, selectable
1.3 Impedance 50 ohms
Co
1.4 DSC receiver CH70 fixed, 156.525 MHz, G2B, 1200 bps
1.5 Bandwidth 25 kHz/ 12.5 kHz
2 MONITOR UNIT
2.1 Display 4.5-inch, monochrome LCD
ing
2.2 Display size 60 (H) x 95 (W) mm, 120 x 64 dots
3 GPS RECEIVER
uild
3.3 Number of channel 12 channels parallel, 12 satellites
3.4 Position fixing method All in view, 8-state Kalman filter
3.5 Accuracy
GPS 10 m approx, 95% of the time, (HDOP 4)
DGPS 5 m approx, 95% of the time
ipb

3.7 Position-fixing time Warm start: 36 s, Cold start: 43 s
3.8 Position update interval 1 second typical
3.9 DGPS data receiving RTCM SC-104 ver-2.1
Sh
4 INTERFACE
4.1 Navigation I/O 4 ports, IEC 61162-1(Jul-00) or 61162-2(Sep-98)
Input VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR, DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL,
GNS, HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT, VBW, VTG
DA
Output VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ALR, TXT, LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
4.2 Sensor input IEC 61162-1(Jul-00): 3 ports and 61162-2(Sep-98): 3 ports
DTM, GNS, GLL, GGA, RMC, VBW, VTG, OSD, HDT, GBS, ROT
4.3 External beacon or PC RS-232C
4.4 Heading sensor AD-10 format
N
4.5 Alarm output Contact closure

4.6 Bluesign input Contact closure
KA
SP-1 E4431S01G
090723
KAND_513
2
FURUNO FA-150
td.
5 POWER SUPPLY
5.1 Transponder unit 24 VDC: 3.5 A
., L
5.2 Monitor unit 24 VDC: 0.15 A
5.3 AC/DC power supply unit (PR-240)
100 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz
Co
GPS/VHF antenna -25°C to +55°C (storage: -25°C to +70°C)
Other units -15°C to +55°C
6.2 Relative humidity 95% at 40°C
ing
GPS/VHF antenna IPX6
Transponder unit IP20
Monitor unit IP22
uild
7 COATING COLOR
7.1 GPS antenna N9.5
7.2 Transponder unit N3.0
7.3 Monitor unit Panel: N3.0, Chassis: 2.5GY5/1.5
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
SP-2 E4431S01G
090723
KAND_513
3
td.
., L
GPS/VHF
ANTENNA
GVA-100
0.8m
Co
8D-FB-CV,30m,φ14.3
MONITOR UNIT
FA-1502
*IV-1.25sq.
MJ-A3SPF0013,3.5m,φ6.8
MJ-A10SPF0012,25m,φ9
ing
1m
DISTRIBUTOR
DB-1
1m
1m
uild
TRANSPONDER UNIT
FA-1501
*IV-2sq.
*DPYC-1.5 AC-DC POWER
100VAC,1φ,60Hz *DPYC-2.5
*TTYCS-4
*TTYCS-4
*TTYCS-4
*TTYCS-1
*TTYCS-1
*DPYC-2.5 SUPPLY UNIT
24VDC PR-240
(EMERGENCY SOURCE) PE
*IV-1.25sq.
ipb
PILOT PLUG UNIT

OP24-3
Sh
MARINE RADAR/ARPA: FAR-2837S
GYROCOMPASS
MARINE RADAR/ARPA: FAR-2827
MULTI DISTRIBUTOR: No.1 MD-550

DA
NOTE
：GROUNDING WIRE IV-8sq.
N
DRAWN TYPE
23/Jul/09 N.Takata FA-150
CHECKED NAME
23/Jul/09 S.Yamashita U-AIS TRANSPONDER
KA
APPROVED
REMARKS
DWG.No.
2601-6344-SS-20 E4431-D01- C
KAND_513
FURUNO 4
td.
構成表 FA-150
国際船舶自動識別装置
COMPLETE SET U-AIS TRANSPONDER
., L
No. (kg)
トランスポンダ部
1 TRANSPONDER UNIT FA-1501 7.3 1
Co
表示部卓上型
2 MONITOR UNIT FA-1502 0.55 1 TABLETOP MOUNT
複合アンテナ部
3 COMBINED ANTENNA UNIT GVA-100 3.3 1
ing
分配器
4 DISTRIBUTOR DB-1 0.85 1
パイロットプラグユニット
5 PILOT PLUG UNIT OP24-3 0.58 1
uild
AC/DC電源ユニット AC/DC電源用
6 AC/DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT PR-240 2.8 1 FOR AC/DC MAIN'S
ipb

*30m*
Sh
9 POWER CABLE MJ-A3SPF0013-035 1
*3.5m*
10 CABLE ASSY. MJ-A10SPF0012-250 1
*25m*
N DA
KA
1／2
FURUNO 5
td.
構成表 FA-150
COMPLETE SET U-AIS TRANSPONDER
., L
No. (kg)
工事材料式トランスポンダ部用
11 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP24-00501 1 FOR TRANSPONDER
SET UNIT
Co
工事材料式表示部用
12 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP14-06001 1 FOR MONITOR UNIT
SET
工事材料式複合空中線部用
13 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP24-00141 1 FOR CONBINED
SET ANTENN UNIT
ing
工事材料式 150MHzﾎｲｯﾌﾟｱﾝﾃﾅ用
14 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 1 FOR 150MHz WHIP
SET ANTENNA
工事材料式分配器用
15 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP24-00101 1 FOR DISTRIBUTOR
uild
SET
工事材料式 AC/DC電源ﾕﾆｯﾄ用
16 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP24-00151 1 FOR AC/DC POWER
SET SUPPLY UNIT
付属品式表示部用
ipb
17 ACCESSORIES FP14-02801 1 FOR MONITOR UNIT

SET
予備品式表示部用
18 SPARE PARTS SP24-00101 1 FOR MONITOR UNIT
SET
Sh
N DA
KA
2／2
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
6
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
7
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
8
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
9
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
10
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
11
12
td.
004-366-960-00 24AC-X-9501 -1
FP14-02801 1/1
., L
FA-150
FOR MONITOR UNIT
ACCESSORIES
番号名　　称略　　図型名／規格数量用途／備考
NO. NAME OUTLINE DESCRIPTIONS Q'TY REMARKS
Co
保護ｶﾊﾞｰ
1 20-016-1091-2 ROHS
COVER 1
CODE
NO. 100-297-032-10
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
C4431-F01-B
KAND_513
13
td.
005-955-930-00 24AC-X-9301 -1 1/1
SP24-00101
., L
FA-150 FOR MONITOR UNIT
513
Co
3A PBF
1 FUSE 2
FGBO-A 3A 000-155-850-10
AC125V
000-549-063-00
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
C4431-P01-B 1/1
KA
KAND_513
14
td.
1 2 3 4 5 6
MJ-A10SPF0012,25m,φ8.9 MJ-A10SPF COM

複合空中線部表示部
GPS/VHF ANTENNA DISP DISP_TD_A 1 キ/ｱｶ YEL/RED 1 TX_A MONITOR UNIT
P
GVA-100 DISP_TD_B 2 キ/ｸﾛ YEL/BLK 2 TX_B FA-1502
GND_ISO 3 ｼﾛ/ｱｶ WHT/RED 3 RX_A
トランスポンダ部
., L
DISP_RD_A 4 ﾓﾓ/ｱｶ PNK/RED 4 RX_B
TRANSPONDER UNIT DISP_RD_B 5
P P
ﾓﾓ/ｸﾛ PNK/BLK 5 SW_H FUSE
FAB-151D FA-1501 GND_ISO 6 ｼﾛ/ｸﾛ WHT/BLK 6 SW_L POWER MJ-A3SPF 3A MJ-A3SPF0013,3.5m,φ6.8
A DISP_SW(+) 7 P
ﾊｲ/ｱｶ GRY/RED 7 0V DC_IN+ 1 WHT シロ A
GSC-001 DISP_SW(-) 8 ﾊｲ/ｸﾛ GRY/BLK 8 0V DC_IN- 2 BLK クロ
9 NC FG 3
COM1_TD_A *1 TTYCS-4
COM1 1 10 FG
P
COM1_TD_B 2
GND_ISO 3 GND *1
COM1_RD_A 4 IV-1.25sq.
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
Co
P
COM1_RD_B 5
FAR-2837S
0.8m
GND_ISO 6
COM1_JP 7
*1 *6
N-J-3
COM1_JP 8 *3
*1 TTYCS-4
N-P-8DFB
M-P-3 VHF ANT COM2 COM2_TD_A 1
P
2
N-J-3
1m COM2_TD_B
N-P-8DFB
分配器 ANT
E GND_ISO 3
8D-FB-CV,30m,φ14.3 1m DISTRI- COM2_RD_A 4
BUTOR COM2_RD_B 5
P MARINE RADAR/ARPA
TNC-P-3 GPS ANT
DB-1 1m GND_ISO 6 FAR-2827
ing
COM2_JP 7
*1 *6
COM2_JP 8 *3
BLUESIGN
B 1 NC COM3_TD_A 1
COM3
2 NC COM3_TD_B 2
3 NC GND_ISO 3
4 BLUESIGN-H COM3_RD_A 4
5 BLUESIGN-C COM3_RD_B 5
6 NC GND_ISO 6
7 NC COM3_JP 7
uild
*1 パイロットプラグユニット
8 NC COM3_JP 8 *3 PILOT PLUG UNIT *4
OP24-3 206486-1 206485
PC *1 TTYCS-4
COM4 COM4_TD_A 1
P
1 TX A 1 PC
1 NC COM4_TD_B 2 2 TX B 4
2 PC_SD GND_ISO 3 3 RX A 5
3 PC_RD COM4_2_RD_A 4 4 RX B 6
P
4 DTR COM4_2_RD_B 5 5 SHIELD 9
5 0V GND_ISO 6
6 DSR COM4_JP 7
*1 *6
7 RTS COM4_JP 8 *3
8 CTS COM4_1_RD_H 9
ipb
9 NC COM4_1_RD_C 10
C *1 POWER COM5_TD_A 1
*1 DPYC-1.5 DPYC-2.5 COM5
100VAC,1φ,60Hz AC DC + 1 DC(+) COM5_TD_B 2
IN AC/DC OUT - 2 DC(-) GND_ISO 3
電源ユニット COM5_2_RD_A 4
*1 DPYC-2.5
24VDC + DC AC/DC POWER COM5_2_RD_B 5
(EMERGENCY SOURCE) - IN SUPPLY UNIT GND_ISO 6
PR-240 COM5_JP 7
Sh COM5_JP
COM5_1_RD_H
8
9
No.1 MD-550
COM5_1_RD_C 10
PE 保護アース
IV-2sq. *1 *6
A LAN
*2 COM6 COM6_TD_A 1
1 TXP COM6_TD_B 2
2 TXN GND_ISO 3
3 RXP COM6_2_RD_A 4
4 NC COM6_2_RD_B 5
5 NC GND_ISO 6
6 RXN COM6_JP 7
DA
注記 7 NC COM6_JP 8
*1 TTYCS-1
D 8 NC COM6_1_RD_H 9 GYROCOMPASS
＊１）造船所手配 AD_DATA_H 10
＊２）オプション 03P9332 11
COM6_1_RD_C/AD_DATA_C
＊３）IEC61162-2使用時はジャンパーを追加する。 AD_CLK_H 12
13 *6
＊４）AMP社製 AD_CLK_C
＊５）ジャイロにIEC61162インターフェイスがないときのみ接続可能。
EXT ALM ALM_A 1
＊６）使用しない芯線は絶縁する。 ALM_B 2
ALM_C 3
N
NOTE: ACK_H 4
*1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY ACK_C 5
*2: OPTION DRAWN
17/Jun/10 T.Tsunetomo
TYPE
FA-150
*3: ADD JUMPER WHEN USING IEC61162-2. *1 CHECKED 名前
KA
*4: PRODUCED BY AMP INC. IV-2sq. 17/Jun/10 S.Hori

APPROVED
*5: GYRO CONVERTOR IS AVAILABLE WHEN GYROCOMPASS HAS NO 17/Jun/10 R.Esumi 相互結線図
IEC61162-1: 4800BPS SCALE MASS NAME
IEC61162 INTERFACE. kg U-AIS TRANSPONDER
*6: INSULATE UNUSED WIRES. IEC61162-2: 38.4KBPS
DWG. No.
2601-6344-ID-20 C4431-C01- P INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
KAND_513
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF DS-80
2 (2/7)
3 (3/7)
4 (4/7)
., L
5 (6/7) MF-22A-4
6 (7/7) No.3 MD-550
8 TRANSDUCER MOUNTING SITE C7241-T01-A
10 (2/2)
11 OUTLINE DRAWING MAIN DISPLAY C7247-G02-D DS-800 (FLUSH MOUNT)
Co
12 DISTRIBUTOR C7247-G04-B DS-801
13 TRANSCEIVER C7247-G05-D DS-810
14 TRANSDUCER C7247-G07-C DS-820
15 TRANSDUCER SEACHEST C7222-T06-D DS-784
16 JUNCTION BOX C7228-G03-D CI-630
17 TERMINAL BOX C7247-G06-B DS-802
18 ANALOG DISPLAY C7213-096-D MF-22A-4
19 DIMMER C7213-027-F MF-22L-1
ing
20 MULTI DISTRIBUTOR C4408-G01-D MD-550
21 ACCESSORIES C7247-F03-D FOR MAIN DISPLAY
22 SPARE PARTS (1/4) C7247-P03-D FOR MAIN DISPLAY
23 (2/4) C7247-P01-C FOR DISTRIBUTOR
24 (3/4) C7247-P02-C FOR TRANSCEIVER
25 (4/4) C4408-P01-C FOR MULTI DISTRIBUTOR
26 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM (1/3) 2601-6344-ID-23(1/3)
uild
27 (2/3) 2601-6344-ID-23(2/3)
28 (3/3) 2601-6344-ID-23(3/3)
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／1 2010/8/18
1
FURUNO DS-80
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF THE DOPPLER SPEED LOG
DS-80
., L
1. GENERAL
(1) Speed Range Fore-Aft: -10.0 to +40 knots through-the-water
(2) Distance Run 0.00 to 999,999.99 nautical miles through-the-water
(3) Working Depth Water depth greater than 3 m beneath the keel.
Co
(4) Working Frequency 1.0 MHz
(5) Speed Accuracy 1.0% or 0.1 knots whichever is the greater
(6) Distance Accuracy 1.0% or 0.1 nm whichever is the greater
Note: Accuracy is subject to shallow water effects, to the effect of wind, current and tide, and
sensor location. Any ultrasonic equipment having the same frequency may interfere with
ing
speed measurement. The Doppler Log transducer should be installed apart from the
transducers of such kind of equipment.
2. DISPLAY UNIT
uild
(1) Display Character size 15 or 21 mm H on monochrome LCD
(2) Indication
Ship’s speed Fore: **.* knots (+40.0 kt max.)
Aft: **.* knots (-10.0 kt max.)
Distance run ******.** nm
(3) Other Function Diagnostic check
ipb
3. DIGITAL INTERFACE
(1) Serial Signal
Output: 2 ports; VBW, VLW in IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183 Ver 2.0)
Sh
Input: 1 port; IEC 61162 (NMEA 0183 Ver 2.0)

(2) Analog Signal Speed signal for Analog display: 2 port
-3.3 mA to 10 mA/ -10 kt to +30 kt
Analog current output: 1 port
4 mA to 20 mA/ -10 kt to 30 kt
DA
Analog voltage output: 1 port

-3.3 V to 10 V/ -10 kt to 30 kt
(3) Distance run output 2 ports; Contact closure each 0.005 nm, forward speed,
30 VDC: 0.4 A
(4) System Check signal 1 port, 30 VDC: 0.2 A, default: closed
N
KA
09/07/23 SP - 1
KAND_513
2
FURUNO DS-80
td.
4. POWER SUPPLY
(1) System Source 100 VAC:1.5 A max., 1 phase, 60 Hz
., L
5. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION (IEC 60945)
(1) Ambient Temperature -15°C to +55°C (units for protected area)
Analog display: 0°C to +50°C
(2) Relative Humidity 95% at 40°C
Co
(3) Vibration IEC 60945 adopted
(4) Category of Equipment
Display Unit/Distance indicator/Transceiver Unit:
For protected area
Transducer: For submerged use, 600 kPa x 12 h
ing
Distributor/Terminal box: For protected area
6. COATING COLOR
(1) Display Unit Cover: Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray), Panel: N3.0 (gray)
uild
(2) Distribution Box Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray)
(3) Transceiver Unit Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray)
(4) Terminal Box Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray)
(5) Analog Display Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray)
7. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE

ipb
(1) Display Unit/Digital Indicator/Digital Distance Indicator

Standard: 0.50 m, Steering: 0.40 m
(2) Transceiver Unit Standard: 2.05 m, Steering: 1.40 m
(3) Distribution Box Standard: 3.10 m, Steering: 2.10 m
Sh
(4) Terminal Box Standard: 0.65 m, Steering: 0.45 m
SAFETY PRECAUTION
- There is no unit giving rise to a dose rate > 0.5 mrem/h at 50 mm.
- There is no harmful radiation from the screen.
DA
- All units of this equipment comply with EMC requirements in IEC 60945, as required by IMO
Res. A.813 (19).
N
KA
09/07/23 SP - 2
KAND_513
3
FURUNO DS-80
td.
SELECTING MOUNTING LOCATION OF TRANSDUCER
., L
The performance of the DS-80 is directly related to the mounting location of the transducer.
Especially air bubbles and turbulence caused by movement of the ship and interference from other
acoustic equipment seriously degrade performance. The mounting location should, therefore, be
determined carefully, keeping the following factors in mind.
1. Air Bubbles
Co
Since the transducer of the DS-80 is installed flush with the ship's hull bottom, it is susceptible
to air bubbles which flow below the hull bottom. Select a location where air bubbles created at
ship's bow do not go down to the mounting location. When the ship has a bulbous bow, install
the transducer in it or just behind it. However, when the ship makes a voyage in high latitude
area breaking through ice flows, avoid the location where broken ice flows may strike the
ing
location.
The DS-80 is used not only for ocean going navigation but also for docking to
loading/unloading facilities, at which the bow and side thrusters are used. The transducer
should be separated at least 4 or 5 meters from them.
Note: In extremely shallow harbors with soft bottom, whirls created by ship's movement cause
uild
air bubbles and also bottom materials to be stirred, which may make the use of DS-80
impossible.
2. Cavitations
Dents on ship's bottom create whirls behind them and may sometimes cause cavitation that
adversely affects the performance of the transducer, especially when the ship moves at a high
ipb
speed. The welded portion between the transducer casing and the ship's hull should therefore
be finished as smooth as possible.
3. Variation of Draft Level
When the ship returns unloaded, the draft level goes low and air bubbles are apt to be pushed
Sh
down to the transducer location. This occurs especially when the water level is lower than the
centerline of the bulbous bow. It is recommended to load proper amount of ballast not only for
the DS-80 but also for safety of navigation.
4. Interference of Other Ultrasonic Equipment
If integer multiple of the transmission frequency of other ultrasonic equipment within 1MHz,
DA
interference may occur. Select a location at least 1m away from the transducer of the
ultrasonic equipment and change, if possible, the direction of its transmission beam so that the
beam may not cross the beam of DS-80.
5. Installation in Dangerous Place
Do not install the transducer in the oil tank, oil room, LPG gas room and freezing room.
N
KA
E7236S03D
KAND_513 071031
4
FURUNO DS-80
td.
CABLING GUIDELINE
., L
1. Cable between hull unit (transducer) and transceiver
This cable carries very weak signals whose amplitudes are less than 0.1 V, which means they
are easily interfered by noise. For the reason, dedicate conduit exclusively for this cable.
Cable specifications
Outer diameter: 11.8±0.5mm
Co
Mass: 180 (kg/km)
Outer sheath: Poly-chloroprene rubber
Armor: None
2. Cable between transceiver and processor unit (via junction box)
This cable carries reception or echo signals whose amplitudes are greater than 0.1mV，which
ing
means they can be interfered by noise from high electric power cables;
1) Locate the cables well away from electric power cables that carry more than a few
kilowatts to loads that fluctuate.
2) Locate the cables well away from electric power cables that carry waveforms switched by
uild
thyristor, etc. even if the load is small.
3) Locate the cables away from transmitting antenna cables of radio equipment.
Also observe the guidelines for other connection cables of the DS-80, described below
recommend cable specifications;
- Cable type: TTYCY-4S
- Outer diameter: 21.1±0.8mm
ipb
- Weight: 595(kg/km)
3. Other connection cables of DS-80
Observe the installation guidelines if other connection cables to prevent noise from
interference;
Sh
1) If these cables are run parallel with electric power cables, separate them 40 cm minimum.
2) If these cables are run behind a bulkhead through non-metallic conduit or duct, an armored
cable without sheath should be used and grounded every 50 cm.
Countermeasure to protect Transducer from being by Dry Dock Blocks

DA
The transducer may be damaged if the transducer touches the block at grounding. Take the
following countermeasure to prevent from occurring;
1. Before delivery, draw up a docking plan referring to the dimensions and location of the
transducer. The plan should be kept onboard ship.
2. Plan the placing of the blocks referring to the above plan.
N
3. Prior to pumping out the water, have a diver check the position between transducer and the
blocks. Confirm that the transducer will not touch the blocks.
KA
Consult with the dockyard personnel over items 2 and 3 above before dry-docking.
E7236S03D
KAND_513 071031
5
FURUNO DS-30
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF ANALOG INDICATOR MF-22A-4
1 Range scale -10 to 30kt (clockwise indication)
., L
slow scale (-2 to 6kt) is available when range switch box is applied
2 Panel dimension 200 mm in diameter
3 Illumination Orange EL board
4 Installation method Flush mount
5 Dimmer External dimmer box (MF-22L; 3k ohms, 25W)
Co
6 Power supply 100VAC, 1phase, 60Hz, 2.5VA approx. for Illumination
1 Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature -15 to +55℃
Relative humidity 95% (at 40℃)
Waterproofing IPX2
ing
2 Coating color Munsell 7.5BG7/2 Newtone No.5 (standard)
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
SP - 1 E7236S02E
KAND_513 090723
6
FURUNO MD-550
td.
MD-550
., L
No.3
Co
1 GENERAL
1-input 8-outputs (1 circuit, change JP7 setting)
1.2 Type of Signal Serial data: RS-422 or current loop
IEC 61162-1, NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0 or AD-10 format
ing
2 POWER SUPPLY
24 VDC: 0.15 A
uild
ipb
4 COATING COLOR
2.5GY5/1.5 Newtone No.5 (not changed)
Sh
N DA
KA
SP-1 E4408S01E
KAND_513 090723
7
td.
VOYAGE DATA RECORDER: VR-3000
MARINE RADAR/ARPA: FAR-2837S
MARINE RADAR/ARPA: FAR-2827
., L AUTO PILOT
A STEP 1
MAIN DISPLAY
DS-800
*TTYCS-1 (IEC61162)
*TTYCS-1 (IEC61162)
*TTYCS-1 (IEC61162)
*TTYCS-1 (IEC61162)
*TTYCS-1 (IEC61162)
*IV-2sq.
MJ-A7SPF0009,2m MJ-A6SPF0013,2m
Co
TERMINAL
BOX J.B.
DS-802
*TTYCS-4
DISTRIBUTOR MULTI DISTRIBUTOR
*TTYCS-1 *DPYC-1.5
100VAC,1φ,60Hz
*DPYC-1.5 DS-801 (IEC61162) MD-550 24VDC
(No.3)
ing
*IV-2sq. *IV-1.25sq.
*TTYCY-4S,MAX.400m
*TTYCS-1
JUNCTION
J.B. BOX
CI-630
uild
ANALOG
INDICATOR
MF-22A-4
*DPYC-1.5
*IV-2sq.
*DPYC-1.5 DIMMER
100VAC,1φ,60Hz MF-22L-1
ipb
TRANSCEIVER
UNIT
DS-810
Sh
*IV-8sq.
Z-6FN-PSB3Px0.5SQ,30m,φ12
TRANSDUCER:DS-820（W/30m CABLE）
TANK: DS-784
DA
NOTE
＊ : SHIPYARD SUPPLY.
: CONNECTOR( : FACTORY-FITTED)
: CRIMP-ON LUG( : FACTORY-FITTED)
: GROUNDING COPPER STRAP.
: GROUNDING WIRE IV-8sq.
N
DRAWN TYPE
23/Jul/09 N.Takata DS-80
CHECKED NAME
23/Jul/09 S.Yamashita DOPPLER SPEED LOG
KA
APPROVED
REMARK
DWG. No.
2601-6344-SS-23 E7247-D01- D
KAND_513
8
td.
., L
Co
DS ES1
170 3.5
177
ing
1.34
33.97
uild
1.34
ES1
28.6
DS
33.97
ipb
Sh
KANDA SHIPBUILDING
CO., LTD.
SNo.513
BC
NK
DA
33000DWT
N
KA
KAND_513
FURUNO 9
td.
構成表 DS-80
ドップラスピ－ドログ
COMPLETE SET DOPPLER SPEED LOG
., L
No. (kg)
主指示器埋込型
1 MAIN DISPLAY DS-800 0.6 1 FLUSH MOUNT
Co
分配器
2 DISTRIBUTOR DS-801 12 1
送受信器
3 TRANSCEIVER UNIT DS-810 7.1 1
ing
接続箱
4 JUNCTION BOX CI-630 2 1
送受波器 30mケ－ブル付
5 TRANSDUCER DS-820 6.1 1 W/30m CABLE
uild
船底タンク埋込型
6 TRANSDUCER SEACHEST DS-784 9.5 1 FLUSH MOUNT
端子台箱
ipb
7 TERMINAL BOX DS-802 1.1 1
アナログ指示器 -10～30kt,φ200
8 ANALOG INDICATOR MF-22A-4 4.4 1 埋込型
FLUSH MOUNT
Sh
調光器埋込型
9 DIMMER MF-22L-1 1.2 1 FLUSH MOUNT
信号分配器
10 MULTI DISTRIBUTOR MD-550 1.6 1
DA
*2m*
N
*2m*
KA
1／2
FURUNO 10
td.
構成表 DS-80
ドップラスピ－ドログ
COMPLETE SET DOPPLER SPEED LOG
., L
No. (kg)
工事材料式主指示器用
13 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP65-00801 1 FOR MAIN DISPLAY
SET
Co
工事材料式分配器用
14 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP65-00901 1 FOR DISTRIBUTOR
SET
工事材料式送受信器用
15 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP65-00902 1 FOR TRANSCEIVER
SET
ing
工事材料式接続箱用
16 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP66-00703 1 FOR JUNCTION BOX
SET
工事材料式船底タンク用
17 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP65-01001 1 FOR TRANSDUCER
uild
SET SEACHEST
工事材料式端子台箱用
18 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP65-00903 1 FOR TERMINAL BOX
SET
工事材料式信号分配器用
ipb
19 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP14-06601 1 FOR MULTI DISTRI-

SET BUTOR
付属品式主指示器用
20 ACCESSORIES FP65-00401 1 FOR MAIN DISPLAY
SET
Sh
予備品式主指示器用
21 SPARE PARTS SP65-00601 1 FOR MAIN DISPLAY
SET
予備品式分配器用
22 SPARE PARTS SP65-00701 1 FOR DISTRIBUTOR
SET
DA
予備品式送受信器用
23 SPARE PARTS SP65-00702 1 FOR TRNSCEIVER
SET
予備品式信号分配器用
24 SPARE PARTS SP14-03001 1 FOR MULTI DISTRI-
N
SET BUTOR
KA
2／2
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
11
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
12
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
13
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
14
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
T=18
Co
., L
td.
15
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
16
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
17
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
18
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
19
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
20
21
td.
., L
DS-80
FOR MAIN DISPLAY
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
KAND_513
22
td.
., L
DS-80 FOR MAIN DISPLAY
513
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
KAND_513
23
td.
002-888-440 65AD-X-9301 -2 1/1
SP65-00701
., L
DS-80 FOR DISTRIBUTOR
513
Co
ﾋｭｰｽﾞ
1 FUSE 1 2
FGBO 250V 3A
PBF
000-155-841-10
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
C7247-P01-C 1/1
KA
KAND_513
24
td.
002-888-450 65AD-X-9302 -2 1/1
SP65-00702
., L
DS-80 FOR TRANSCEIVER UNIT
513
Co
ﾋｭｰｽﾞ FGB0 250V 1A
　PBF
1 FUSE 1 2
FGBO 1A AC250V 000-155-828-10
000-549-019-00
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
C7247-P02-C 1/1
KA
KAND_513
25
td.
004-010-880 14CK-X-9301 -1 1/1
SP14-03001
., L
DS-80 FOR MULTI DISTRIBUTOR
513
Co
ﾋｭｰｽﾞ
1 FUSE 1 1
FGMB 125V
0.5A PBF
000-157-462-10
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
C4408-P01-C 1/1
KA
KAND_513
26
td.
1 2 3 4 5 6
分配器 DISTRIBUTOR
主指示器端子台箱
TERMINAL BOX DS-801
., L
DISPLAY UNIT
DS-800 MJ-A7SPF *3 MJ-A7SPF0009,2m DS-802 *1 TB1 TB2
J1 TTYCY-4S,MAX.150m
TD-A 1 シロ WHT 1 1 DSP-TX-H OP1-H 13
P P
TD-B 2 アオ BLU 2 2 DSP-TX-C OP1-C 14
A RD-A 3 キ YEL 3 3 DSP-RX-H 24V+(H) 15
P P
RD-B 4 ミドリ GRN 4 4 DSP-RX-C 24V-(C) 16
24V-P 5 アカ RED 5 5 PWR-H
FUSE(1A) P
0V 6 クロ BLK 6 6 PWR-C OP2-H 17
FG 7 7 RMT-H OP2-C 18
P
J2 MJ-A6SPF *3 MJ-A6SPF0013,2m 8 RMT-C 24V+(H) 19
Co
P-ON 5 アカ RED 9 *4 *4 24V-(C) 20
0V 6 アオ BLU 10
DIM 1 シロ WHT 7
ANA1-H *1 TTYCS-1
GND 2 クロ BLK 8 1
P ANALOG INDICATOR
PSW1 3 ANA1-C 2 MF-22A-4
PSW2 4 FLG1-H 3
*1 FLG1-C 4
IV-2sq. *4
*1 ANA2-H
IV-2sq. 5
ANA2-C 6
FLG2-H 7
FLG2-C
ing
8
ANAV-H 9
B 接続箱 CI-630
ANAV-C 10
JUNCTION BOX
送受信器 TB2
RX-H 5 *1 TTYCY-4S *1 TTYCY-4S
TB1 ANAC-H
ANAC-C
11
5 15 TRX_TX-H(DSP2TRX) 12
TRANSCEIVER RX-C 6
P
6
P
16 TRX_TX-C(DSP2TRX)
UNIT
TB3
DS-810 TX-H 3
TX-C 4
P
3
4
P
17 TRX_RX-H
18 TRX_RX-C LOG200_1-H 1
uild
LOG200_1-C 2
100VAC-U(H) 1 1 19 100VAC-U(H) LOG200_2-H 3
P P
100VAC-V(C) 2 2 20 100VAC-V(C) LOG200_2-C 4
LOG400-H 5
65P6020(KCP) LOG400-C 6
TEMP-H
TEMP-C
*1 IEC61162_TX1-H 7
TD1-H
TD1-C
TD2-H
TD2-C
IV-2sq. IEC61162_TX1-C 8
P No.3 MD-550
GND
GND
IEC61162_TX2-H 9
TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAX.400m
IEC61162_TX2-C 10
*1 IEC61162_RX-H 11
IV-8sq. IEC61162_RX-C 12
ipb
LOGALARM-H 13
YEL
アオ BLU
アカ RED
ミドリ GRN
BLK
WHT
LOGALARM-C 14
C
Z-6FN-PSB3Px0.5SQ,
(65S1239),30m,φ12
65P6010(JPW)
クロ
シロ
キ
TB4
*1 DPYC-1.5
100VAC,1φ,60Hz 1 (U)
Sh 2 (V)
*1
IV-2sq.
FORE AFT
送受波器
TRANSDUCER DS-820
DA
D
注記
＊１）造船所手配。
＊３）コネクタは工場にて取付済み。
＊４）ケーブルクランプでアースする。
＊５）200V仕様では、固定抵抗3kΩを削除する。 DRAWN
N
TITLE
NOTE 17/Jun/10 T.Tsunetomo DS-80
*1. SHIPYARD SUPPLY. CHECKED
17/Jun/10 S.Hori
名称ドップラスピードログ
*2. OPTION. APPROVED
*3. CONNECTOR PLUG IS FITTED AT FACTORY. 17/Jun/10 R.Esumi 相互結線図
KA
*4. GROUNDING THRU CABLE CLAMP. NAME

DOPPLER SPEED LOG
*5. REMOVE RESISTANCE 3kΩ FOR USING 200V SET. DWG No.
2601-6344-ID-23(1/3) C7247-C01- M INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
KAND_513
１２３４
KAND_513
KA
NA
分配器
DISTRIBUTOR
DS-801 アナログ指示器
ANALOG INDICATOR 調光器
65P6010 MF-22A-4
DA TB2 DIMMER
*1 TTYCS-1 *1 DPYC-1.5
*3 H 1 シロ WHT + L L MF-22L-1
ANA1 P METER *1 DPYC-1.5
C 2 クロ BLK - V V 100VAC,1φ,60Hz
H 3 U
FLG1
C 4
Sh
H 5
ANA2
C 6
H 7
FLG2
C 8
ipb
B
uild
H 9
ANAV
C 10
H 11
ing
ANAC
C 12
Co
注記
C ＊１）造船所支給
DRAWN TITLE
＊２）レンジ切換器はMF-22Aの場合のみ必要。 17/Jun/10 T.Tsunetomo DS-80
CHECKED
., L
名称
17/Jun/10 S.Hori ドップラスピードログ
NOTE APPROVED
*1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. 17/Jun/10 R.Esumi 相互結線図
*2. RANGE SWITCH BOX IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR MF-22A. NAME
DOPPLER SPEED LOG
DWG.No.
td.
2601-6344-ID-23(2/3) C7247-C02- B INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
27
1 2 3 4
FOR NMEA DATA
KAND_513
MD-550
TB1 *2 TB1
KA DOPPLER SPEED LOG *1 TTYCS-1
*1 TTYCS-1 MARINE RADAR/ARPA
DS-80 2 RD1-B/RD1-C TD1-B 5 FAR-2827
N A 3 FG FG 6
TD2-A 7 *1 TTYCS-1 MARINE RADAR/ARPA

TD2-B 8 FAR-2837S
FG 9
DATA-OUT
No.1 *1 TTYCS-1 VOYAGE DATA RECORDER
TD3-A 10
DA
TD3-B 11 VR-3000
FG 12
TD4-A 13 *1 TTYCS-1
AUTO PILOT
TD4-B 14
FG 15
Sh NC 16
TB1 *2
*1 TTYCS-1
18 RD2-A/RD2-H TD5-A 21 A STEP 1
19 RD2-B/RD2-C TD5-B 22
20 FG FG 23
ipb
TD6-A 24
B TD6-B 25
FG 26
DATA-OUT
No.2 TD7-A 27
TD7-B 28
uild
FG 29
TD8-A 30
TD8-B 31
TB1 FG 32
*1 DPYC-1.5
24VDC 34 V-IN(+) NC 33
ing
17 V-IN(-)
GND
*1 IV-1.25sq.
Co
C DRAWN TITLE
17/Jun/10 T.Tsunetomo MD-550 (No.3)
注記＊１）造船所手配 CHECKED 名称
., L
＊２）工場設定：カレントループ。 17/Jun/10 S.Hori 分配器
APPROVED
17/Jun/10 R.Esumi 相互結線図
NAME
DWG No.
td.
2601-6344-ID-23(3/3) C4408-C01- G INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
28

td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF FE-700
1 SPECIFICATION (1/3)
2 (2/3)
3 (3/3)
., L
6 (2/2)
7 OUTLINE DRAWING MAIN UNIT C2366-G03-B FE-701
8 DISTRIBUTOR C2366-G02-B FE-702
9 TRANSDUCER C2003-019-E 200B-8B
10 TRANSDUCER TANK C2001-332-Y TTF-2000
11 MATCHING BOX C2006-006-E MB-504
Co
12 ACCESSORIES (1/2) C2358-F02-B FOR DISPLAY UNIT
13 (2/2) C2358-F01-D FOR DISPLAY UNIT
14 SPARE PARTS C2366-P01-D FOR DISTRIBUTION BOX
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1／1 2010/8/18
1
FURUNO
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF NAVIGATIONAL ECHO SOUNDER
FE-700
., L
1 DISPLAY UNIT
1.1 Graphical Display 6.5-inch color TFT LCD, 320 x 234 pixels
1.2 Echo Colors 8 colors or 8 level monochrome
1.3 Display Area 133 x 97 mm
Co
1.4 Basic Display Range
Range
Unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Meters 5 10 20 40 100 200 400 800
Feet 15 30 60 120 300 600 1500 2500
ing
Fathoms 3 5 10 20 50 100 200 400
*Default settings; it could be customized for use w/o range 3 and 6.
1.5 Accuracy ±2.5% on any range
1.6 Minimum Range 0.5m
uild
1.7 Draft 0 to 30 m in 0.1 m steps, default 0 m
1.8 Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR)
Depth (m) P/L (ms) PRR (pulse/min)
5, 10, 20 0.25 750
40 0.38 375
ipb
100 1.00 150

200 2.00 75
400,800 3.60 42
1.9 Display Mode “NAV”: Basic echo presentation with the depth below transducer (or keel)
“DBS”: Echo presentation with the depth below sea surface
Sh
“HISTRY”: Historical Echo presentation with the depth

“LOGBOOK”: Echo presentation with the pop-up table showing
Time, Depth and L/L* data memorized at preset interval
“OS DATA”: Echo presentation with the pop-up table of present
navigational data; L/L*, course*, speed*, time, depth
DA
“HELP”: Echo presentation with the help menu and note

“MENU”: Echo presentation with the user menu
1.10 Picture Advance Speed
Slow mode 15 minutes or more
Fast mode Picture advance range
N
Range (m) 5 10 20 40 100 200 400 800

Interval (min.) 1.8 8 20 30
KA
KAND_513
2
FURUNO
td.
1.11 User Setting Gain, Range, Alarm, Draft, Brilliance, Dimmer, Color, Auto
1.12 Auto Set Mode Gain, range and clutter will be automatically adjusted.
., L
1.13 Alarm Shallow water (default 20 m), Bottom lost, Power drop
1.14 Logbook Display Depth, Internal clock, L/L*
1 hour at 5 sec Interval, 12 hours at 1 minute interval and 24
hours at 2 minutes interval
*: External navigational sensor required.
Co
2 TRANSCEIVER CHARACTERISTICS (BUILT IN DISPLAY UNIT)
2.1 Transmit Frequency 200kHz
2.2 Output Power 600Wrms
3 TRANSDUCER TYPE AND BEAMWIDTH
ing
3.1 200B-8B (200 kHz): 6°
4 INTERFACE
4.1 Serial Input Data IEC61162-1, current loop; 1 port
uild
RMA: L/L, ground track speed, Track
RMC: L/L(GPS), ground track speed, Track, Time
GLL: L/L
GGA: L/L
VTG: Ground track speed,
Track (True/Magnetic selected on menu)
ipb
ZDA: Time
4.2 Serial Output Data IEC61162-1, output period: 1 sec.; 3 outputs/
1 port
SDDPT: Depth (m), Draft (m)
Sh
SDDBT: Depth (ft, m, fa) below transducer

SDDBK: Depth (ft, m, fa) below keel
SDDBS: Depth (ft, m, fa) below sea surface
4.3 Serial I/O Data RS-232C, 1 port
Output Depth, clock, L/L, ship’s speed, course
DA
Input Control command for PC

4.4 Alarm (Depth, Power) Contact closure signal, normal open or normal close,
250 VAC/ 200 VDC, 3A max.
5 POWER SUPPLY
N
100VAC, 1phase, 60Hz: 20VA.

KA
KAND_513
3
FURUNO
td.
6.1 Temperature -15 °C to +55 °C
., L
6.2 Relative Humidity 93% or less at 40 °C
6.3 Waterproofing Display Unit: IEC IPX5
Distribution Box: IEC IPX2
Matching Box: IEC IPX2
6.4 EMC Emission IEC 60945 Ver.3
Co
6.5 Category of Equipment Units
Display Unit protected from the weather
Distribution Box protected from the weather
Matching Box protected from the weather
Transducer Submerged area
ing
7 COATING COLOR
7.1 Display Unit Panel: N3.0, Chassis: 2.5GY5/1.5 (no changed)
7.2 Distribution Box 7.5BG7/2
7.3 Matching Box 2.5G7/2 (no changed)
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
KAND_513
4
td.
MULTI DISTRIBUTOR: No.2 MD-550
., L
VOYAGE DATA RECORDER: VR-3000
Co
DISPLAY UNIT
ing
FE-701
MJ-A3SPF0015-100C
*IV-2sq.
MJ-A10SPF0002
FM-C6FPS002
*TTYCS-1
*TTYCS-1
10m,φ7.5
10m,φ7
10m,φ9
uild
DISTRIBUTION BOX
*DPYC-1.5
100VAC,1φ,60Hz
FE-702
*DPYCS-2.5
*IV-2sq.
* ENG.RM
ipb
*DPYCS-2.5
MATCHING BOX
MB-504: FOR 200B-8B
MB-504
Sh
2RNCT-SB 2Cx1.4,
30m,φ11.8
200B-8B
TRANSDUCER
DA
NOTE
：GROUNDING WIRE IV-8sq.
N
DRAWN TYPE
23/Jul/09 N.Takata FE-700
CHECKED NAME
23/Jul/09 S.Yamashita NAVIGATIONAL ECHO SOUNDER
KA
APPROVED
REMARKS
DWG.No.
2601-6344-SS-22 E2366-D01- K
KAND_513
FURUNO 5
td.
構成表 FE-700
音響測探機
COMPLETE SET NAV．ECHO SOUNDER
., L
No. (kg)
指示器埋込型
1 DISPLAY UNIT FE-701 2.4 1 FLUSH MOUNT
Co
分配器
2 DISTRIBUTOR FE-702 6.0 1
送受波器 30mケ－ブル付
3 TRANSDUCER 200B-8B 3.6 1 W/30m CABLE
ing
船底タンク
4 TRANSDUCER TANK TTF-2000 20 1
整合箱 200kHz用
5 MATCHING BOX MB-504 2.6 1 FOR 200kHz
uild
*10m*
ケ－ブル組品
ipb
7 CABLE ASSY. FP-C6FPS0002-100 1

*10m*
ケ－ブル組品 MJ-A10SPF0002-100
8 CABLE ASSY. 64S4050 1
*10m*
Sh
N DA
KA
1／2
FURUNO 6
td.
構成表 FE-700
音響測探機
COMPLETE SET NAV．ECHO SOUNDER
., L
No. (kg)
フラッシュマウントキット式指示器用
9 FLUSH MOUNT KIT OP02-79-3 1 FOR DISPLAY UNIT
SET
Co
工事材料式指示器用
10 INSTALLTION MATERIALS CP02-06401 1 FOR DISPLAY UNIT
SET
工事材料式分配箱用
11 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP02-06301 1 FOR DISTRIBUTION BOX
ing
付属品式指示器用
12 ACCESSORIES FP02-04802 1 FOR DISPLAY UNIT
SET
付属品式指示器用
13 ACCESSORIES FP02-04801 1 FOR DISPLAY UNIT
uild
SET
予備品式分配箱用
14 SPARE PARTS SP02-04101 1 FOR DISTRIBUTION BOX
SET
ipb
Sh
N DA
別表参照
SEE SEPARATE TABLES
KA
2／2
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
7
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
8
KAND_513
KA
N
30
DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
9
10
td.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
18
Sh
DA
N
KA
9/Dec/08 R.Esumi
su m
e i
N :c n
D e m
= u
s i,c =JP - o =ki so
u ,o
u =
to ka
u u
,t e
a =
m lri yo
s ke
u .e
s m
iu @
fu ru
n o
.c o
.jp
0 .1
2 8 2
.0 9 09 :2
3 :0
9 0
9
+ '0 '
KAND_513
KAND_513
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
30m.
ing
30
30
Co
., L
td.
11
12
td.
001-390-000-00 02FG-X-9502 -1
FP02-04802 1/1
., L
FE-700
FOR DSPLAY UNIT
ACCESSORIES
Co
ﾊｰﾄﾞｶﾊﾞｰ
1 FP02-04802 1
HARD COVER
CODE NO.
001-390-000-00
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
C2358-F02-B
KAND_513
13
td.
001-389-860-00 02FG-X-9501 -3
FP02-04801 1/1
., L
FE-700
FOR DSPLAY UNIT
ACCESSORIES
Co
ﾌﾞﾗｲﾝﾄﾞﾌｨﾙﾑ(K)
1 03-118-1103-0 ROHS 1
DUMMY FILM(K)
CODE
NO. 100-185-380-10
+ﾄﾗｽﾀｯﾋﾟﾝﾈｼﾞ　1ｼｭ
2 5X20 SUS304 4
SELF-TAPPING SCREW
CODE
NO. 000-162-608-10
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
C2358-F01-D
KAND_513
14
td.
., L
FE-700 FOR DISTRIBUTION BOX
513
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
KAND_513
15
td.
1 2 3 4 5 6
分配箱 FE-702
DISTRIBUTION BOX
., L
*3 POWER 指示器
TB1 TB2 MJ-A3SPF0015-100C,10m,φ7 MJ-A3SPF J1
1 NORMAL CLOSE 24V+ 1 シロ WHT 1 (+) DISPLAY UNIT
A 2 NORMAL OPEN 0V 2 クロ BLK 2 (-) FE-701
3 RELAY COMMON SHIELD 3 3 SHIELD
4 EIA232-TD
5 EIA232-RD *3 *3 DATA
6 GND J1 MJ-A10SPF MJ-A10SPF J2
RD2 MJ-A10SPF0002,10m,φ9 TD2
1 1
7 TD1-A TD2 2 2 RD2
Co
8 TD1-B GND 3 3 GND
MULTI DISTRIBUTOR *1 TTYCS-1
9 RD1-A TD1-A 4 4 TD1-A
No.2 MD-550 P
10 RD1-B TD1-B TD1-B
5 5
RD1-A 6 6 RD1-A
TB3 RD1-B 7 7 RD1-B
VOYAGE DATA RECORDER *1 TTYCS-1 1 TD1-A DP-ON 8 8 DP-ON
VR-3000 P
XDRSEL.GND
2 TD1-B RELAY 9 9 RELAY
XDRSEL0
3 24V SHIELD 10 10 SHIELD
SHIELD
4 0V
XDR+
XDR-
XDR
5 GND
NC
J3
6 TD1-A
ing
7 TD1-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
*1
*3
FM-C6FP
8 24V
B 9 0V
IV-2sq.
10 GND TB4 FM-C6FPS002,10m,φ7.5
XDR-M 5 アカ RED
*1 クロ BLK
TB5 XDR-P 4
DPYC-1.5
100VAC,1φ,60Hz 1 U SHIELD 3
2 XDR-M 2
3 V XDR-P 1
uild
TB6
1 (+) DC電源使用時要改造
2 MODIFICATION IS REQUIRED
3 (-) TO USE DC SOURCE.
DPYCS-2.5
*1
*1
IV-2sq.
*1
ipb
EMG. RM
C
*1
DPYCS-2.5
Sh TB1
整合箱
1a 2a 3a MATCHING BOX
1T 2T 3T MB-504(200B-8B)
TB2
注記
＊１）造船所手配。 2RNCT-SB 2Cx1.4
30m,φ11.8
＊３）工場にて取付済み。
DA
200B-8B
＊４）２台の送受波器を装備するときは、切換器または接続箱を使用すること。
D 送受波器 *5
＊５）本体の周波数は工場出荷時に200kHzに設定。 TRANSDUCER
50kHzのときは必ずメニュー設定を変更のこと。
＊６）接続の詳細はFE-720相互結線図を参照のこと。
NOTE
*1. SHIPYARD SUPPLY.
*2. OPTION. DRAWN TITLE
T.Tsunetomo FE-700
N
17/Jun/10
*3. FITTED AT FACTORY. CHECKED 名称
*4. USE A DISTRIBUTION BOX OR A MATCHING BOX WHEN TWO TRANSDUCERS ARE INSTALLED. 17/Jun/10 S.Hori 音響測深機
*5. TRANSMIT FREQUENCY IS SET TO 200 kHz AT FACTORY. APPROVED
17/Jun/10 R.Esumi 相互結線図
CHANGE THE SETTING FROM MENU FOR 50 kHz USE.
KA
SCALE MASS NAME

*6. REFER TO FE-720 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR DETAIL. kg NAVIGATIONAL ECHO SOUNDER
DWG.No.
2601-6344-ID-22 C2366-C01- Q INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
KAND_513
KA
NDA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
KA
NDA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
KA
NDA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
KA
NDA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
KA
NDA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
td.
td.
., L
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Co
ing
GPS NAVIGATOR
GP-150
uild
MODEL
ipb
Sh
DA
N
KA
www.furuno.co.jp
td.
., L
Co
ing
uild
The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.
ipb
・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

Sh
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN
Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200
DA
All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : FEB . 2006

C : FEB . 18, 2010
Pub. No. OME-44400-C
(HIMA ) GP-150 *00015801412*
N
*00015801412*
* 0 0 0 1 5 8 0 1 4 1 2 *
KA
td.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
., L
General
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual.
Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
• Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
Co
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the
screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system
configuration and equipment settings.
ing
• Save this manual for future reference.
• Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by
FURUNO will cancel the warranty.
• All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of
uild
their respective holders.
How to discard this product
Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial
waste. For disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries
Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal.
How to discard a used battery
ipb
Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a

battery(ies), see the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a
battery(ies) is used.
In the European Union
Sh
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all

types of batteries must not be discarded in standard
trash, or at a trash site. Take the used batteries to a
battery collection site according to your national Cd
legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU.
DA
In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows)
indicates that Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable
batteries must be recycled. Take the used batteries to a
battery collection site according to local laws. Ni-Cd Pb
N
In the other countries

There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number
of symbols can increase when the other countries make their own recycling
KA
symbols in the future.
i
td.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
., L
WARNING CAUTION
Co
Use the correct fuse.
Do not open the cover of the
equipment. Use of the wrong fuse can cause fire or
equipment damage.
This equipment uses high
voltage electricity which can No single navigation aid (including this
shock, burn or cause death.
ing
unit) should ever be relied upon as the
Only qualified person- exclusive means for navigating your
nel should work inside the vessel.
equipment.
The navigator is responsible for checking
Do not dissasemble or modify the all aids available to confirm his position.
equipment.
uild
Electronic aids are intended to assist, not
replace, the navigator.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury
can result. Use of an autopilot with this unit, to
provide automatic steering to
Immediately turn off the power at the destination, does not eliminate the
ship’s mains switchboard if water or need to maintain a watch.
foreign object falls into the equipment
ipb
or the equipment is emitting smoke or Always maintains a vigilant watch to

fire. prevent collision or grounding.
Continued use of the equipment can

cause fire, electrical shock or serious
injury.
Sh
WARNING Label attached
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do not
remove cover. No user-serviceable
DA
parts inside.
--
-----------------------------
-----------------------------
-----------------------------
Name: Warning Label (1)

N
Type: 86-003-1011-1
Code No.: 100-136-231
KA
ii
td.
TABLE OF
5.4 Finding Range and Bearing Between
Two Points .....................................5-7
CONTENTS 6. SETTING UP VARIOUS DISPLAYS
., L
6.1 Selecting Data to Display on the
Data Display...................................6-1
6.2 Selecting Position Format .............6-2
FOREWORD ............................................. iv 6.3 Demo Display..................................6-4
SYSTEM CONFIGRATION ........................ v 7. ALARMS

7.1 Arrival Alarm, Anchor Watch Alarm .7-1
Co
7.2 Cross Track Error (XTE) Alarm .......7-2
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 7.3 Ship’s Speed Alarm .........................7-3
1.1 Control Description..........................1-1 7.4 Trip Alarm ........................................7-3
1.2 Turning On and Off the Power .......1-2 7.5 Water Temperature Alarm ...............7-4
1.3 Adjusting Display Contrast and 7.6 Depth Alarm ....................................7-4
Brilliance ..........................................1-3 7.7 DGPS Alarm....................................7-4
1.4 Selecting the Display Mode.............1-3
8. MENU SETTINGS
ing
1.5 Icons................................................1-6
8.1 GPS Menu ......................................8-1
2. TRACK 8.2 Selecting Units of Measurement .....8-4
2.1 Enlarging/Shrinking the Display ......2-1 8.3 Mark, Character Size and Brilliance 8-5
2.2 Selecting Display Orientation ..........2-1 8.4 Settings for Connection of
2.3 Shifting the Cursor ..........................2-1 Navigator .......................................8-6
2.4 Shifting the Display .........................2-2
uild
8.5 Receiving Data from Personal
2.5 Centering Cursor Position ...............2-2 Computer ...................................8-8
2.6 Centering Own Ship's Position........2-2 8.6 WAAS/DGPS Settings ..................8-10
2.7 Stopping/Starting Plotting and 8.7 Displaying GPS Monitor Displays .8-13
Recording of Track.........................2-2
2.8 Erasing Track ..................................2-3 9. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
2.9 Selecting Track Plotting Interval......2-4 9.1 Clearing the Memory.......................9-1
9.2 Preventive Maintenance .................9-2
ipb
2.10 Apportioning the Memory ..............2-5

2.11 Selecting Bearing Reference.........2-6 9.3 Error Messages...............................9-2
9.4 Troubleshooting ..............................9-4
3. MARKS 9.5 Diagnostic Tests ..............................9-5
3.1 Entering/Erasing Marks...................3-1
3.2 Selecting Mark Shape .....................3-2 APPENDIX
3.3 Connecting Marks MENU TREE ...................................... AP-1
Sh
(selecting mark connection line) ....3-2 DIGITAL INTERFACE

3.4 Entering Event Marks......................3-3 (IEC 61162-1 EDITION 2 (2000-07)) . AP-4
3.5 Selecting Event Mark Shape...........3-3 TIME DIFFERENCES ...................... AP-21
3.6 Entering the MOB Mark...................3-4 GEODETIC CHART LIST ................ AP-22
LORAN C CHAINS .......................... AP-23
4. NAVIGATION PLANNING DECCA CHAINS .............................. AP-24
4.1 Registering Waypoints ....................4-1 PARTS LIST..................................... AP-25
DA
4.2 Editing Waypoints............................4-5 WHAT IS WAAS ............................... AP-27

4.3 Deleting Waypoints .........................4-5 LIST OF TERMS/SYMBOLS............ AP-28
4.4 Registering Routes..........................4-6
4.5 Deleting Route Waypoints...............4-7 SPECIFICATIONS ............................... SP-1
4.6 Replacing Route Waypoints ............4-7 INDEX ................................................... IN-1
4.7 Deleting Routes...............................4-8
N
5. STARTING FOR DESTINATION

5.1 Setting Destination ..........................5-1
5.2 Canceling Destination .....................5-5
KA
5.3 Erasing Route Waypoints (flags).....5-6
iii
td.
FOREWORD The main features of the GP-150 are
• Comprehensive navigation data displays
., L
• Storage for 999 waypoints and 30 routes
A Word to GP-150 Owners
• Alarms: Waypoint Arrival, Anchor Watch,
Congratulations on your choice of the
Cross-track Error, Ship's Speed, Water
FURUNO GP-150 GPS Navigator. We are
Temperature, Depth and Trip
confident you will see why the FURUNO
name has become synonymous with quality • Man overboard feature records latitude and
Co
and reliability. longitude coordinates at time of man
overboard and provides continuous
For 60 years FURUNO Electric Company has updates of range and bearing to that point.
enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative • DGPS capability - with built-in DGPS
and dependable marine electronics beacon kit accepts DGPS correction data
equipment. This dedication to excellence is from external DGPS beacon receiver
furthered by our extensive global network of • Menu-driven operation
ing
agents and dealers.
• Bright 122 x 92 mm LCD with temperature
compensated tone and brilliance
Your navigator is designed and constructed to
adjustment
meet the rigorous demands of the marine
environment. However, no machine can • Power consumption is a low 10 W.
uild
perform its intended function unless operated • Provision for connection of autopilot
and maintained properly. Please carefully (option) - steering data output to autopilot
read and follow the recommended
• Digital display of water temperature and
procedures for operation and maintenance.
depth with connection of echo sounder
(with NMEA input)
We would appreciate hearing from you, the
end-user, about whether we are achieving • Memory stores 2,000 points of track and
ipb
our purposes. marks.

• "Highway" display provides perspective
Thank you for considering and purchasing view.
FURUNO equipment. • Position may be shown in latitude and
longitude or LOP (Loran or Decca).
Sh
Features
• Four connectors for optional equipment
The GP-150 GPS Navigator is a totally two IEC 61162-1/NMEA 0183 I/O, one IEC
integrated GPS receiver and video plotter 61162-1/NMEA 0183 (or log) output and
consisting of a display unit and an antenna one DGPS for personal computer I/O
unit. The high sensitivity receiver tracks up to • Fully meets the following regulation:
12 satellites simultaneously. An 8-state IMO MSC. 112(73), IEC 61108-1 and IEC
DA
Kalman filter ensure optimum accuracy in 62288.

determination of vessel position, course and
speed.
Program No.
In most cases the operator needs to do is to
2051518-03.xx (February 2010)
turn on the power to find position.
N
KA
iv
td.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
., L
Antenna Unit GPA-018S*
Antenna Unit GPA-019S* Antenna Unit GPA-017S**
Co
ing
uild
Radar, Echosounder,
Autopilot etc.
ipb
Display Unit
DGPS Beacon
Sh
12-24VDC Receiver
GR-80**
*: w/internal beacon receiver

**: w/o internal beacon receiver
DA
CATEGORY OF UNITS
Unit Category
ANTENNA UNIT Exposed to weather
N
DISPLAY UNIT Protected from weather

KA
v
td.
This page intentionally left blank.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
vi
td.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
., L
1.1 Control Description
Co
Cursor pads
Shift display and
cursor.
ing
Opens/closes menu; MENU NU/CU
ESC ENT Selects display orientation;
quits current operation. registers selections on menus.
DISPLAY EVENT
Selects display mode. SEL 1 MOB 6 Inscribes event mark at
uild
ship’s position; marks man
overboard position
WPT GOTO
Registers waypoints RTE 2 7 Sets destination.
and routes.
MARK PLOT
Inscribes mark on 3 ON/OFF8 Turns recording and plotting
the display.
ipb
of ship’s track on/off.
ZOOM ZOOM
Enlarges display. IN 4 OUT 9 Shrinks display.
CENTER CURSOR
Centers ship’s position/cursor Turns cursor on/off.
Sh
5 ON/OFF 0
position.
Adjusts display contrast TONE

and brilliance; CLEAR Deletes waypoints and marks;
changes latitude/longitude clears wrong data; silences
coordinate. audible alarm.
DA
POWER Turns power on/off.
Figure 1-1 Control Panel

N
KA
1-1
1. OPERATION
td.
1.2 Turning On and Off the When turning on the power the following
occurs:
Power
The GP-150 takes about 90 seconds to find 12 seconds after turning on the power,
., L
position when turned on for the very first time. accurate position (in latitude and longitude)
Thereafter it takes about 12 seconds to find appears on the display.
position each time the power is turned on.
If position could not be found, "NO FIX" blinks
Turning on the power at the GPS receiving condition window. When
Co
Press the POWER key. PDOP (Position Dilution Of Precision) value
exceeds 6 in the 3D mode or HDOP
The unit tests the Program Memory, SRAM (Horizontal Dilution Of Precision) value
and battery for proper operation and shows exceeds 4 in the 2D mode, "DOP" blinks to
the results on the display. If equipped with the indicate abnormal fixing and the position
internal beacon receiver, "Beacon RCVR indication could not be updated.
Installed" appears at the bottom of the display.
ing
The unit starts up with the last used display When the satellite signal is being received
mode. normally, one of the indications shown in
Table 1-1 appears depending on equipment
Program Memory = OK
SRAM = OK setting and GPS receiver state.
Internal Battery = OK
uild
Table 1-1 GPS receiver indication
Indication Meaning
Beacon RCVR Installed 2D 2D
DATA 3 : Data Output
3D 3D
D2D Differential 2D
Several seconds
later
GPS receiving
condition D3D Differential 3D
ipb
W2D WAAS 2D
34˚ 23.456´ N 135˚ 45.678´ E
D3D 100m W3D WAAS 3D
* SAFE
30
BRG
Note 1: When PDOP value exceeds 6 in the
[01] 35.0˚ 3D mode, the position fixing method
COG
Sh
is automatically changed to 2D.

40 50 7.0˚ Note 2: The S icon appears when the display
H
RNG is in the demonstration mode. To
123 NM return to normal mode, turn off the
20
SOG power and turn it on while pressing
TM W84
2.00NM 12.3 kn and holding down the NU/CU ENT
key.
DA
Figure 1-2 Appearance of display when

turning on the power Turning the power off
Press the POWER key.
The next time you turn on the power the unit
starts up with the last used display mode.
N
KA
1-2
1. OPERATION
td.
1.3 Adjusting Display 1.4 Selecting the Display
Contrast and Brilliance Mode
1) Press the TONE key. The display shown 1) Press the DISPLAY SEL key. The display
., L
in Figure 1-3 appears. shown in Figure 1-4 appears.
Select Display
Plotter 1
[-] [+]
Plotter 2
Tone: 17 (0~31)
Co
Highway
Navigation
Brilliance: 7 (0~7)
Data
(DATUM: W84)
: Select
MENU : Escape
MENU : Escape
ing
Figure 1-3 Screen for adjustment of display * Shows currently selected geodetic chart
contrast and brilliance datum.
Figure 1-4 Screen for selection
2) To adjust contrast, press or . Current of display mode
setting and setting range (0-31) are
uild
shown to the right of " ". 2) Press the DISPLAY SEL key, or to
To adjust brilliance, press or . select display mode. (When the DISPLAY
Current setting and setting range (0-7) are SEL key is pressed, the display mode
shown to the right of " ". changes in sequence shown below.)
Selected display mode appears.
Note 1: Operate cursor keys within 10 Plotter 1 Plotter 2 Highway
ipb
seconds after pressing the TONE

key. Otherwise, the screen for Data Navigation
adjustment of contrast and brilliance Sample displays of each display mode are
will be cleared. shown in the figures on the next several
Note 2: If the display is turned off with pages.
minimum tone the display will be
Sh
blank at the next power up. When

this occurs press the TONE key
continuously to adjust tone.
N DA
KA
1-3
1. OPERATION
td.
Plotter 1 display Plotter 2 display
Cursor position data, Ship's position appears when cursor is off
when cursor is on Blinking asterisk (*)
indicates data is
., L
being refreshed. GPS receiving
Own ship's
track Course bar condition D3D 100m
Own ship Alarm 34° 23.456´ N 135° 45.678´ E * SAFE
mark Distance for
range RAIM reliability 30
[01]
D3D 100m
34° 23.456´ N 135° 45.678´ E * SAFE RAIM
reliability*
30 BRG
Co
[01]
44.0˚ H
40 50
COG Bearing
from
40
Waypoint
50 32.0˚ own ship
to desti-
H BRG TO + nation
123.0°
waypoint 20
TM W84
2.84 NM
20
RNG TO +
TM W84
11.5NM
ing
2.00 NM
Figure 1-6 Plotter 2 display
Course Grid
width Course over ground
Course Cursor
Range
Datum from own ship Highway display
(True Motion), to cursor
uild
Horizontal range Bearing from own Bearing from own ship to
ship to cursor
destination waypoint
Position Course over ground
*: For RAIM function, refer to page 8-1.
D3D 100m
34˚ 23.456´ N 135˚ 45.678´ E * SAFE
BRG
Figure 1-5 Plotter 1 display
34.0˚
ipb
COG
45.0˚
RNG
0.35NM
SOG
Sh
W84 NM 12.3 kn
Own ship mark Speed over ground
North mark
Range from own ship to
Cross track error scale destination waypoint
Figure 1-7 Highway display

N DA
KA
1-4
1. OPERATION
td.
Navigation display 2) With autopilot connection, automatic
mode
1) No autopilot connection
D3D 100m
Cross track Bearing from own TO; 012 * SAFE
error meter SOG
., L
ship to destination E
Destination Bearing
scale
waypoint
Speed over ground 12.3 kn
waypoint no. N
Velocity To VTD
BRG:
Destination
D3D 100m 63 10.3 kn
TO; 012 * SAFE COG: S
E SOG AP COG
12.3 kn 0.1NM 123 0.1NM 19
Co
N VTD
BRG TRIP
63˚ 10.3 kn Autopilot HDG STR
COG S RNG
AUTO 123 P 23 789 NM
0.1NM 123˚ 0.1NM 123 NM
AUTO mode Heading
TRIP Steering Autopilot-set
ETA 15 TTG 3D course
23:45' 17H 45M 789 NM P: Port
ing
S: Starboard
Trip
distance
Estimated Time of
Time To Go Figure 1-9 Navigation display, with autopilot
Arrival (15th23:45)
(3days17hrs45min)
connection, automatic mode
Cross track
Range from own
Cross track error indication
ship to destination
error scale
uild
waypoint
3) Autopilot connection, modes other than

Waypoint
automatic mode (manual, nav, etc.)
D3D 100m
TO; - -- * SAFE
E SOG
12.3 kn
N VTD
BRG:
ipb
63˚ 10.3 kn
VTD COG:
SOG S RNG
0.1NM 123˚ 0.1NM 123˚
TRIP
Autopilot HDG STR
MAN 123˚ P 23˚ 789 NM
Sh
Heading Steering
Figure 1-8 Navigation display, MAN: Manual mode
NAV: Nav mode
no autopilot connection Other:---
Figure 1-10 Navigation display, with autopilot

DA
connection, modes other than

the automatic mode
N
KA
1-5
1. OPERATION
td.
Data display
Refer to Chapter 6 for user-defined window
setting. The ZOOM icon can be displayed by
., L
pressing the CURSOR ON/OFF key.
Position in latitude and
longitude or LOPs
U: UTC
Fixing date and time* J: JST
Zoom icon S: Ship's time
D3D 100m
SEP 12, 2009 23:59'59" U * SAFE
Co
Position
12˚ 23.456' N
W84
123˚ 23.456' E
RNG BRG TO : 001
MARINE
31.23 NM 223.4˚ POINT1
ing
SOG COG NEXT : 002
12.3 kn 123.4˚ MARINE
POINT2
Next destination waypoint

User-defined User-defined Current destination waypoint
uild
display data #1 display data #4
User-defined User-defined
User-defined
display window
ipb
Figure 1-11 Data display mode
*: "- -" appears until calculating position after

turning on the power. If fixing error occurs
this indication stops.
Sh
1.5 Icons
Various icons appear on the left-hand side of
display to alert you to equipment status.
L
DA
L
: L/L position offset applied.
H
: Track recording is suspended.
: Alarm is violated.
: North mark.
S : Demonstration display.
N
KA
1-6
td.
2. TRACK 2.3 Shifting the Cursor
The cursor can be shifted with the cursor
pads.
., L
2.1 Enlarging/Shrinking the 1) Press the CURSOR ON/OFF key to turn
on the cursor.
Display
2) Press the cursor pads.
You may enlarge and shrink the display on The cursor moves in the direction of the
the Plotter 1, Plotter 2 and Highway displays, cursor pads pressed. When the cursor
with the ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keys. The
Co
reaches the edge of the display, the display
horizontal range is available among 0.25, 0.5, shifts in the direction opposite.
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 and 192 nautical
miles for Plotter 1 and Highway, and 0.36, Data and cursor state
0.71, 1.42, 2.84, 5.69, 11.38, 22.76, 45.51,
Cursor state determines what data are shown
91.02, 182.04, 273.07 nautical miles for
on the display.
Plotter 2 display.
ing
The ZOOM IN key enlarges the display and
Cursor turned on, cursor data
the ZOOM OUT key shrinks it. Each time a
zoom key is pressed the display range Cursor position is displayed in latitude and
appears at the center of the display for about longitude or LOPs (depending on menu
one second. setting) at the top of the display. The range
uild
and bearing from own ship to the cursor
2.2 Selecting Display appear at the right hand side of the display,
when in the Plotter 1 display.
Orientation
Display orientation can be selected on the Cursor mark Cursor position in
latitude and longitude
Plotter 1 and Plotter 2 displays, with the
NU/CU ENT key. Two display orientations are
ipb
D3D 100m
34° 23.456´ N 135° 45.678´ E * SAFE
available: north-up and course-up.
BRG
North-up display 234.0°
COG
In the north-up display, true north (0°) is at
the top of the display. Own ship moves on the 345.0°
Sh
display in accordance with true motion. (“TM” BRG TO +

appears at the bottom of the Plotter 1 and 2 123.0°
displays.) Land is stationary. RNG TO +
TM W84
2.00 NM 11.5 NM
Course-up display
Cursor
Destination set Range from own
ship to cursor
DA
The destination is at the top of the display Bearing from own

ship to cursor
and the north mark ( ) appears at the left
side of the display. Figure 2-1 Data displayed when the cursor is
turned on
Destination not set
N
Ship's course is upward on the screen at the

moment the course-up mode is selected. The
north mark appears at the left side of the
KA
display.
2-1
2. TRACK
td.
Cursor turned off 2.5 Centering Cursor
Ship's position (in latitude and longitude or Position
LOPs), speed and course appear on the
1) Press the CURSOR ON/OFF key to turn
., L
display.
on the cursor.
Own ship Own ship position
mark in latitude and longitude 2) Press the cursor pad to position the
cursor.
3) Press the CENTER key.
D3D 100m
34˚ 23.456´ N 135˚ 45.678´ E
* SAFE
Co
BRG 2.6 Centering Own Ship's
234.0˚ Position
COG 1) Press the CURSOR ON/OFF key to turn
345.0˚ off the cursor.
RNG 2) Press the CENTER key.
123 NM
ing
SOG Note: When own ship’s position reaches an
TM W84
2.00NM 12.3 kn edge of the screen, the display moves
to set own ship’s position center of the
Course display.
Speed
uild
Figure2-2 Data display when the cursor is 2.7 Stopping/Starting
turned off Plotting and Recording
of Track
2.4 Shifting the Display
The GP-150 stores 2,000 points of track and
The display can be shifted on the Plotter 1
marks. When the memory becomes full the
and Plotter 2 displays, with the CURSOR
ipb
oldest track is erased to make room for the

ON/OFF key. When own ship tracks off the
latest.
display it is automatically returned to the
screen center.
Procedure
off the cursor. Press the PLOT ON/OFF key to start/stop
Sh
2) Press the cursor pads. The display shifts recording and plotting of track.
in the direction of the cursor pads
pressed. When plotting is resumed
"Resuming track plot" appears at the center

of the display for about three seconds.
DA
When plotting is stopped
"Stopping track plot" appears at the center of

the display for about three seconds and " H "
appears at the left side of the display. (" H "
does not appear on the Navigation and Data
N
displays.)
KA
2-2
2. TRACK
td.
Hold icon
(appears while recording
2.8 Erasing Track
of track is stopped)
The track stored in the memory and
displayed on the screen can be erased.
., L
D3D 100m
34˚ 23.456´ N 135˚ 45.678´ E
* SAFE
BRG CAUTION
234.0˚ Track cannot be restored once erased. Be
absolutely sure you want to erase all track.
COG
345.0˚
Co
H
Recording
is stopped. RNG 1) Press the MENU ESC key. The MAIN
123 NM MENU appears.
SOG MAIN MENU
12.3 kn 1. DISPLAY SETUP
2. TRACK/MARK SETUP
This portion of track
3. ERASE TRACK/MARK
ing
does not appear on Own ship 4. ALARM SETTINGS
the display.
5. MANUAL CALCULATION
Recording of 6.
track started 7. GPS MONITOR
8. SELF TESTS
Ship’s track
9. SYSTEM SETTINGS
while recording is
uild
stopped
ENT: Enter MENU: Escape
Recording of
track turned off
Figure 2-4 MAIN MENU
Figure 2-3 Track not plotted or recorded when 2) Press 3 to select ERASE TRACK/MARK.
plotting is stopped ERASE TRACK/MARK
ipb
Erase Track No Yes

Erase Mark No Yes
Track Pts. Used: 345/1000 Pt

Mark Pts. Used: 123/1000 Pt
Sh
: Select
MENU: Escape
Figure 2-5 ERASE TRACK/MARK menu

DA
3) Press or to select Erase Track.

4) Press to select Yes. The message
shown in Figure 2-6 appears.
N
KA
2-3
2. TRACK
td.
3) Press or to select Track REC.
Are you sure to erase ?
4) Press to select Time.
5) Enter plotting interval in four digits. To
enter 30 seconds, for example, press 0,
., L
ENT: Yes MENU: No
0, 3, 0.
Figure 2-6 Prompt for erasure 6) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
of track
7) Press the MENU ESC key.
5) Press the NU/CU ENT key.

Plotting interval by distance
Co
The setting range for plotting by distance is
2.9 Selecting Track Plotting
0.00 to 99.99 nautical miles. To plot all track,
Interval enter 00.00.
The plotting interval determines both how the 1) Press the MENU ESC key.
track will be reconstructed on the display and 2) Press 2 to display the TRACK/MARK
track storage time. A shorter interval provides SETUP menu.
ing
more accurate reconstruction of track line, 3) Press or to select Track REC.
however total storage time is reduced. The 4) Press to select Distance.
plotting interval can be selected by time or 5) Enter plotting interval. To enter 0.1
distance. Plotting by distance offers the nautical miles, for example, press 0, 0, 0,
advantage that the track is not stored when 1.
uild
the vessel is anchored. 6) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
Plotting interval by time
The setting range for plotting by time is 00 to
60 minutes.
ipb

2) Press 2 to display the TRACK/MARK
SETUP menu.
TRACK/MARK SETUP
Track REC Time DIST
Sh
(01’00") (00.50NM)
Mark Shape
Mark Line
Event Mark
DA
: Select
Figure 2-7 TRACK/MARK SETUP menu

N
KA
2-4
2. TRACK
td.
2.10 Apportioning the 3) Press 1 to display the PLOTTER SETUP
Memory menu.
PLOTTER SETUP
The memory holds 2,000 points of track and
., L
Memory Apportion TRK = 1000 / 2000Pt
marks and may be apportioned as you like. Bearing REF True MAG
The default memory setting stores 1,000 MAG Variation AUTO MAN
points each of track and marks. (07˚ W) (00˚ E)
Calculation RL GC
CAUTION
Co
User defined #1 RNG
All data are erased whenever the memory User defined #2 SOG
apportion setting is changed, even when the User defined #3 BRG
previous value is re-entered.
User defined #4 COG
To store 1,500 points of track and 500 marks, ENT: Enter MENU: Escape
for example, do the following:
Figure 2-9 PLOTTER SETUP menu
ing
2) Press 9 to display the SYSTEM 4) Press or to select Memory
SETTINGS menu. Apportion.
5) Enter amount of track to store, in four
SYSTEM SETTINGS
digits. To store 1,500 track points, for
1. PLOTTER SETUP
uild
2. UNIT SETUP
example, press 1, 5, 0, 0.
3. DATA 1, 3 OUTPUT SETUP 6) Press the NU/CU ENT key, or . You
4. DATA 2 OUTPUT SETUP are asked if it is all right to erase all data.
5. DATA 4 I/O SETUP
6. GPS SETUP Setting erases all data!
7. WAAS/DGPS SETUP
Are you sure to change ?
8. LOP SETUP
9. CLEAR MEMORY
ipb
ENT: Yes MENU: No
ENT: Enter MENU: Escape Figure 2-10

Figure 2-8 SYSTEM SETTNGS menu 8) Press the MENU ESC key.
Sh
N DA
KA
2-5
2. TRACK
td.
2.11 Selecting Bearing Entering magnetic variation
Reference The location of the magnetic north pole is
different from the geographical north pole.
Ship's course and bearing to waypoint may
., L
This causes a difference between the true
be displayed in true or magnetic bearing.
and magnetic north direction. This difference
Magnetic bearing is true bearing plus (or
is called magnetic variation, and varies with
minus) earth's magnetic deviation.
respect to the observation point on the earth.
Magnetic variation may be entered
Displaying true or magnetic bearing
automatically or manually.
Co
The default setting displays true bearings.
1) Press the MENU ESC key. 2) Press 9 to display the SYSTEM
2) Press 9 to display the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu.
SETTINGS menu. 3) Press 1 to display the PLOTTER SETUP
3) Press 1 to display the PLOTTER SETUP menu.
ing
menu. 4) Press or to select MAG Variation.
4) Press or to select Bearing REF. 5) Press or to select AUTO or MAN.
5) Press or to select True or MAG. For automatic, current variation appears
6) Press the NU/CU ENT key, or . in parentheses.
7) Press the MENU ESC key. 6) For manual entry, enter variation in two
uild
digits, referring to a nautical chart (00-99°).
If the variation is 10°, for example, press 1,
0.
7) If necessary, press the key to change
coordinate from east to west or vice
versa.
ipb

Sh
N DA
KA
2-6
td.
Erasing marks
3. MARKS
CAUTION
., L
3.1 Entering/Erasing Marks
All marks, including event marks and the
Marks can be inscribed on the Plotter 1 and MOB mark, are erased on the ERASE
MARK menu. Be absolutely sure you want
Plotter 2 displays. You may inscribe a mark
to erase all marks; erased marks cannot
anywhere, in one of 13 shapes. Further, be restored.
Co
marks can be connected with lines.
Note 1: When the mark memory becomes full Erasing individual marks
no marks can be entered. When this
occurs, the buzzer sounds and the 1) Place cursor on the mark to erase.
message shown below appears on 2) Press the CLEAR key.
the display for three seconds to alert
ing
you. To enter a mark when the mark Erasing all marks
memory is full, erase unnecessary 1) Press MENU ESC and 3 to display the
marks. ERASE TRACK/MARK menu.
ERASE TRACK/MARK
uild
Can’t save mark Erase Track No Yes
Memory full
Erase Mark No Yes
Track Pts Used: 345/1000 Pt

Figure 3-1
Mark Pts Used: 123/1000 Pt
Entering marks
ipb
At own ship position : Select

MENU: Escape
off the cursor. Figure 3-2 ERASE TRACK/MARK menu
2) Press the MARK key.
Sh
2) Press or to select Erase Mark.

At cursor intersection
3) Press to select YES.
on the cursor.
2) Operate the cursor keys to place the Are you sure to erase ?
cursor on the location for the mark.
DA
Select a mark shape you want. Refer to ENT: Yes MENU: No

section 3.2.
3) Press the MARK key. Figure 3-3

N
KA
3-1
3. MARKS
td.
3.2 Selecting Mark Shape 3.3 Connecting Marks
13 mark shapes are available. Select mark (selecting mark connection
., L
shape as follows: line)
Marks can be connected with lines. Three
1) Press MENU ESC and 2 to display the
types of connection lines are available and
TRACK/MARK SETUP menu.
the "•" setting disables connection of lines.
TRACK/MARK SETUP 1) Press MENU ESC and 2.
Co
2) Press or to select Mark Line.
Track REC Time DIST
3) Press to to select mark line desired
(01’00") (00.50NM)
other than "•".
Mark Shape
Mark Line
ing
Event Mark
: Select
uild
Figure 3-4 TRACK/MARK SETUP menu
2) Press or to select Mark Shape.

3) Press to select mark shape
desired.
ipb
The next mark entered will be inscribed in the

shape selected here.
Sh
N DA
KA
3-2
3. MARKS
td.
3.4 Entering Event Marks 3.5 Selecting Event Mark
Event marks can denote any important Shape
., L
present position. Event marks can be saved Event marks are available in 10 shapes.
as ordinary marks and the unit automatically Select event mark shape as follows.
numbers them from 01 to 99. 1) Press MENU ESC and 2 to display the
TRACK/MARK SETUP menu.
Note 1: When the mark memory becomes full 2) Press or to select Event Mark.
no event marks can be entered.
Co
3) Press or to select event mark
When this occurs, the buzzer sounds shape desired.
and the message shown below 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
appears on the display for three 5) Press the MENU ESC key.
seconds to alert you. To enter an
event mark when the mark memory is The next event mark entered will be inscribed
full, erase unnecessary event marks. in the shape selected here.
ing
Can’t save event
Memory full
uild
Figure 3-5
Entering event marks

1) Press the EVENT MOB key less than
three seconds. The position at the exact
moment the key is pressed is saved as an
ipb
event position.
Saved event position
34° 40.123’ N
135° 21.123’ E
Sh
Figure 3-6
To erase event marks, see "3.1
Entering/Erasing Marks".
N DA
KA
3-3
3. MARKS
td.
3.6 Entering the MOB Mark 2) Press the NU/CU ENT key. If the display
in use is Highway, Navigation or Data,
The MOB mark denotes man overboard
they are automatically replaced by the
., L
position. To mark man overboard position,
Plotter display.
press the EVENT MOB key more than three
seconds. When the key is pressed, the
Note: You may cancel MOB position as
position at the exact moment the key is
destination by pressing the MENU
pressed automatically becomes the
ESC key instead of the NU/CU ENT
destination. Further, the Plotter display
Co
key at step 2. Note that the MOB mark
replaces the display in use when it is other
remains on the display.
than a plotter display.
Erasing MOB mark
Only one MOB mark may be entered, and
each time the MOB mark is entered the To erase a MOB mark, you must first cancel it
previous MOB mark and its position data are as a GOTO waypoint and then erase all
ing
written over. marks.
1) Press the EVENT MOB key for at least 1) Press the GOTO key.
three seconds. 2) Press the 5 key to choose Cancel.
The MOB mark (" ") is entered at the 3) You are prompted to release GOTO;
press the NU/CU ENT key.
uild
MOB position and the message shown in
Figure 3-7 appears. 4) Press the MENU ESC and 3 to display
the ERASE TRACK/MARK menu.
Saved MOB position
5) Press to choose Erase Mark.
Are you sure to change course
6) Press to choose Yes.
to MOB position ?
ENT: Yes MENU: No
ipb
Figure 3-7
Sh
N DA
KA
3-4
td.
4. NAVIGATION The display changes to Plotter 2 when
the Highway, Navigation or Data mode is
PLANNING in use.
., L
3) Press the cursor pad to place the cursor
on the location desired for the waypoint.
4.1 Registering Waypoints 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
In navigation terminology a waypoint is a
Co
particular location on a voyage whether it be A window similar to the one shown in
a starting, intermediate or destination Figure 4-3 appears. The waypoint's
waypoint. position and date and time registered
appear on the first and second lines.
The GP-150 can store 999 waypoints, Waypoints are automatically given the
numbered from 001-999. Waypoints can be youngest empty waypoint number and
registered four ways: this number appears on the third line.
ing
You may, however, assign a different
• by cursor
number. If the waypoint shares the same
• by MOB position or event position position with a mark, the mark's position
• at own ship's position and date and time entered are registered
as waypoint data.
• by range and bearing from position, and
uild
• through the waypoint list. If the waypoint memory is full, the
waypoint number line in the window is
Registering waypoints by the cursor blank. In this case waypoints cannot be
entered unless a waypoint is written over
1) Press the WPT RTE key. The or deleted.
Waypoint/Route menu appears.
ipb
Waypoint/Route To assign waypoint number, go to step 5.

1. Cursor If you do not want to change the
2. MOB/Event Position waypoint number, go to step 6 to select
3. Own ship Position
4. RNG/BRG to Position mark shape and enter comment.
Sh
5. Waypoint List
6. Route Planning 30° 12.345’ N 135° 23.456’ W
AUG 12’ 95 12 : 34U
No. : 1123
: Cursor Mark :
ENT: Enter MENU: Escape CMNT :
DA
Figure 4-1 Waypoint/Route menu : Cursor : Column

2) Press 1 to select Cursor. The following ENT: Enter
display appears.
Figure 4-3
Place Cursor on desired location
5) Enter waypoint number, in three digits
N
(001-999).
KA
Figure 4-2
4-1
4. NAVIGATION PLANNING
td.
6) Press to select waypoint mark shape. 10) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
The following display appears. Control is returned to the last used
display mode.
., L
When the waypoint number entered at
step 5 already exists, the message
: Cursor
shown in Figure 4-4 appears if the
waypoint is part of the current destination
Figure 4-4 Screen for selecting waypoint or route or is part of a route. If it is alright
Co
mark shape to write over the waypoint and its data,
press the NU/CU ENT key. To change
waypoint number, press the MENU ESC
7) Press or to select mark shape.
key.
8) Press the NU/CU ENT key. The display
shown in Figure 4-5 appears. 1st line
Are you sure to change ?
A
ABCDE FGHIJ KLMNO PQRST UVWXYZ
ing
abcde fghij klmno pqrst uvwxyz ENT: Yes MENU: No
1234567890 _#%’()+-./:;<=>?
ENTER
Comment : ____________
uild
: Cursor This WPT is GOTO
ENT: Set MENU: Escape This WPT is in registered route
This WPT is in selected route
Figure 4-5 Screen for entry of
comment for waypoint Figure 4-6
Note: If you fail to enter waypoint number,
9) You may enter a comment, as shown in "Enter waypoint number" appears on
ipb
the procedure which follows, or skip to the display for three seconds.
step 10 to finish. The comment may
consist of up to 12 alphanumeric
characters.
1 Press the cursor keys to select
Sh
alphanumeric character.
2 Press the NU/CU ENT key. Selected
character appears on the COMMENT
line.
٠ To create a space, select "_".
٠ Numeric data can be input directly by
DA
pressing numeric keys.

٠ To clear wrong data, press the
CLEAR key.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to complete the
comment.
4 Select ENTER and press the NU/CU
N
ENT key.
KA
4-2
td.
Registering waypoints by MOB Registering waypoints by own ship's
position/event position position
Note: When there is no position data, you
., L
The MOB position or an event position can
be registered as a waypoint. Event marks cannot register a waypoint at own ship's
are numbered from 01 to 99; 01 is the latest position. The buzzer sounds and the
event mark. following message appears.
Note: You cannot register a MOB position
Co
or event position when there are no No position data
MOB positions or event positions
saved. The buzzer sounds and the
message shown in Figure 4-7 Figure 4-9
appears for three seconds to alert 1) Press the WPT/RTE key.
you. 2) Press 3 to select Own Ship Position.
ing
3) Follow steps 5 through 11 in "Registering
waypoints by the cursor" on page 4-1.
No MOB/event data in memory
Registering waypoints using range

and bearing from a position
Figure 4-7
uild
This method is useful for entering a waypoint
using range and bearing from a
1) Press the WPT/RTE key.
pre-registered waypoint.
2) Press 2 to select MOB/Event Position.
The display shown in Figure 4-8 appears.
Range and bearing to a position are
[MOB] Displaying MOB data calculated according to the sailing method
ipb
34° 12.345’ N 130° 23.456’ E (rhumb line or great circle) chosen on the
PLOTTER SETUP menu. You may choose
[#01] Displaying event data
the unit of range on the UNIT SETUP menu.
34° 12.345’ N 130° 23.456’ E
AUG 12’ 95 19 : 25U
1) Press the WPT/RTE key.
: Paging
2) Press the 4 key to display the RNG/BRG
Sh

to Position display.
Figure 4-8 RNG/BRG to Position
From Waypoint No. _ _ _
3) Press or to display the MOB _ _ _ _. _ _ _’N _ _ _ _ _ _._ _ _’W
position or event position to register as a
waypoint. Range 0000.000NM
Bearing 000.00
DA

5) Follow steps 5 through 11 in "Registering
waypoints by the cursor" on page 4-1.
: Cursor MENU: Escape
ENT: Calculation : N/S, E/W
N
RNG/BRG Position Display

3) Enter waypoint (000-999) from which to
reference range and bearing. (000 is own
KA
ship position.)
4-3
td.
Note: Alternatively, you may enter position,
Waypoint List (L/L)
leaving the waypoint number blank.
001 34° 12.345’ N 130° 23.456’ W
., L
4) Enter range and bearing you wish to use MARINE POINT AUG 12’ 95 12 : 35U
to calculate position of new waypoint. 002 36° 12.345’ N 135° 23.456’ W
5) Press the NU/CU ENT key. The display A POINT AUG 13’ 95 13 : 45U
now looks something like the one below. 003 ° . ’N ° . ’W
Co
32 32.22’N 133 41.853’W 004 ° . ’N ° . ’W
JUN 6’ 06 7:30U
No. : 002 : L/L LOP : Edit
Mark: _
CMNT: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Figure 4-10
ing
4) Press or to select unused
: Cursor : Column
waypoint number.
ENT: Enter
5) Press or to enter position. The
display should now look something like
6) If necessary, change waypoint number
Figure 4-11.
and add a comment. For how to enter a
uild
comment see page 4-2.
Edit = Waypoint : 001
7) Press the CU/NU ENT key to finish.
_ _° _ _._ _ _’ N _ _ _°_ _._ _ _’ W
Note: If waypoint number entered at step 6) Mark : __

is an existing number, a part of a registered CMNT :
route, a part of a currently selected route, or
ipb
a GOTO waypoint, a prompt asks if it is OK to : Cursor : Column

write over the waypoint. Follow the ENT: Enter MENU: Escape
instructions in the prompt to write over the
mark number or escape. Figure 4-11
6) Enter latitude and longitude. To enter 34°
Sh
Registering waypoints through the 12.345' N 135° 23.456' E, for example,

waypoint list press;
1) Press the WPT/RTE key. ([ ]) 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5
2) Press 5 to display the waypoint list. ([ ]) 1, 3, 5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
3) Press to select position format; To change N to S or E to W, press .
latitude and longitude or LOP. 7) Press .
DA
8) Press or to select mark.

10) Enter comment.
11) Press the NU/CU ENT key twice.
The waypoint list reappears. Waypoint
position and date and time the waypoint
N
was entered appear on the list.

12) To enter another waypoint through the
waypoint list, return to step 4.
KA
13) Press the MENU ESC key to finish.
4-4
td.
4.2 Editing Waypoints 4.3 Deleting Waypoints
1) Press WPT RTE and 5. Deleting waypoints by the cursor
., L
2) Press or to select waypoint to
1) Place the cursor on the waypoint to
edit.
delete.
3) Press .
2) Press the CLEAR key.
4) Edit the contents of the waypoint.
5) Press the NU/CU ENT key. The message
Deleting waypoints through the
Co
waypoint list
waypoint is currently selected as
destination, is part of a route, or is in the 1) Press WPT RTE and 5.
route currently selected as destination. 2) Press or to select waypoint to
delete.
1st line 3) Press the CLEAR key. The message
Are you sure to change ? shown in Figure 4-13 appears if the
ing
ENT: Yes MENU: No
destination, is part of a route, or is in the
route currently selected as destination.
1st line
This wpt is GOTO Are you sure to erase ?
uild
This wpt is in registered route
This wpt is in selected route ENT: Yes MENU: No
Figure 4-12
The waypoint and its data are deleted.
ipb
This wpt is GOTO

Enter new data, referring to "4.1 This wpt is in registered route
Registering Waypoints". This wpt is in selected route
Figure 4-13
Sh
Note: All waypoint marks (as well as all other

marks) and their data can be cleared
collectively by clearing the Plotter
memory. For further details, see
page 9-1.
DA
Note: To cancel erasure, press the MENU

ESC key instead of the NU/CU ENT
key. The waypoint list appears.
N

KA
4-5
td.
4.4 Registering Routes Route : 01 (In Use , Reverse)
Skip Distance TTG
Often a trip from one place to another Trial Speed : AUTO MAN (012.0kn)
., L
Route
involves several course changes, requiring a 01 EN . NM D H M editing
02 EN . NM D H M screen
series of route points which you navigate to,
001 34° 12.345’ N 130° 23.456’ E
one after another. The sequence of
MARINE POINT AUG 12’ 95 12 : 35U
waypoints leading to the ultimate destination 002 36° 12.345’ N 135° 23.456’ E Waypoint
is called a route. The GP-150 can list
A POINT AUG 13’ 95 13 : 45U
automatically advance to the next waypoint : ROUTE WPT CLEAR: Delete
Co
on a route, so you do not have to change the
destination waypoint repeatedly. Use: In use
FWD: Traverse waypoints in forward order
The GP-150 can store 30 routes and each RVS: Traverse waypoints in reverse order
route may contain up to 30 waypoints.

Figure 4-15 Route editing screen
Routes can be registered while in the Plotter
1 or Plotter 2 display mode.
ing
5) If required, press to enter the speed
Registering routes by which to calculate time-to-go.
6) Press or to select AUTO or MAN.
1) Press the WPT/RTE key. Auto: Current average speed is used to
2) Press 6 to select Route Planning. The calculate the time-to-go.
route list appears. Manual: Entered speed is used to
uild
Route List calculate the time-to-go. Enter
No. Pts Total DIST TTG Remark speed and press .
01 30 1234 . 56 NM 12D15H28M UseFWD
02 25 234 . 56 NM 2D08H35M Route waypoints may be registered two
03 30 *999. 99 NM *9D*9H*9M ways: entering waypoint number directly or
04 . NM D H M through the route editing screen. Follow 1
ipb
05 30 6543 . 21 NM 34D23H45M or 2 below.

06 . NM D H M
1 Entering waypoint number directly
: Route No. : Edit
ENT: Enter MENU: Escape 7) Enter waypoint number, in three digits.
The cursor shifts to the "Skip" window.
Sh
Remarks
Use: In use The procedure for skipping a waypoint is
FWD: Traverse waypoints in forward order shown on page 5-5. For now, go to the
RVS: Traverse waypoints in reverse order
next step.
Figure 4-14 Route list 8) Press to continue. If the waypoint
3) Press or to select route number. entered in step 7 does not exist, you are
4) Press . informed that the waypoint does not exist
DA
The route planning/waypoint list window and entry is cancelled.

appear as shown in Figure 4-15. The 9) Enter other route waypoints by repeating
waypoint list window lists the position and steps 7 and 8.
data for each registered waypoint. No 10) Press MENU ESC to finish.
position or data appears for empty
N
waypoints.
KA
4-6
td.
2 Using previously registered waypoints
4.6 Replacing Route
Enter waypoints in the order they will be Waypoints
traversed; not by waypoint number order.
., L
1) Press WPT RTE and 6 to display the
7) Press . The reverse video on the
route list.
waypoint on route planning screen
2) Press or to select route.
disappears.
3) Press to display route editing screen.
8) Press or to select waypoint
4) On the route editing screen, place the
number.
cursor on waypoint number to replace.
Co
9) Press the NU/CU ENT key. Selected
5) Enter new waypoint number.
waypoint number appears on the route
editing screen. The distance and
time-to-go indications to the first waypoint
entered are blank. This waypoint already exists
10) To enter other route waypoints, repeat Are you sure to change ?
steps 8 and 9.
ing
ENT: Yes MENU: No
11) Press the MENU ESC key to finish.
Figure 4-16
Note: To return to the route editing screen,
press . Note: When the waypoint number entered at
step 5 is not registered, the message
uild
“This waypoint not registered. Copy
4.5 Deleting Route
original data to this No.?” appears.
Waypoints Press NU/CU ENT key to copy the
1) Press WPT RTE and 6 to display the position data.
route list.
2) Press or to select route. 7) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
ipb
3) Press to display route editing screen. 8) Press the MENU ESC key twice.
4) Select the waypoint to delete.
5) Press the CLEAR key.
7) Repeat steps 4 through 6 to continue
Sh
deleting waypoints.
8) Press the MENU ESC key. The route is
rearranged to reflect the change.
N DA
KA
4-7
td.
4.7 Deleting Routes
., L
route list.
2) Press or to select route to delete.
3) Press the CLEAR key. The display
shown in Figure 4-17 appears if the route
is in use.
Co
1st line
Are you sure to erase ?
ENT: Yes MENU: No
This route is in use
ing
Figure 4-17

uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
4-8
td.
5. STARTING FOR 2) Press 1 to select Cursor. The display
DESTINATION
., L
Place cursor on desired location
Press ENT twice to finish
ENT:Enter CLR:Clear MENU:Escape
5.1 Setting Destination

There are four ways by which you can set Figure 5-3
Co
destination: If the display in use is Highway,
• By cursor Navigation or Data display, the Plotter 2
display is automatically selected.
• By MOB position or event position 3) Place the cursor on the location desired
• By waypoint, and for destination.
• By route.
ing
Note: To clear selection, press the CLEAR
Note: Previous destination is cancelled
key.
whenever a destination is set.
5) Press the NU/CU ENT key to finish.
Setting destination by cursor Control is returned to the display mode in
uild
Using the cursor you may set a destination use before you set destination. A dashed
consisting of 30 points. When all 30 points line connects own ship and the
are entered, the GP-150 automatically destination, which is marked with a flag,
disables further entry. as shown in Figure 5-4.
Setting single destination

ipb
1) Press the GOTO key. The menu shown in

Figure 5-2 appears.
GOTO Setting
1. Cursor
Sh
2. MOB/Event Position
3. Waypoint List
4. Route List
5. Cancel
: Cursor
DA
ENT : Enter MENU : Escape
Figure 5-2 GOTO setting menu

N
KA
5-1
td.
Flag
mark Overwriting ?
., L
ENT:Yes MENU:No
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-4 Single destination set by cursor The waypoints do not have waypoint
Co
numbers, however you can attach
Setting multiple destinations waypoint numbers by doing the following.
1 Press WPT RTE and 6 to display the
1) Press GOTO and 1.
route list.
2) Place the cursor on the location desired 2 Press or to select route number
for waypoint.
entered.
ing
3 Press .
4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter other points. 4 Enter waypoint number, in three digits.
Waypoints are connected with a line. 5 Press . If the waypoint number already
5) Press the NU/CU ENT key to finish. The
exists the message shown in Figure 5-7
route number entry display appears as
appears.
shown in Figure 5-5. If no route number
uild
appears or you want to change the route This waypoint already exists
number shown, go to step 6 to enter route Are you sure to change ?
number. To register the route under the ENT:Yes MENU:No
number shown, go to step 8.
Enter route number Figure 5-7

6 Press the NU/CU ENT key. The waypoint
ipb
01
ENT:Enter MENU: Escape entered here replaces previously entered
waypoint.
Figure 5-5
Note: To cancel replacement of waypoint,
press the MENU ESC key at step 6.
Sh
6) Key in route number.

7) Press the NU/CU ENT key. Waypoints are 7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter other
marked with flags and are connected with
waypoint numbers.
a dashed line. 8 Press the MENU ESC key twice to finish.
If the route number entered already exists

When destination is cancelled, dashed lines
DA
the message shown in Figure 5-6

are erased but flags remain on the screen.
appears.
N
KA
5-2
td.
Setting destination by MOB position or Setting destination through waypoint
event position list
Note: This operation cannot be performed
., L
when there is no MOB position or Note: A waypoint must exist to set it as
event position. The buzzer sounds destination. When a waypoint does
and the message shown in Figure 5-8 not exist, the buzzer sounds and the
appears to alert you when there is no message shown in Figure 5-10
MOB position or event position. appears.
Co
No MOB/event data in memory No waypoint data
Figure 5-8 Figure 5-10
ing
1) Press the GOTO key.
2) Press 2 to select MOB/Event Position. Destination waypoint can be set through the
The display shown in Figure 5-9 appears. waypoint list two ways:
• By entering waypoint number, and
[MOB] Displaying MOB data • By selecting waypoint by cursor
uild
34° 12.345’ N 130° 23.456’ E
[#01] Displaying event data 1) Press the GOTO key.
34° 12.345’ N 130° 23.456’ E 2) Press 3 to display the Waypoint List.
AUG 12’ 95 19 : 25U
GOTO (Waypoint List)
: Paging
Waypoint No.
ipb
001 34° 12.345’ N 132° 23.456’ E

MARINE POINT AUG 12’ 95 12:35U
Figure 5-9 002 34° 12.345’ N 133° 12.345’ E
3) Press or to select MOB position or A POINT AUG 13’ 95 13:28U
event position. The MOB position appears 005 41° 34.567’ N 135° 23.456’ E
first. To select event position, press . If B POINT AUG 14’ 95 09:45U
Sh
selected position is within the current

display range, the cursor marks the No. /List ENT:Enter
position. (The cursor does not appear on
the Highway, Navigation and Data Waypoint number can be entered here
when this line appears in reverse video.
displays.)
4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. A flag appears Figure 5-11 Waypoint list
DA
at position selected if it is within the

current display range. A dashed line
Set destination by following 1 or 2 on the
connects between own ship and MOB
next page.
position or event position.
When destination is cancelled, dashed lines

N
are erased but flags remain on the screen.

KA
5-3
td.
1 Setting destination by waypoint no.
Route number can be entered here
when this line appears in reverse video.
3) Enter waypoint number, in three digits.
GOTO (Route List) Forward
., L
You can clear entry by pressing the
Route No.
CLEAR key.
No. Pts Total TTG
01 30 1234. 56NM 12D15H28M
02 25 234. 56NM 2D08H35M
Own ship position becomes starting point and
05 8 57. 89NM 0D10H28M
a dashed line runs between it and the
Co
06 30 *999. 99NM *9D*9H*9M
waypoint selected.
10 30 6543. 21NM 34D23H45M
2 Setting destination by selecting wpt. : No. /List

ENT:Enter MENU:Escape
3) Press . Each press of the key
alternately enables manual entry of
Figure 5-13 Route list
waypoint number and selection of
ing
waypoint number by cursor (through the
1 By entering route number
waypoint window).
4) Press or to select waypoint. 3) Press or to select direction which to
5) Press the NU/CU ENT key. traverse the route waypoints; forward or
reverse.
uild
Own ship position becomes starting point and 4) Enter route number.
a dashed line runs between it and the 5) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
waypoint selected.
Current position becomes starting point. A
Setting route as destination dashed line connects the starting point and
Note: Route entered must exist to set it as all route waypoints.
ipb
destination. The buzzer sounds and

2 By selecting a route
the message shown in Figure 5-12
appears if you set enter a route which 3) Press . Each press of the key
does not exist. alternately enables manual entry of route
number and selection of route number
Sh
(through the route window)

No route data 4) Press or to select route.
5) Press or to select direction in which
to traverse the route waypoints; forward
Figure 5-12 or reverse.
DA
A route to set as destination may selected

through the route list two ways: Current position becomes starting point. A
• By entering route number, and solid line connects between the starting point
and first route waypoint and a dashed line
• By selecting route. connects all other route waypoints.
N
2) Press 4 to display the Route List. Then,

follow 1 or 2 in the adjacent column.
KA
5-4
td.
Skipping route waypoints 2) Press or to select route waypoint
to skip.
You may skip route waypoints by displaying
3) Press or to shift the cursor to the
., L
"DI" (DIsable) next to the route waypoint in
right of the waypoint number.
the route list. Using Figure 5-14 as an
4) Press to change "EN"(ENable) to
example, your ship is currently heading
"DI"(DIsable).
toward waypoint 04 but is to switch course
and head to waypoint 03. In this case you
would want to skip waypoint 04.
Co
To reselect the waypoint, select it on the
Waypoint 01 route list and press to change "DI" to
Port A Waypoint 02
"EN".
Waypoint 03
Waypoint 04
New course
5.2 Canceling Destination
ing
Waypoint 05 2) Press 5 to select Cancel. The message
Port B Waypoint 06 shown in Figure 5-16 appears.
Release GOTO ?
Figure 5-14
uild
ENT:Yes MENU:No
route list. Press the cursor keys to select Figure 5-16
route.
"EN" indicates waypoint
is enabled. Display "DI" 3) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
to skip waypoint.
ipb
Route :01 (In Use, Reverse)

Skip Distance TTG
Trial Speed AUTO MAN (012.0kn)
01 00 04 EN NM D H M
02 0 03 EN 345.67NM 2D 12H 34M
Sh
004 34° 12.345’ N 130° 23.456’ E

MARINE POINT APR 10’ 95 12:35U
003 36° 12.345’ N 135° 23.456’ E

A POINT APR 10’ 95 13:45U
: ROUTE WPT CLEAR: Delete

DA
Figure 5-15 Route list

N
KA
5-5
td.
5.3 Erasing Route When flags are erased
Waypoints (flags) When the origin waypoint is erased the
., L
waypoint before it becomes the origin
1) Place the cursor on the flag to erase.
waypoint. If there is no waypoint before the
2) Press the CLEAR key. The message
origin waypoint, current position becomes the
origin waypoint.
Destination
destination, is part of a registered route, Delete waypoint
Co
or is part of the route currently being
navigated. Starting
point Course
Release GOTO ?
Own
ENT:Yes MENU:No ship
ing
Figure 5-17
Note: Flags can be erased collectively by

uild
Destination
clearing the Plotter memory or both waypoint
the Plotter memory and GPS memory.
See page 9-1 for further details.
ipb
Figure 5-18 Route rearranged

after erasing flag
When a destination is erased, the waypoint

Sh
which follows it becomes the destination. If

there is no waypoint after the destination
waypoint erased, route navigation is
cancelled.
N DA
KA
5-6
td.
5.4 Finding Range and Calculation Procedure
Bearing Between Two You can find the range and bearing between
Points
., L
two points by two waypoints or two latitude
and longitude positions.
Selecting Course Sailing Method 1) Press MENU ESC and 5. The MANUAL
The range and bearing to a destination are CALCULATION menu appears.
calculated by two ways: Great Circle or MANUAL CALCULATION
Rhumb Line. However, cross track error is
Co
From Waypoint No.
calculated by rhumb line only. ° . ’N ° . ’E
To Waypoint No.
Great Circle: The great circle courseline is ° . ’N ° . ’E
the shortest course between two points on Trial Speed : AUTO MAN
the surface of the earth. (Imagine stretching a ( . kn)
piece of yarn between two points on the RNG: . NM BRG: . °
TTG: D H M
ing
earth.) However, this course requires
: Cursor MENU : Escape
frequent change of heading to follow course
ENT : Calculation : N/S, E/W
faithfully.
Figure 5-20 MANUAL CALCULATION menu
Rhumb Line: The rhumb line courseline is
the straight line drawn between two points on
uild
2) Choose two points by one of the methods
a nautical chart. This course does not require below.
frequent changes of heading however it is not
the shortest since it follows the earth's Latitude and longitude positions
curvature.
1) Press .
1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 1 to display the 2) If necessary press to switch from North
ipb
PLOTTER SETUP menu. latitude and to South latitude vice versa.

3) Key in latitude.
PLOTTER SETUP 4) If necessary press to switch from West
Memory Apportion TRK = 1000 / 2000Pt longitude to East longitude and vice
Bearing REF True MAG versa.
Sh
MAG Variation AUTO MAN 5) Key in longitude.

(07° W) (00° E) 6) Press .
Calculation RL GC 7) Repeat 2-5 to enter other point.
User defined #1 SOG
Waypoints
User defined #2 COG
User defined #3 RNG 1) Key in first waypoint number (001-999).
DA
User defined #4 BRG (000 is reserved for own ship position.)

ENT:Enter MENU:Escape 2) Press twice.
3) Key in other waypoint number (001-999).
(Continued on next page)
Figure 5-19 PLOTTER SETUP menu
2) Press or to selection Calculation.
N
3) Press or to select R.L (Rhumb

Line) or G.C (Great Circle).
KA
5-7
td.
4) Press to shift the cursor to the Trial
Speed line.
., L
Auto uses ship's average speed to
calculate time-to-go.
6) If you selected MAN, enter speed.
Co
The range, bearing and time-to-go between
two points appear on the display. If data
entered is wrong or insufficient the buzzer
sounds and the message "Incomplete Data"
appears. If the data contains error, and all
nines appear as the calculation results.
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
5-8
td.
•
6. SETTING UP •
Speed thru water (STW)
Time-to-go to waypoint (TTG)
VARIOUS •
•
ETA to route (ROUTE ETA)
., L
Total route distance (ROUTE DIST)*
DISPLAYS •
•
Trip distance (TRIP)
Trip elapsed time (TRIP TIME)
• Water temperature (WAT TEMP)#, and
• Velocity to destination (VTD)*
6.1 Selecting Data to Display
*ALT: Displayed only in 3D position fixing.
Co
on the Data Display *ROUTE DIST: Total distance from current
The user may select what data to display in position to ultimate destination. Appears
four locations on the data display. when following a registered route or a
D3D 100m
cursor-created route.
JAN 12, 2009 23:59’59" U * * SAFE
*VTD: When following a route, plus or minus
Position
12 23.456’ N appears next to indication to denote which
ing
direction the route is being traversed.
W84
123 23.456’ E
RNG BRG TO : 001 # Requires external sensor.
MARINE
31.23 NM 223.4 POINT1
1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 1 to display the
SOG COG NEXT : 002
uild
PLOTTER SETUP menu.
12.3 kn 123.4 MARINE
POINT2
PLOTTER SETUP
Memory Apportion TRK = 1000 / 2000Pt
User-defined User-defined Bearing REF True MAG
MAG Variation AUTO MAN
User-defined User-defined
display data #3 (07 W) (00 E)
ipb
display data #2
User-defined Calculation RL GC
display window
User defined #1 SOG
Figure 6-1 Data display User defined #2 COG
User defined #3 RNG
User defined #4 BRG
Sh
The data the user may select to display are;

• Altitude (ALT)* ENT:Enter MENU:Escape
• Average course (AVR COG)
• Average speed (AVR SOG) Figure 6-2 PLOTTER SETUP menu
• Course (COG) 2) Press or to select one of four of
• Course error (dCOG) "User defined" (#1, #2, #3, #4).
•
DA
Cross track error (XTE) 3) Press or to select data to display.

• Depth (WAT DPTH)# 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. To select the
• Drift (DRIFT) data to display at other user defined
• ETA to waypoint (ETA) displays, repeat steps 2 and 3.
• Heading (HDG) 5) Press the MENU ESC key.
• Range to waypoint (RNG)
N
• Bearing to waypoint (BRG)

• Route time-to-go (ROUTE TTG)
• Set (SET)
KA
• Speed over ground (SOG)
6-1
6. SETTING UP VARIOUS DISPLAYS
td.
6.2 Selecting Position Format 1 For Loran LOPs
Position can be displayed in latitude and 6) Press to select LC Chain.
., L
longitude, Loran C LOPs, or Decca LOPs, 7) Key in GRI code referring to the Loran C
and the default format is latitude and chain list appears in the Appendix. If the
longitude. GRI code is 9970, for example, press 9, 9,
7, 0.
Selecting position format (L/L or 8) Key in secondary code pair referring to
LOPs) the Loran C chain list in the Appendix.
Co
9) Press .
10) Key in correction value.
LOP SETUP menu.
11) If necessary, press to switch from
LOP SETUP plus to minus or vice versa.
Pos
POSDisplay
Display LAT/ LON
Lat / Long LOP 12) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
LOP Display LC DE 13)Press the MENU ESC key.
LC Chain 7980 : 23-43
ing
LOP -12.3 s +0.34 s 2 For Decca LOPs
DE Chain 24:G - P
LOP +0.80 Lane -1.00 Lane 6) Press to select DE Chain.
7) Key in Decca chain number referring to
(Red:1 Green:2 Purple:3)
the Decca chain list in the Appendix. For
uild
: Select ENT : Enter the Europe chain, for example, press 0,
MENU : Escape : +/-
1.
Figure 6-3 LOP SETUP menu 8) Key in Decca lane pair. Red, 1; Green 2,
and Purple 3.
9) Press .
2) Press or to select POS Display.
10) Key in lane correction value.
3) Press or to select LAT/LON or LOP.
ipb

plus to minus or vice versa.
Displaying LOPs
1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 8.
2) Press or to select POS Display.
Sh
3) Press or to select LOP.

4) Press to select LOP Display.
5) Press or to select LC (Loran C) or
DE (Decca).
Follow 1 or 2 in the adjacent column

DA
according to selection in step 5.

N
KA
6-2
td.
Registering waypoints using LOPs 5) Key in LOP1 and LOP2, to enable
calculation.
1) Press WPT RTE and 5.
6) Press to calculate LOPs. "Calculating"
., L
2) Press to display LOPs.
appears between parentheses during the
Waypoint List (LOP, LC) calculation. Actual LOPs replace
001 36365.2 59102.3 "Calculating" upon completion of the
MARINE POINT AUG12’ 95 12 : 35U calculation.
002 36512.3 59134.5 If the conversion fails, the message
Co
___ A POINT AUG13’ 95 13 : 45U "Failed in Conversion" appears for three
003 _ _ _ _ _ , _ _____,_ seconds.
___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Press the CLEAR key and reenter the
004 _ _ _ _ _ , _ _____,_ right LOP1 and LOP2.
___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 7) Press or to select mark.
: L/L LOP : Edit 8) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
ENT : Enter MENU : Escape 9) Enter comment, if desired.
ing
Figure 6-4 LOP display on the waypoint list Waypoint data and date and time
registered appear.
3) Press or to select waypoint
number.
uild
4) Press or . Your display should look
like one of the displays in Figure 6-5.
Edit=Waypoint : 001
LC8930 : 30 50
33 8931.2 58654.3
(34° 12.345’ N 130° 23.456’ E)
ipb
Mark :
CMNT : MARINE POINT
: Cursor : Column
Sh
Loran C LOP input screen
Edit=Waypoint : 001
DE : 32 (9C) Red Green

11 A:12.23 2H:24.35
(34° 12.345’ N 130° 23.456’ E)
DA
Mark :
CMNT : MARINE POINT
ABCDEFGHIJ 1, 2 ~ 9, 0
: Cursor : Column
N
Decca LOP input screen
Figure 6-5 LOP input screens

KA
6-3
td.
6.3 Demo Display Note: When the memory is cleared while
The demo display provides simulated in the demonstration mode, the
equipment starts up in the normal
., L
operation of this unit. Own ship tracks, at the
speed selected, a figure eight course, starting mode.
from position entered. All controls are
operative; you may change course, enter
marks, etc.
Co
1) While pressing and holding down NU/CU
ENT, turn on the power. After the test
results appear, the Simulation Mode
menu appears.
Demo Setting
Base Position
ing
_ _° _ _._ _ _’ N _ _ _°_ _._ _ _’ W
Speed
00.0 kn
uild
: Cursor : Column
ENT: Enter : N/S, E/W
Figure 6-6 Simulation mode menu
2) Key in latitude of initial position.

ipb
north latitude to south latitude or vice

versa.
4) Key in longitude.
east longitude to west longitude or vice
Sh
versa.
6) Press key.
7) Key in speed.
8) Press the NU/CU ENT key to start the
simulation mode.
DA
The icon S appears in the plotter 1, 2, and

highway display. All controls are
operative.
Note: The return to the normal mode, turn
off the power and then turn it on
N
while pressing and holding down

NU/CU ENT key.
KA
6-4
td.
7. ALARMS 2) Press 4 to display the ALARM
SETTINGS menu.
., L
ALARM SETTINGS 1/2
There are seven alarm conditions which Arrival/Anchor ARRV ANCH Off
generate both audible and visual alarms. Alarm Range 0.100NM
When an alarm setting is violated, the buzzer XTE On Off
Alarm Range 0.050NM
sounds and the name of the offending alarm
Ship Speed In Over
Over Off
Co
appears on the display. The alarm icon also
Speed Rage 000.0 ~ 025.0kn
appears on the Plotter 1, Plotter 2 and To Next Page
Highway displays. : Select
34° 23.456´ N 135° 45.678´ E D3D 100m
* SAFE
BRG Figure 7-3 ALARM SETTINGS
234.0° menu, page 1/2
ing
Alarm message
COG
345.0° 3) Press or to select Arrival/Anchor.
Arrival Alarm RNG
Speed Alarm 4) Press or to select ARRV.
Alarm
icon
123 NM 5) Press to select Alarm Range.
Press CLEAR to silence beep SOG 6) Key in alarm range (0.001-9.999 NM).
uild
12.3kn 7) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
Press CLEAR
When own ship nears a waypoint by the
range set here, the buzzer sounds and the
Press CLEAR to close window message "Arrival Alarm" appears. You can
silence the audible alarm by pressing the
Figure 7-1 Location of alarm messages and
ipb
CLEAR key. To erase the visual alarm, press

alarm icon the CLEAR key again.
To disable the alarm, select Off at step 5.
7.1 Arrival Alarm, Anchor
Watch Alarm
Sh
Arrival alarm
The arrival alarm informs you that own ship
is approaching a destination waypoint. The
area that defines an arrival zone is that of a
circle which you approach from the outside
DA
of the circle. The alarm will be released if

own ship enters the circle.
Alarm
setting
N
Own ship’s Destination

waypoint
position : Alarm range
Figure 7-2 How the arrival alarm works

KA
7-1
7. ALARMS
td.
Anchor watch alarm 7.2 Cross Track Error (XTE)
The anchor watch alarm sounds to warn you Alarm
., L
that own ship is moving when it should be at
The XTE alarm warns you when own ship is
rest.
off its intended course.
Alarm
setting Own ship’s Destination
position Starting Own ship’s Alarm
: Alarm range waypoint position setting waypoint
Destination
Co
waypoint
: Alarm range
Figure 7-5 How the XTE alarm works

Figure 7-4 How the anchor
watch alarm works 1) Press MENU ESC and 4.
2) Press or to select XTE.
Before setting the anchor watch alarm, set 3) Press or to select On.
ing
present position as destination waypoint, 4) Press to select Alarm Range.
referring to chapter 5. 5) Key in alarm range (0.001-9.999 NM).
1) Press MENU ESC and 4. 6) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
2) Press or to select Arrival/Anchor. 7) Press the MENU ESC key.
3) Press or to select ANCH.
uild
4) Press to select Alarm Range. When own ship strays from the intended
5) Key in alarm range (0.001-9.999 NM). track by the range set here, the buzzer
6) Press the NU/CU ENT key. sounds and the message "Cross Track Error
7) Press the MENU ESC key. Alarm" appears. You can silence the audible
When own ship drifts by the range set here, alarm by pressing the CLEAR key. To erase
the buzzer sounds and the message "Anchor the visual alarm, press the CLEAR key
ipb
Alarm" appears. You can silence the audible again.

alarm by pressing the CLEAR key. To erase To disable the alarm, select Off at step 3.
the visual alarm, press the CLEAR key
again.
Sh
N DA
KA
7-2
7. ALARMS
td.
7.3 Ship’s Speed Alarm 7.4 Trip Alarm
The ship’s speed alarm sounds when ship's The trip alarm sounds when the distance run
., L
speed is lower or higher (or within) the alarm is greater than the trip alarm setting.
range set. 1) Press MENU ESC and 4.
1) Press MENU ESC and 4. 2) Press or to select To Next Page.
2) Press or to select Ship Speed. The menu shown in Figure 7-6 appears.
3) Press or to select In (or Over). ALARM SETTINGS 2/2
In: Alarm sounds when speed is within To Previous Page
Co
range set. Trip (CLR:Reset) On Off
Off
Over: Alarm sounds when speed is Trip Range 0123.00NM
higher or lower than range set. Water TEMP In Over Off
TEMP Range +12.0 ~ +15.0 C
4) Press to select Speed Range.
Depth In Over Off
5) Key in low speed. Depth Range 0003.0 ~ 0200.0ft
6) Key in high speed. WAAS/DGPS On Off
ing
7) Press the NU/CU ENT key. : Select ENT : Enter
8) Press the MENU ESC key. MENU : Escape : +/-
When speed is higher or lower (or within) Figure 7-6 Alarm settings menu, page 2/2
than the speed set here, the buzzer sounds
uild
and the message "Speed Alarm" appears. 3) Press or to select Trip.
You can silence the audible alarm by 4) If necessary, press CLEAR to reset the
pressing the CLEAR key. To erase the visual trip distance and trip elapsed time (see
alarm, press the CLEAR key again. page 6-1).
5) Press or to select On.
To disable the alarm, select Off at step 3. 6) Press to select Trip Range.
ipb
7) Key in trip range.

When the ship's distance run is higher than

the trip range set here, the buzzer sounds
Sh
and the message "Trip Alarm" appears. You

can silence the audible alarm by pressing
the CLEAR key. To erase the visual alarm,
press the CLEAR key again.

N DA
KA
7-3
7. ALARMS
td.
7.5 Water Temperature 7.6 Depth Alarm
Alarm The depth temperature alarm sounds when
., L
The water temperature alarm sounds when the depth is higher or lower (or within) the
the water temperature is higher or lower (or preset depth. This alarm requires video
within) the preset temperature. This alarm sounder connection.
requires temperature signal from external 1) Press MENU ESC and 4.
equipment. 2) Press or to select Depth.
3) Press or to select In (or Over).
Co
1) Press MENU ESC and 4. 4) Press to select Depth Range.
2) Press or to select Water TEMP. 5) Key in low depth.
3) Press or to select In (or Over). 6) Key in high depth.
4) Press to select TEMP Range. 7) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
5) Key in low temperature. 8) Press the MENU ESC key.
6) Key in high temperature.
ing
7) Press the NU/CU ENT key. When the depth is higher or lower (or within)
8) Press the MENU ESC key. the preset value, the buzzer sounds and the
message "Depth Alarm" appears. You can
When the water temperature is higher or silence the audible alarm by pressing the
lower (or within) the preset value, the buzzer CLEAR key. To erase the visual alarm, press
uild
sounds and the message "Water TEMP the CLEAR key again.
Alarm" appears. You can silence the audible
alarm by pressing the CLEAR key. To erase To disable the alarm, select Off at step 3.
the visual alarm, press the CLEAR key
again. 7.7 WAAS/DGPS Alarm
The WAAS/DGPS alarm sounds when the
ipb

WAAS/DGPS signal is lost. This alarm may
be enabled or disabled as below.
1) Press MENU ESC and 4.

2) Press or to select WAAS/DGPS.
Sh
3) Press to select On, or to select Off.

4) Press the NU/CU/ENT key.
N DA
KA
7-4
td.
8. MENU noticeable at high ship’s speeds. "0" is the
normal setting; increase the setting if the
SETTINGS GPS fix changes greatly.
., L
GPS Smoothing, SPD
During position fixing, ship’s velocity (speed

8.1 GPS Menu and course) is directly measured by
Menu description receiving GPS satellite signals. The raw
v e l o c i t y d a ta m a y c h a n g e r a n d o m l y
Fix Mode
Co
depending on receiving conditions and other
Two position fixing modes are available: 2D factors. You can reduce this random
and 2/3D. The 2D mode provides two variation by increasing the smoothing. Like
dimensional position fixes (latitude and with latitude and longitude smoothing, the
longitude only) and is used when three higher the speed and course smoothing the
satellites are in line of sight of the GPS more smoothed the raw data. If the setting is
ing
receiver. too high, however, the response to speed
The 2/3D mode switches between two and and course change slows. For no smoothing,
three dimension position fixing automatically enter "0." "5" is suitable for most conditions.
depending on how many satellites (three or
four) are in light of sight of the GPS receiver. Speed Average
uild
Calculation of ETA and TTG, etc. is based on
ANT Height average ship’s speed over a given period.
Enter the height of the antenna unit above The default setting is one minute.
sea surface (000-999 ft, 000-304 m). The
default setting is 16 ft. RAIM Function/RAIM Accuracy
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity

Disable Satellite
ipb
Monitoring) is a diagnostic function which

Every GPS satellite is broadcasting tests the accuracy of the GPS signal. To use
abnormal satellite number(s) in the Almanac. the RAIM function, enter the range (from
Using this information, the GPS receiver own ship in meters) for which you want to
automatically eliminates any malfunctioning know position confidence, on the GPS Setup
Sh
satellite from the GPS satellite schedule. 2/2 menu. The receiver estimates position
However, the Almanac sometimes may not confidence using range value and detected
contain this information. You can disable an satellite error, and displays (provided the
inoperative satellite manually on the GPS RAIM function is active) the results as one of
SETUP menu. three levels of position confidence, at the top
right-hand corner of the screen. The three
GPS Smoothing, POSN levels are as follows:
DA
When the DOP or receiving condition is SAFE: GPS signal is normal. The positioning
unfavorable, the GPS fix may change greatly, accuracy satisfies the setting value.
even if the vessel is dead in water. This CAUTION: RAIM accuracy cannot be
change can be reduced by smoothing the calculated. (Signals from more than five GPS
raw GPS fixes. A setting between 0 and 9 is satellites are necessary.) The positioning
N
available. The higher the setting the more accuracy does not satisfy the setting value.
UNSAFE: GPS signal is abnormal, therefore
smoothed the raw data, however too high a
the positioning accuracy is not reliable. Note
setting slows response time to change in
KA
that the GP-150 does not exclude abnormal

latitude and longitude. This is especially signals automatically.
8-1
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
Geodetic Datum Selecting fix mode
Select the geodetic chart system you are 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 6 to display the
., L
using. WGS-84 (standard GPS chart system) GPS SETUP menu.
and NAD 27 can be directly selected. For GPS SETUP 1/2
other charts, select "OTHER" and enter chart Fix Mode 2D 2/3D
number referring to the geodetic chart list in ANT Height 016 ft
Disable Satellite 12 (1-32)
the Appendix. GPS Smoothing
POSN 0 0 0 0 (0000-9999 sec)
Co
To output position data to ECDIS (Electronic SPD 0 0 0 5 (0000-9999 sec)
Chart Display and Information System), turn Speed Average 0 0 6 0 (0000-9999 sec)
To Next Page
on the power while holding down the [0] key.
: Select ENT : Enter
This disables access to the Geodetic Datum
MENU : Escape
menu. Then, "Cannot be changed" is shown
in the Geodetic Datum menu as in Figure 8-2 Figure 8-1 GPS SETUP menu, page 1/2
ing
on the next page. To stop outputting position
data to ECDIS, turn on the power while 2) Press or to select Fix Mode.
holding down the [0] key. 3) Press or to select the fix mode
desired.
POSN Offset 4) Press to change other settings, or
press MENU ESC key to register settings
uild
You may apply an offset to position
generated by the internal GPS receiver, to and escape.
compensate for difference between GPS
position and chart position. Disabling satellites
Time DIFF 2) Press or to select Disable
ipb
The GPS system uses UTC time. If you Satellite.

would rather use local time, enter the 3) Key in satellite number, in two digits
difference in hours between local time and (01-32). Three sets of satellite numbers
UTC. Use the numeric keys for times later or may be entered.
earlier than UTC, respectively. 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. If an invalid
number is entered the buzzer sounds.
Sh
POSN 5) Press the MENU ESC key.
When executing cold start there is no Note: To enable all disabled satellites, press
satellite information in the unit’s memory, the CLEAR key at step 3. All satellite
thus it may take some time to find position. numbers on the Disable Satellite line are
To fix position faster, enter estimated erased.
DA
position.
Entering GPS position smoothing
2) Press or to select POSN.
3) Enter smoothing factor in three digits
N
(0000-9999).
KA
8-2
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
Entering GPS speed smoothing 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
Press the MENU ESC key.
., L
2) Press or to select SPD.
3) Enter smoothing factor in three digits
Entering geodetic datum
(0000-9999). 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 6.
4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. 2) Press or to select Geodetic
5) Press the MENU ESC key. Datum on page 2/2.
3) Press or to select geodetic datum
Co
Entering speed averaging to use. For geodetic datum other than
WGS-84 or NAD-27, select Other and
key in chart number (001-173) referring
2) Press or to select Speed Average.
to the geodetic chart list in the Appendix.
3) Enter smoothing factor in two digits
(0000-9999).
ing
Entering position offset
Selecting RAIM Function If you do not know the type of chart you are
using, GPS position may be wrong. Note the
difference in position when moored to a pier
2) Press or to select RAIM Function
uild
and enter it on the GPS SETUP menu, to get
on page 2/2.
correct position.
GPS SETUP 2/2 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 6.
To Previous Page 2) Press or to select POSN Offset on
RAIM Function Off On page 2/2.
RAIM Accuracy 100 m 3) If necessary press to switch from
Geodetic Datum WGS84 NAD27 Other
ipb
(Cannot be changed) (001) north latitude to south latitude or vice

POSN Offset 0.000’ N 0.000’ E versa.
Time DIFF +00:00 4) Key in latitude correction.
POSN 38 00.000’ N 123 00.000’ W
5) If necessary press to switch from
: Select ENT : Enter east longitude to west longitude or vice
MENU : Escape : +/-
versa.
Sh
6) Key in longitude correction.

Figure 8-2 GPS SETUP menu, page 2/2
3) Press or to select RAIM Function 8) Press the MENU ESC key.
desired. L
The L icon appears when L/L offset is
4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. applied.
DA
Entering time difference

Entering RAIM Accuracy
1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 6. 2) Press or to select Time DIFF on
2) Press or to select RAIM Accuracy page 2/2.
on page 2/2. 3) Key in time difference (-14:00 to +14:00).
N
3) Key in the range for which you want to 4) Press to change from plus to minus
know RAIM Accuracy (1 to 999 m). or vice versa.
Note: Unit is meter only. 5) Press the MENU ESC key.
KA
8-3
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
Entering position Unit of depth
After the unit is installed you may enter 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 2.
., L
position to shorten the time it takes to find 2) Press or to select Unit of Depth.
position. (It takes about two minutes when 3) Press or to select unit; meter, feet,
there is no position data entered.) or fathom.
1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 6. 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
2) Press or to select POSN on page 5) Press the MENU ESC key.
2/2.
Co
3) If necessary, press to switch from Unit of water temperature
north latitude to south latitude or vice
versa. Key in latitude.
2) Press or to select Unit of TEMP.
3) Press or to select unit; Centigrade
east longitude to west longitude or vice
or Fahrenheit.
versa. Key in longitude.
4) Press NU/CU ENT and MENU ESC.
ing
Unit of altitude
Available only in 3D mode.
8.2 Selecting Units of 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 2.
2) Press or to select Unit of Altitude.
Measurement
uild
3) Press or to select unit.
Unit of distance 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
Distance can be displayed in nautical mile,
kilometer or statute mile as follows.
1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 2. The UNIT
SETUP menu appears.
ipb
UNIT SETUP
Unit of Distance NM km sm
Unit of Depth m ft fm
Unit of TEMP C F
Sh
Unit of Altitude m ft
:Select
Figure 8-3 UNIT SETUP menu

DA
2) Press or to select Unit of

Distance.
3) Press or to select unit; NM, km or
sm.
N

KA
8-4
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
8.3 Mark, Character Size Waypoint mark size
and Brilliance The size of the waypoint mark can be
., L
selected to large or small.
The DISPLAY SETUP menu lets you select
the size and brilliance of various markers. Large waypoint mark
No icon With icon

Grid tone
12
The grid can be displayed in light or dark 12
Co
tone, or turned off.
1) Press MENU ESC and 1. The DISPLAY
SETUP menu appears. Small waypoint mark
DISPLAY SETUP
Grid Dark Light Off
Course Bar Dark Light Off
Light Off
ing
Time Mark Dark
Waypoint Size Large Small
Cursor Size Large Small Figure 8-5 Waypoint mark size
Set/Drift AVR Off
: Select 1) Press MENU ESC and 1.
ENT : Enter MENU : Escape 2) Press or to select Waypoint Size.
uild
3) Press or to select Large or Small.
Figure 8-4 DISPLAY SETUP menu 4) Press NU/CU ENT and MENU ESC.
2) Press or to select Grid. Cursor size

3) Press or to select brilliance. The size of the cursor can be selected to
4) Press NU/CU ENT and MENU ESC. large or small.
ipb
Large Small
Course bar tone
The course bar can be displayed in light or
dark tone, or turned off.
1) Press MENU ESC and 1.
Sh
2) Press or to select Course Bar. Figure 8-6 Cursor size

3) Press or to select brilliance.
4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. 1) Press MENU ESC and 1.
5) Press the MENU ESC key. 2) Press or to select Cursor Size.
3) Press or to select Large or Small.
Time mark tone 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
DA
The time mark can be displayed in light or 5) Press the MENU ESC key.
dark tone, or turned off.
1) Press MENU ESC and 1. Set/Drift Average
2) Press or to select Time Mark. Set smoothing value to apply to set and drift
3) Press or to select brilliance. data. The higher the value the more
N
smoothed the data.

KA
8-5
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
Enlarging characters 8.4 Settings for Connection
The size of the indications of position or user of Navigator
., L
defined display areas can be enlarged on the
Besides its fundamental function of
Data display.
displaying position, the GP-150 can also
1) On the Data display, with no enlarged
output various data to external equipment.
characters, press the CURSOR ON/OFF
Before outputting data to external equipment,
key to turn on the zoom icon.
first determine what data the external
2) Operate the cursor keys to select data to
Co
equipment requires. Output only necessary
enlarge in the window.
data to ensure data will be output correctly.
3) Press the ZOOM IN key.
To switch character size from enlarged to
All data transmitted by marine electronics
normal, press the ZOOM OUT key at step 3.
equipment are prefixed with a two character
Position
code called a talker. The same talker must
D3D 100m
SEP 12, 2009 23:59'59" U * SAFE be shared by the transmitting and receiving
ing
equipment to transmit and receive data
Position 12˚ 23.456' N successfully. The GP-150 transmits data
W84 123˚ 23.456' E using the GP (GPS talker), however it can
also transmit using the Loran (LC) or Decca
RNG BRG TO : 001 (DE) talker.
MARINE
31.23 NM 223.4˚
uild
POINT1
SOG COG NEXT : 002 Because the GP talker is a relatively new

12.3 kn 123.4˚ MARINE
POINT2
system some early model equipment may
not recognize this talker.
Zoom icon
User-defined
display window DATA 1 output setting
ipb
ZOOM ZOOM 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 3. The DATA 1,

OUT IN 3 OUTPUT SETUP menu appears.
D3D 100m
DATA 1, 3 OUTPUT SETUP
SEP 12, 2009 23:59'59" U * SAFE
Data FMT V1.5 V2.0 IEC
N12˚ Position
Talker ID GP LC DE
Sh
23.456' W84
Output Data (00-90 sec)98%
1. AAM:00 APA:00 APB:04 BOD:00
2. BWR:00 BWW:00 GGA:00 GLL:01
E123˚ 3. RMB:01 RMC:00 VTG:01 WCV:00
23.456' 4. VDR:00 WPL:00 XTE:00 ZDA:01

5. GNS:00 GBS:01 Rnn:00 RTE:00
DA
DATA3. Log Pulse 200ppm 400ppm
Figure 8-7 How to enlarge indications on the ENT : Enter MENU : Escape
data display Settings shown here are default settings.

This line appears only when LOG is
selected by internal jumper wires.
N
Figure 8-8 DATA 1, 3 OUTPUT

SETUP menu
KA
2) Press or to select Data Fmt.
8-6
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
3) Press or to select NMEA 0183 DATA 2 output setting
(V1.5 or V2.0) or IEC 61162-1.
1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 4. The DATA 2
4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. Talker ID
., L
OUTPUT SETUP menu appears.
appears in reverse video.
5) Press or to select GP, LC or DE. DATA 2 OUTPUT SETUP
6) Press the NU/CU ENT key. Data FMT V1.5 V2.0 IEC
7) Enter Tx interval for each output data Talker ID GP LC DE
sentence in line 1. Tx interval is available Output Data (00-90 sec)98%
Co
in 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 10, 15, 20, 1. AAM:00 APA:00 APB:04 BOD:00
30, 60 and 90 (seconds). 2. BWR:00 BWW:00 GGA:00 GLL:01
8) Press the NU/CU ENT key. 3. RMB:01 RMC:00 VTG:01 WCV:00
9) Enter Tx interval for each output data 4. VDR:00 WPL:00 XTE:00 ZDA:01
sentence in lines 2 through 5. Press the 5. GNS:00 GBS:01 Rnn:00 RTE:00
NU/CU ENT key after setting each line.
ing
: Select
For detailed information about Tx interval ENT : Enter MENU : Escape
see the installation manual. However, the
Settings shown here are default settings.
settings entered by the installer of the
equipment should not be changed unless Figure 8-9 DATA 2 OUTPUT
absolutely necessary. SETUP menu
uild
2) Follow the procedure for setting DATA 1
BWC is for great circle navigation; BWR is
output.
for rhumb line navigation.
DATA 3 output setting

The total data output are shown by
percentage on the third line. For best results The DATA 3 connector can output IEC
ipb
the total output should not exceed 90%; 61162-1/NMEA 0183 data or log pulse. (For
lengthen the Tx interval of less important details, see the Installation Manual.) For
data to make the total output less than 90%. NMEA 0183, IEC 61162-1 the same data
output by DATA 1 is output from DATA 3.
When the external equipment cannot display
For log pulse, select 200 or 400 pulse per
Sh
correct data input from the GP-150, the rate

of operation should be lowered. second depending on the device connected.
For example, set a rate of operation less 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 3.
then 60% for the Temperature Indicator 2) Press or to select DATA 3. Log
TI-20. Pulse.
3) Press or to select log pulse of
DA
external equipment; 200ppm or 400ppm.

N
KA
8-7
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
Setting DATA 4 to NMEA 8.5 Receiving Data from
The DATA 4 port connects to a personal Personal Computer
., L
computer, DGPS receiver or YEOMAN
Loading Waypoints/Routes data
equipment.
Waypoints and Routes data can be
1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 5. The DATA 4 downloaded from a personal computer,
I/O SETUP (1/2) menu appears. through the DATA 4 connector.
DATA 4 I/O SETUP 1/2
Co
2) Press or to select Level.
DATA 4. Level RS232C RS422
3) Press or to select level of personal
Data Out COM DGPS
computer; RS232C or RS422.
To Next Page
5) Press to select COM.
6) Press to select To Next Page. The
DATA 4 I/O SETUP menu appears.
ing
: Select DATA 4 I/O SETUP <COM> 2/2
ENT : Enter MENU : Escape To Previous Page
Baud Rate 9600 bps
Appears only when external Load Data WPT/ROUTE WPT
DGPS receiver is used.
uild
Command Stop Start
Figure 8-10 DATA 4 I/O SETUP menu (1/2) Save Data WPT/ROUTE
Command Stop Start

: Select
3) Press or to select level of external ENT : Enter MENU : Escape
equipment; RS232C or RS422.
ipb
4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. Figure 8-12 DATA 4 I/O SETUP menu (2/2)
5) Press or to select Out.
6) Press to select To Next Page. The
7) Press or to select Baud Rate.
DATA 4 I/O SETUP (2/2) menu appears.
8) Press or to select baud rate;
DATA 4 I/O SETUP <Out> 2/2 4800bps, 9600bps, or 19200bps.
Sh
To Previous Page 9) Press the NU/CU ENT key.

Data FMT V1.5 V2.0 IEC 10) Press to select WPT/ROUTE.
Talker ID GP LC DE 11) Press to select Command. Stop, on
Output Data (00-90 sec) 98% the same line as Command, appears in
1. AAM:00 APA:00 APB:04 BOD:00 reverse video.
2. BWR:00 BWW:00 GGA:00 GLL:01 12) Press to select Start. The message
DA
3. RMB:01 RMC:00 VTG:01 WCV:00 shown in Figure 8-13 appears.

4. VDR:00 WPL:00 XTE:00 ZDA:01
Loading erases current data
5. GNS:00 GBS:01 Rnn:00 RTE:00
and stops Route navigation
ENT : Enter MENU : Escape Are you sure to load ?
ENT: Yes MENU:No
Figure 8-11 DATA 4 I/O SETUP menu (2/2)
N
Figure 8-13
7) Follow "DATA 1 output setting" from step
2.
KA
8-8
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
13) Press the NU/CU ENT key. The message 2) To quit loading, press the NU/CU ENT
shown in Figure 8-14 appears while data key. The cursor shifts to Stop.
is being loaded. 3) To start loading, select Start.
., L
Now loading
Waypoint/Route data !
Loading waypoint data from YEOMAN
MENU:Stop
equipment
1) Do steps 1 through 9 in "Loading
Co
Figure 8-14 lighthouse data."
2) Press or to select WPT.
14) Operate the computer to output data. 3) Press t to select Command.
When data is loaded, the cursor shifts to 4) Press to select Start. The message
Stop. shown in Figure 8-18 appears.
15) Press the MENU ESC key. When data is
Are you sure to load ?
loaded successfully, The message in
ing
Figure 8-15 appears.
Loading ended successfully ENT: Yes MENU:No
Figure 8-18
uild
Press any key
Figure 8-15 shown in Figure 8-19 appears.
Now loading
If data could not be loaded, the message
Waypoint data !
ipb
Failed in loading MENU:Stop

Invalid data
Press any key Figure 8-19
6) Operate the YEOMAN to output data.
When data is loaded, the cursor
Figure 8-16 automatically shifts to "Stop". Waypoints
Sh
are loaded into empty areas. When the

Stopping loading of data waypoint area becomes full, the message
1) Press the MENU ESC key. The message shown in Figure 8-20 appears.
Waypoint area is full !
Are you sure to stop ? Can’t load any data
DA
Press any key to stop
ENT: Yes MENU:No

Figure 8-20
Figure 8-17
7) When the data is loaded, press CU/NU
N
ENT and MENU ESC. The message

The number of valid and invalid
KA
waypoints appears in the message.
8-9
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
Loading completed 12) Save data at the computer.
Valid waypoint : 0 13) Press the MENU ESC key. When data is
saved, the cursor shifts to Stop.
., L
Invalid waypoint : 0
Press any key 14) Press the MENU ESC key.
Figure 8-21
8.6 WAAS/DGPS Setting
8) Press the MENU ESC key twice.
This menu sets the using WAAS or when the
Co
DGPS beacon receiver GR-80 is connected.
Saving data to personal computer
The default setting is “GPS”.
Waypoint and route data can be saved to a
personal computer. WAAS
WAAS/DGPS SETUP menu.
ing
3) Press or to select level; RS232C
WAAS/DGPS SETUP
or RS422.
4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. "Data" Mode Of GPS
appears in reverse video. WAAS Search AUTO MAN (GEO=134)

5) Press to select Com. Corrections Data Set* : 00
uild
6) Press to select Next Page. DGPS Station AUTO MAN List
7) Press or to select Baud Rate. FREQ 323.0kHz
8) Press or to select baud rate; Baud Rate 200 bps
4800bps, 9600bps, or 19200bps. : Select
9) Press to select Command (under the ENT : Enter MENU : Escape
Save Data line). Stop, on the same line
as Command, appears in reverse video. *: Determines how to use the WAAS signal.
ipb
Use the default setting "00".

10) Press to select Start. The message
shown in Figure 8-22 appears. Figure 8-24 WAAS/DGPS SETUP menu
Are you sure to save ?

2) Press or to select WAAS or AUTO.
3) Press to select WAAS Search.
Sh

ENT: Yes MENU:No
Figure 8-22

shown in Figure 8-23 appears while data
DA
is being saved.
Now saving
Waypoint/Route data !
MENU:Stop
N
Figure 8-23
KA
8-10
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
DGPS List
1) Press or to select List to show the
STATION NEAREST list.
., L
WAAS/DGPS SETUP menu.
Station Nearest
WAAS/DGPS SETUP User Setup No Yes
Mode Of GPS FREQ RNG BRG
WAAS Search AUTO MAN (GEO=134) 1 320.5kHz 0.6NM 202 *
2 320.5kHz 22.3NM 244
Corrections Data Set : 00 3 316.0kHz 70.3NM 348
4 320.0kHz 87.2NM 77
Co
DGPS Station AUTO MAN List* 5 288.0kHz 93.7NM 110
FREQ 323.0kHz
Baud Rate 200 bps : Select
: Select
*: User-programmed station
Figure 8-26
: These items appear when "MAN" is selected.
*: Only when the internal beacon receiver is equipped.
ing
2) Press or to select the station
desired.
Figure 8-25
3) Press the ENTER key.
2) Press or to select Mode, and then
press or to choose INT BEACON.
Programming DGPS user stations
3) Press to select DGPS Station.
uild
4) Press or to select AUTO, MAN or You may program 20 DGPS beacon stations
LIST. from which to use in DGPS beacon station
For automatic search, the GP-150 selection. This function is available only
automatically search DGPS reference when equipped with the internal beacon
station. receiver.
For manual search, enter frequency of
Entering new DGPS stations
ipb
DGPS reference station and select the

transmission rate of that. The List shows 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 7 to display the
five closest DGPS beacon stations, WAAS/DGPS SETUP menu.
including user-programmed stations. 2) Press to select DGPS Station.
3) Press to select List to show the
Manual Station Nearest list.
Sh
1) Press or to select MAN. 4) Press or to select User Setup,

2) Enter frequency in four digits (283.5kHz and then press to go to the DGPS
to 325.0kHz, in 0.5 kHz step). Station (User) list. While searching
3) Press the NU/CU ENT key. "Baud Rate" stations, the message “Please wait”
appears in reverse video. appears. Each page shows six stations.
4) Press or to select baud rate; 25,
DA
DGPS Station (User)

50, 100 or 200bps. No. FREQ Rate Position
(kHz) (bps)
01 284.0 200 20 0’N 0 0’W
02 285.0 200 20 0’N 20 0’E
03 286.0 200 0 0’S 20 0’E
04 287.0 200 20 0’S 20 0’E
05 288.0 200 20 0’S 0 0’W
N
06 289.0 200 20 0’S 0 0’W

: Station No. : Edit
CLEAR : Erase MENU : Escape
KA
Figure 8-27
8-11
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
5) Press or to select No. desired, Edit=DGPS Station: 17
which has not been used. FREQ 3 20. 5 kHz
6) Press or to show the Edit window. Rate 200 bps
., L
Position 34 44’N 135 21’W
Edit=DGPS Station: 18
FREQ _ _ _. _ kHz
Rate 200 bps
Position _ _ _ _’N _ _ _ _ _’W
: Column : Cursor
Co
Figure 8-29
: Column : Cursor 6) Edit data, and then press the NU/CU
ENT : Enter MENU : Escape ENT key.
7) After displaying the message “Are you
Figure 8-28 sure to change?”, press the NU/CU ENT
ing
7) Press or to select FREQ and then key. The DGPS Station (User) list
enter frequency of the station, and then appears after the message “Please wait”.
press . (Setting range: 283.5 to 320.5, 8) Press the MENU/ESC key.
in 0.5 step)
Erasing individual DGPS station
uild
8) Press or to select the baud rate,
100 or 200 bps, and then press . 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 7 to display the
9) Enter latitude and longitude of the station. WAAS/DGPS SETUP menu.
To change N to S or E to W, press . 2) Press to select DGPS Station.
Message “ARE YOU SURE?” appears. 3) Press to select LIST to show the
10) Press the NU/CU ENT key. Station Nearest list.
The message “Please wait” appears, and 4) Press or to select User Setup,
ipb
then the DGPS Station (User) list and then press to go to the DGPS
appears. Station (User) list.
Wrong frequency or position was entered 5) Press or to select the station from
at step 7 to 9, the beep sounds and the the list, and then press the CLEAR key.
message “Incomplete Data” appears for The message “Are you sure to erase?”
Sh
three seconds. appears.

11) Press the MENU ESC key. 6) Press the NU/CU ENT key. If cacelling,
press the MENU ESC key.
Editing DGPS stations 7) Press the MENU ESC key.
WAAS/DGPS SETUP menu. Setup for external DGPS beacon
receiver
DA
2) Press to select DGPS Station.

3) Press to select List to show the When an external DGPS beacon receiver is
Station Nearest list. connected to the DATA 4 connector, set up
4) Press or to select User Setup, the GP-150 according to specification of
and then press to go to the DGPS DPGS beacon receiver connected as
Station (User) list. follows.
N
5) Press or to select the station from 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 5.

the list, and then press or to show 2) Press or to select Level.
the Edit window. 3) Press or to select level; RS232C
KA
or RS422.
8-12
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
4) Press the NU/CU ENT key. 3) Press the MENU ESC to escape.
5) Press or to select DGPS. Number, bearing and elevation angle of all satellites
in view of the GPS receiver appear. Satellites being
6) Press ▼ to select To Next Page.
., L
used in fixing position are circled with a solid line;
satellites not being used in fixing position are circled
DATA 4 I/O SETUP <DGPS> 2/2 with a dashed line.
Satellite GPS fix
To Previous Page distribution Fixing date and time state
First Bit MSB LSB
W3D 100m
Parity Bit EVEN ODD NONE JAN 21, 2009 23:59’59" U * SAFE
Stop Bit 1 2 N
Co
SV (PRN) SNR
24 30 40 50
Baud Rate 4800 9600 01
01 12 12
31
W 08 E 16
31 18
19
: Select 19 09
09 08
ENT : Enter MENU : Escape 18 16 24
134 *
S
:Beacon RCVR Monitor
Figure 8-30 DATA 4 I/O SETUP
ing
DOP:1.5
MENU:Escape
"DGPS" 2/2 menu Satellite number with circle
is used for positioning.
7) Press or to select First Bit. DOP value
Receive signal level
8) Press or to select first bit; MSB or (When signal level is more than 35, it is
LSB. used for positioning.)
*: This indication appears in the WAAS mode.
uild
9) Press to select Parity Bit.
Satellites Monitor
10) Press or to select parity bit; EVEN,
ODD or NONE. D3D 100m
JAN 21, 2009 23:59’59" U * SAFE
11) Press to select Stop Bit.
12) Press or to select stop bit; 1 or 2. DGPS Integrity Status
ID: _ _ _ _ Health: _
13) Press to select Baud Rate. Bit Rate: _ _ _ bps FREQ:_ _ _ . _kHz
14) Press or to select baud rate; 4800 SIG Strength: _ _ dB SNR: _ _ dB
ipb
or 9600.
15) Press the MENU ESC key. DGPS Data: Good
Beacon Station: Good
8.7 Displaying GPS Monitor :Station Message

MENU:Escape
Displays
Sh
DGPS data and DGPS DGPS station

station receiving condition data
Three GPS monitor displays provide GPS
Beacon Receiver Monitor
information:
• Satellite monitor which shows position of D3D 100m
JAN 21, 2009 23:59’59" U * SAFE
GPS satellites
Message:
• Beacon receiver monitor which displays
DA
DGPS beacon station information

• DGPS beacon station message monitor
:Satellites Monitor
which displays messages received from MENU:Escape
beacon stations Station Message
N
To display the GPS monitor displays; Return to Satellites

1) Press MENU ESC and 7. Monitor
2) Press to display the GPS monitor
KA
Figure 8-31
you want to view.
8-13
8. MENU SETTINGS
td.
This page is intentionally left blank.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
8-14
td.
9. MAINTE- Clearing the GPS memory
The GPS memory stores GPS information,
NANCE &
., L
including the Almanac. When you clear the
GPS memory, all GPS information is erased.
TROUBLE- 1) Press MENU ESC, 9 and 9 to display the
CLEAR MEMORY menu.
SHOOTING 2) Press
3) Press
or to select Clear GPS.
to select Yes. The following
Co
message appears.
9.1 Clearing the Memory Setting for cold start
Are you sure to clear ?
The GP-150 has two memories: GPS
ENT:Yes MENU:No
memory and plotter memory.
Clearing the plotter memory
ing
Figure 9-3
The plotter memory holds plotted track and 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
mark data. When you clear the plotter
memory, all track and marks are cleared and Clearing GPS and plotter memories
all corresponding defaults settings are
To clear both GPS and plotter memories;
uild
restored.
CLEAR MEMORY menu.
CLEAR MEMORY menu.
2) Press or to select Clear All.
CLEAR MEMORY 3) Press to select Yes. The message
Clear Plotter No Yes
ClearGPS
Clear GPS No Yes
ipb
Setting for default

Clear All No Yes Are you sure to clear ?
ENT:Yes MENU:No
: Select
MENU : Escape
Figure 9-4
Sh
Figure 9-1 CLEAR MEMORY menu 4) Press the NU/CU ENT key.
Note: The equipment may lock after

2) Press or to select Clear Plotter.
clearing the GPS and plotter
3) Press to select Yes. The following
memories. Reapply power to the
message appears.
DA
equipment to restore normal

Clear tracks and marks operation.
Are you sure to clear ?
ENT:Yes MENU:No
Figure 9-2
N

KA
9-1
9. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
td.
9.2 Preventive Maintenance
WARNING
Regular maintenance is necessary to
., L
maintain performance. Check the items Use only a 2A fuse in the power cable.
mentioned below monthly to keep the Use of different fuses may cause fire.
equipment in good working order.
NOTICE
Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant or 9.3 Error Messages
Co
contact spray to coating or plastic parts of
the equipment. Error messages appear on the display to
alert you to possible trouble.
Those items contain organic solvents that can
damage coating and plastic parts, especially
plastic connectors. WARNING
For the LCD screen, wipe the LCD carefully Do not open the display unit cover.
ing
to prevent scratching, using tissue paper High voltage exists inside.
and an LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt
deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping slowly If the unit is not working properly,
with tissue paper so as to dissolve the dirt contact your dealer.
or salt. Change paper frequently so the salt
or dirt will not scratch the LCD. Do not use
solvents such as thinner, acetone or
GPS error
uild
benzene for cleaning. Also, do not use
degreaser or antifog solution, as they can
strip the coating from the LCD. When GPS signal is suddenly lost and
position cannot be calculated within one
minute the message shown in Figure 9-5
Antenna unit appears.
Check for fixing bolts for tightness. GPS No fix
ipb
Antenna cable
Final GPS Time/Position
Check connector for Aug 25, 2006 02:09’43" U
34 45.459 ’N 134 45.459’E
tightness, rust, damage Press CLEAR to Close window.
and water leaks.
Sh
Figure 9-5 GPS error message
Power cable
This message may appear when there is an
Check for tight connection. interfering object between the satellite and
Ground terminal GPS receiver (for example, mast) or the
Check for rust and tight connection. antenna cable is disconnected.
DA
Fuse Press the CLEAR key to silence the buzzer.

The 2A fuse (Type: FGBO-A 2A AC125V, If the CLEAR key is not pressed, several
Code No.: 000-549-062) in the power cable beeps sound every three minutes.
protects the unit from overvoltage and
equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out
N
the cause before replacing the fuse. If the

fuse blows after replacement, request
KA
service.
9-2
td.
DOP error
When PDOP value exceeds 6 in the 3D
., L
mode, or HDOP value exceeds 4 in the 2D
mode, this error occurs and following
indication appears.
DOP Error
Co
Final GPS Time/Position
Aug 25, 2006 02:09’43" U
34 45.459 ’N 134 45.459’E
Press CLEAR to Close window.
Figure 9-6 DOP error message

Press the CLEAR key to silence the buzzer.
If the CLEAR key is not pressed, several
ing
beeps sound every three minutes.
DGPS error
When DGPS data contains errors or the
DGPS beacon station is experiencing
uild
transmitting problems, the message shown
in Figure 9-7 appears.
DGPS Error
ipb
Figure 9-7 DGPS error message
Self test error message

If the self test (conducted when turning on
Sh
the power) finds equipment error, the

message shown in Figure 9-8 appears.
GPS Self Test Error

DA
Figure 9-8 Self test error message
If the self test error message appears,

consult your dealer for advice.
N
KA
9-3
td.
9.4 Troubleshooting
The table which follows provides troubleshooting procedures which you can follow to restore
., L
normal operation. If normal operation cannot be restored, ask your dealer for advice.
Table 9-1 Troubleshooting table

If… Them…
You cannot turn on the power • Check power connector for tight connection.
Co
• Check if ship’s main is off.
• Check for blown fuse.
Position cannot be fixed • Check antenna cable for tight connection and water leakage.
• Check if functional satellite has been disabled:
MENU ESC, 9, 6
ing
Position is wrong • Check if correct geodetic chart is entered: MENU ESC, 9, 6
• Apply position correction to GPS position: MENU ESC, 9, 6
Data cannot be transmitted to • Check if data format is correct: MENU ESC, 9-3, 9-4, 9-5
external equipment See the installation manual for further details.
uild
• Tx interval may be set to “0”. Select proper interval.
MENU ESC, 9-3, 9-4, 9-5
See the installation manual for further details.
• Check appropriate settings on external equipment.
• Check connections:
ipb
GP-150 external equipment

TD-A RD-A
TD-B RD-B
Sh
N DA
KA
9-4
td.
9.5 Diagnostic Tests OK appears to the right of GPS and
BEACON when they are normal; NG and
Memory and I/O circuits test 16 hexadecimal figure appear when an
., L
1) Press MENU ESC and 8 to display the abnormality is found.
SELF TESTS menu. Whenever NG or 16 hexadecimal figure
SELF TESTS appears contact your dealer for advice.
1. Memory, I/O Port Test
DATA 1 Port, DATA 2 Port and DATA 4
2. Keyboard Test
Co
Port show results of communication
3. Test Pattern
interface test. A special test connector is
4. Automatic Testing
DGPS Program No. 08501820XX required to test those ports. NG appears
GPS Program No. 48502640XX
NAV Program No. 2051518-XX.XX
as the results of the self test when there
BOOT Program No. 2051521-XX.XX is no test connector attached.
:Cursor 4) Press the MENU ESC key to escape.
ing
Note: The life of the internal battery is
Figure 9-9 Diagnostic TESTS menu approximately 5 years.
Note: Program version No. shown as "xx" is Name Type Code No.
a field which denotes minor changes Lithium CR2450-F2SST2L 000-144-941
and is subject to change under
uild
responsibility of the manufacturer. Keyboard test
2) Press 1.
KEYBOARD TEST screen.
Memory, I/O Port Test
Keyboard Test
Program Memory OK
ipb
SRAM OK
Internal Battery OK
DATA 1 Port NG
DATA 2 Port NG
DATA 4 Port NG
GPS OK
BEACON OK
Sh
MENU:Escape
Press CLR key 3 times to escape
Figure 9-10 MEMORY, I/O PORT

Figure 9-11 KEYBOARD TEST screen
TEST display
DA
2) Press each key one by one. A key's

3) When testing is finished, press the corresponding location on the screen
MENU ESC key to escape and return to lights in reverse video if the key is
the SELF TESTS menu. (Testing normal.
continues if the key is not pressed.) 3) To quit the keyboard test, press the
N
OK appears to the right of Program, CLEAR key three times. Control is

SRAM and Internal Battery when those returned to the SELF TESTS menu.
devices are normal; NG (No Good) 4) Press the MENU ESC key.
KA
appears when an abnormality is found.
9-5
td.
Display test Automatic testing
1) Press MENU ESC, 8 and 3 to display the This feature conducts all self tests
., L
test pattern screens. continuously.
2) To change the test pattern, press the 1) Press MENU ESC, 8 and 4. Self tests are
NU/CU ENT key. Each time the key is conducted continuously in the order of
pressed one of the patterns shown in memory, I/O test, keyboard test and test
Figure 9-12 appears. pattern.
2) To stop testing, press the MENU ESC
Co
Test Pattern
key.
ing
ENT:Pattern MENU:Escape
uild
ipb
Sh
Figure 9-12 Test patterns 1 and 2

DA

N
KA
9-6
td.
MENU TREE
., L
Main menu
MENU 1. DISPLAY SETUP Grid (Dark, Light, Off)

ESC Course Bar (Dark, Light, Off)
Time Mark (Dark, Light, Off)
Co
Waypoint Size (Large, Small)
Cursor Size (Large, Small)
Set/Drift AVR (Off, 10min, 20min, 30min,
1hr, 2hrs, 3hrs, 5hrs, 6 hrs)
2. TRACK/MARK SETUP Track REC (Time, DIST)
Mark Shape (
)
Mark Line ( , , , )
ing
Event Mark (
)
3. ERASE TRACK/MARK Erase Track (No, Yes)
Erase Mark (No, Yes)
4. ALARM SETTINGS Arrival/Anchor (ARRV, ANCH., Off)

Alarm Range (0.500 NM)
uild
XTE (On, Off)
Alarm Range (0.250 NM)
Ship Speed (In, Over, Off)
Speed Range (011.0 - 015.0 kn)
Trip (CLR:Reset) (On, Off)
Trip Range (0100.00 NM)
Water TEMP (In, Over, Off)
TEMP Range (+11.0 - +15.0 ˚C)
ipb
Depth (In, Over, Off)

Depth Range (0011.0 - 0015.0 ft)
WAAS/DGPS (On, Off)
5. MANUAL CALCULATION From
To
Trial Speed (AUTO, MAN)
Sh
(010.0 kn)
6.
7. GPS MONITOR Satellites Monitor

Beacon RCVR Monitor
Station Message
8. SELF TESTS 1. Memory, I/O Port Test

2. Keyboard Test
DA
3. Test Pattern
4. Automatic Testing
N
1
KA
AP-1
APPENDIX
td.
1
9. SYSTEM SETTINGS
., L
1. PLOTTER SETUP Memory Apportion (TRK: 1000/2000 Pt)
Bearing REF (True, MAG)
MAG Variation (AUTO, MAN)
(07˚W) (00˚E)
Calculation (RL, GC)
SOG, COG, RNG, BRG,
User defined
Co
WAT TEMP, WAT DPTH, XTE,
#1 RNG
dCOG, AVR SOG, AVR COG, TTG,
#2 SOG
ETA, TRIP, TRIP TIME, ROUTE
#3 BRG
DIST, ROUTE TTG, ROUTE. ETA,
#4 COG
ALT, VTD, DRIFT, SET, STW, HDG
2. UNIT SETUP Unit of Distance (NM, km, sm)
Unit of Depth (m, ft, fm)
ing
Unit of TEMP (˚C, ˚F)
Unit of Altitude (m, ft)
3. DATA1, 3 OUTPUT SETUP Data FMT (V1.5, V2.0, IEC)

Talker ID (GP, LC, DE)
Output Data
uild
AAM: 00, APA: 00, APB: 04, BOD: 00,
BWR: 00, BWW: 00, GGA: 00, GLL: 01,
RMB: 01, RMC: 00, VTG: 01, WCV:00,
VDR: 00, WPL: 00, XTE: 00, ZDA: 01,
GNS: 00, GBS: 01, Rnn: 00, RTE: 00
4. DATA2 OUTPUT SETUP Data FMT (V1.5, V2.0, IEC)

ipb

Output Data
AAM: 00, APA: 00, APB: 04, BOD: 00,
BWR: 00, BWW: 00, GGA: 00, GLL: 01,
RMB: 01, RMC: 00, VTG: 01, WCV:00,
Sh
VDR: 00, WPL: 00, XTE: 00, ZDA: 01,

GNS: 00, GBS: 01, Rnn: 00, RTE: 00
5. DATA4 I/O SETUP Data4. Level (RS232C, RS422)

Data (Out, COM, DGPS)
Data FMT (V1.5, V2.0, IEC)
DA
Output Data
AAM: 00, APA: 00, APB: 04, BOD: 00,
BWR: 00, BWW: 00, GGA: 00, GLL: 01,
RMB: 01, RMC: 00, VTG: 01, WCV:00,
VDR: 00, WPL: 00, XTE: 00, ZDA: 01,
N
GNS: 00, GBS: 01, Rnn: 00, RTE: 00
2
KA
AP-2
APPENDIX
td.
2
., L
6. GPS SETUP Fix Mode (2D, 2/3D)
ANT Height (016 ft, 000 - 999 ft)
Disable Satellite (1 - 32)
GPS Smoothing POSN (0000, 0000 - 9999 sec)
SPD (0005, 0000 - 9999 sec)
Speed Average (0060, 0000 - 9999 sec)
Co
RAIM Function (Off, On)
RAIM Accuracy (1 - 999)
Geodetic Datum (WGS84, NAD27, Other)
(001)
POSN Offset (0.000'N, 0.000'W)
Time DIFF (+00:00)
POSN (38˚00.000'N, 123˚00.000'W)
ing
7. WAAS/DGPS SETUP Mode (GPS, WAAS, INT BEACON*, EXT BEACON*, AUTO)
WAAS Search (AUTO, MAN (GEO=134))
Corrections Data Set (00)
DGPS Station (AUTO, MAN, List**)
FREQ (323.0 kHz)
uild
Baud Rate (25, 50, 100, 200 bps)
8. LOP SETUP POS Display (LAT/LON, LOP)

LOP Display (LC, DE)
LC Chain (7980: 23 - 43)
LOP (+00.0 ms +00.0 ms)
ipb
DE Chain (24: G - P)
LOP (+0.00 Lane, +0.00 Lane)
9. CLEAR MEMORY Clear Plotter (No, Yes)

Clear GPS (No, Yes)
Sh
Clear All (No, Yes)
*: One is displayed according to kind of

beacon receiver used.
**: Only when the internal beacon receiver
is equipped.
DA
N
KA
AP-3
APPENDIX
td.
DIGITAL INTERFACE
(IEC 61162-1 EDITION 2 (2000-07))
., L
Output sentences of channel 1, 2, 3, 4 (DATA 1, DATA 2, DATA 3, DATA
4)
AAM, APB, BOD, BWC, BWR, BWW, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS, RMB, RMC, VTG,
Co
WCV, VDR, WPL, XTE, ZDA, RTE, DTM
Input sentences of channel 1 (DATA 1, DATA2, DATA4)

DBT, DPT, HDG, HDT MTW, TLL, VBW VHW
Transmission interval
ing
All sentences output at the interval selected (00-90 s).
Load requirements as listener
Isolation: Optocoupler
Input impedance: 470 ohms
uild
Max. voltage: ±15V
Threshold: 3 mA (in case of connection of FURUNO device talker)
Data transmission
Data is transmitted in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard
referenced in 2.1 of IEC 61162-1. The first bit is a start bit and is followed by data
ipb
bits.
The following parameters are used:
Baud rate: 4800

Sh
Data bits: 8 (D7 = 0), parity none

Stop bits: 1
Schematic diagrams
DATA 1 port (output)
Output drive capability: Max. 15 mA
N DA
KA
AP-4
APPENDIX
td.
20P8192
U25
., L
DATA 1 MJ-A6SRMD SN75ALS172
J5 FL5
TD-A 4
1 2
3
TD-B 2
FL4
Co
6
ing
DATA 1 port (input)
20P8192
DATA 1 MJ-A6SRMD
J5
1 +3.3V
uild
2 JP1 R130
FL6 2.2K
1 4
RD-H 3 PC-400
R182 R123
100 390 3 U26 5
RD-C 4
CR15
5 FL7 1SS272
ipb
• Load Requirements
Isolation: opto coupler
Input Impedance: 470 Ω
Sh
Max. Voltage: ±15V

Threshold: 3mA (In case of FURUNO device talker connection)
DA
N
KA
AP-5
APPENDIX
td.
Output drive capability: Max. 15mA
20P8192
., L
DATA2 MJ-A6SRMD
J7 FL8 6
TD-A 1 8
TD-B 2
FL9 7
3 U25
Co
SN75ALS172
4
5
6
ing
DATA 2 port (input)
20P8192
DATA2 MJ-A6SRMD
J7
uild
+3.3V
1
2 JP2 R131
FL10 1 4 2.2K
RD-H 3
R183 R124 PC-400
100 390 3 5
RD-C 4 U27
CR15
5 FL11
1SS272
ipb
Isolation: opto coupler
Sh
Input Impedance: 470 Ω

Max. Voltage: ±15V
Threshold: 3mA (In case of FURUNO device talker connection)
N DA
KA
AP-6
APPENDIX
td.
Output drive capability: Max. 15mA
., L
20P8192
DATA3
U25
MJ-A6SRMD
JP3 SN75ALS172
J6 FL15 2 14
TD-A 1
1 12
2 1
TD-B 2
Co
13
FL14 JP4
3
4
5
6
DATA 4 port
ing
IN/OUT signal is selected by the menu among the output of IEC 61162-1, NMEA
uild
Ver. 1.5/2.0, PC input/output and DGPS signal.
Sentence description
AAM-Waypoint arrival alarm

$--AAM,A,A,x.x,N,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
ipb
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | +------------ 4
| | +---+---------------- 3
| +---------------------- 2
+------------------------ 1
Sh
1. Status: A=arrival circle entered

2. Status: A=perpendicular passed at waypoint
3. Arrival sircle radius, nautical miles
4. Waypoint ID
5. Checksum
N DA
KA
AP-7
APPENDIX
td.
APB - Autopilot sentence data
$--APB,A,A,x.x,a,N,A,A,x.x,a,c--c,x.x,a,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 13
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 12
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--+----------- 11
| | | | | | | | | | +--+----------------- 10
| | | | | | | | | +------------------------ 9
| | | | | | | +--+---------------------------- 8
| | | | | | +---------------------------------- 7
Co
| | | | | +------------------------------------ 6
| | | | +-------------------------------------- 5
| | | +---------------------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------------------- 3
| +---------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------ 1
1. Status: A=Data varid V=LORAN-C blink or SNR warning
ing
V=general warning flag for other navigation systems
when a reliable fix is not available
2. Status: A=OK or not used
V=LORAN-C cycle lock warning flag
3. Magnitude of XTE(cross-track-eror)
4. Direction to steer,L/R
5. XTE units, nautical miles
uild
6. Status: A=arrival circle entered
V=arrival circle not passed
7. Status: A=perpendicular passed at waypoint
V=perpendicular not entered
8. Bearing origin to destination, M/T
9. Destination waypoint ID
10. Bearing, present potition to destination, magnetic or true
11. Heading to steer to destination waypoint, magnetic or true
ipb
12. Mode indicator(see Note)

13. Checksum
NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous mode
D = differential mode
Sh
S = Simulator mode
N = Data not valid
N DA
KA
AP-8
APPENDIX
td.
BOD - Bearing, origin to destination
$--BOD,x.x,T,x.x,M,c--c,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | +------------ 4
| | | | +----------------- 3
| | +--+--------------------- 2
+--+--------------------------- 1
1. Bearing, degrees true
Co
2. Bearing, degrees magnetic
4. Origin waypoint ID
5. Checksum
BWC - Bearing and distance to waypoint
ing
$--BWC, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, c--c, a*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Mode indicator
(see note 1)
Waypoint ID*
uild
Distance, nautical miles
Bearing, degrees magnetic*
Bearing, degrees true
Waypoint longitude, E/W*
Waypoint latitude, N/S*
UTC of observation*
*: Not used
ipb
NOTE 1: Positioning system Mode indicator:

A= Autonomous mode
D= Differential mode
S= Simulator mode
N= Data not valid
The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.
Sh
DA
N
KA
AP-9
APPENDIX
td.
BWR - Bearing, waypoint to range
$--BWR,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,c--c,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 9
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------ 8
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | | | | | +--+------------- 6
| | | | | | | +--+------------------- 5
| | | | | +--+------------------------- 4
| | | +-----+------------------------------- 3
Co
| +-----+------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of observation
2. Waypoint latitude, N/S
3. Waypoint longitude, E/W
ing
6. Distance, nautical miles
7. Waypoint ID
8. Mode indicator(see note)
9. Checksum

uild
A = Autonomous mode
D = differential mode
S = Simulator mode
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.
ipb
BWW - Bearing, waypoint to waypoint

$--BWW,x.x,T,x.x,M,c--c,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | +------------ 4
Sh
| | | | +----------------- 3
| | +--+--------------------- 2
+--+--------------------------- 1

3. TO waypoint ID
4. FROM waypoint ID
DA
5. Checksum
N
KA
AP-10
APPENDIX
td.
DBT - Depth below transducer
$--DBT, x. x, f, x. x, M, x. x, F*hh<CR><LF>
., L
4
3
2
1
1. Water depth, feet
Co
2. Water depth, m
3. Water depth, fathoms
4. Checksum
DPT - Depth
$--DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | |
ing
| | | +----- 4
| | +--------- 3
| +------------ 2
+---------------- 1
1. Water depth relative to trancsducer, in meters

uild
2. Offset from transeducer, in meters(see notes 1 and 2)
3. Maximum range scale in use
4. Checksum
NOTE1 "positive"=distance from transeduser to water-line.

"-"=distance from transducer to keel.
NOTE2 For IEC applications the offset should always be applied
so as to provide depth relative to the keel.
ipb
Sh
DA
N
KA
AP-11
APPENDIX
td.
DTM - Datum reference
$--DTM,ccc,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | +--- 7
| | | | | | | +------ 6
| | | | | | +---------- 5
| | | | +--+------------- 4
| | +---+------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
Co
+---------------------------- 1
1. Local datum W84 - WGS84

W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
ing
999 - User defined
IHO datum code
2. Local datum subdivision code
3. Lat offset, min, N/S
4. Lon offset, min, E/W
5. Altitude offset, m
uild
6. Reference dattum W84 - WGS84
W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
7. Checksum
ipb
GBS -GPS satellite fault detection

$--GBS,hhmmss.ss,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +------------------ 9
Sh
| | | | | | | +---------------------- 8
| | | | | | +------------------------- 7
| | | | | +----------------------------- 6
| | | | +--------------------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------------------ 4
| | +---------------------------------------- 3
| +-------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------- 1
DA
1. UTC time of the GGA fix addociated with this sentence

2. Expected error in latitude
3. Expected error in longitude
4. Expected error in altitude
5. Most likely failed satellite
6. Probability of missed detection for most likely failed satellite
7. Estimate of bias on most likely failed satellite
N
8. Standard deviation on bias estimate

9. Checksum
KA
AP-12
APPENDIX
td.
GGA -Global positioning system fix data
$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9
| | | | | | | | | | +---+------------ 8
| | | | | | | | +---+------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +------------------------- 6
| | | | | | +---------------------------- 5
Co
| | | | | +------------------------------- 4
| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. GPS quality indicator (0: No fix, 1: GPS, 2: Differential, 8: Demo mode)
ing
5. Number of satllite in use,00-12, may be different from the number in view
6. Horizontal dilution of precision
7. Antenna altitude above/below mean sealevel, m
8. Geoidal separation, m
9. Age of differential GPS data
10. Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023
11. Checksum
uild
GLL - Geographic position, latitude and longitude
$--GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | +--------- 5
ipb
| | | | | +----------- 4
| | | | +---------------- 3
| | +------+----------------------- 2
+---+----------------------------------- 1
1. Latitude, N/S
Sh
2. Longitude, E/W
3. UTC of position
4. Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
6. Checksum

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
DA
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field shall be
set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A=Autonomous and
D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not
be null fields.
N
KA
AP-13
APPENDIX
td.
GNS - GNSS fixed data
$--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | +------ 10
| | | | | | | | | | +---------- 9
| | | | | | | | | +-------------- 8
| | | | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +---------------------- 6
| | | | | | +------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------ 4
Co
| | | +-------+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. Mode indicator
5. Total number of satllite in use,00-99
ing
6. HDOP
7. Antenna altitude, metres, re:mean-sea-level(geoid)
8. Geoidal separation
9. Age of differential data
10. Differential reference station ID
11. Checksum
uild
HDG – Heading, deviation and variation
$--HDG,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--------- 4
| | | +--+----------- 3
| +----+----------------- 2
+------------------------ 1
ipb
1. Magnetic sensor heading, degrees

2. Magnetic deviation, degrees E/W
3. Magnetic variation, degrees E/W
4. Checksum
HDT - Heading, true

$--HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
Sh
| | |
| | +--------- 2
+----+----------- 1
1. Heading, degrees true

2. Checksum
MTW- Water temperature

DA
$--MTW,x.x,C*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--------- 2
+--+----------- 1
1. Temperature, degrees C
N
2. Checksum
KA
AP-14
APPENDIX
td.
RMB - Recommended minimum navigation information
$--RMB,A,x.x,a,c--c,c--c,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 13
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 12
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | +---------- 10
| | | | | | | | | | +-------------- 9
| | | | | | | | | +------------------ 8
Co
| | | | | | | +-----+--------------------- 7
| | | | | +----+--------------------------------- 6
| | | | +--------------------------------------------- 5
| | | +-------------------------------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------------------------------ 3
| +--------------------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------ 1
ing
1. Data status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning
2. Cross track error(see note 2) n.miles
3. Direction to steer L/R
4. Origin waypoint ID
6. Destination waypoint latitude,N/S
7. Destination waypoint longitude,E/W
uild
8. Range to destination, n.miles(see note 1)
9. Bearing to destination, degrees true
10. Destination closing velocity, knots
11. Arrival status: A=arrival circle entered or perpendicular passed
12. Mode indicator(see note 3)
13. Checksum
NOTES
ipb
1 If range to destination exceeds 999.9 nautical miles, display 999.9.

2 If cross track error exceeds 9.99 nautical miles, display 9.99.
3 Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
Sh
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field
shall be set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for
A=Autonomous and D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator
and Status field shall not be null fields.
DA
N
KA
AP-15
APPENDIX
td.
RMC- Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data
$--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 10
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | +----- 9
| | | | | | | | | +--+------- 8
| | | | | | | | +--------------- 7
| | | | | | | +--------------------- 6
| | | | | | +------------------------- 5
| | | | +---+---------------------------- 4
| | +---+---------------------------------------- 3
Co
| +--------------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position fix

2. Status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning
3. Latitude, N/S
4. Longitude, E/W
5. Speed over ground, knots
6. Course over ground, degrees true
ing
7. Date: dd/mm/yy
8. magnetic variation, degrees E/W
10. Checksum

A = Autonomous
uild
D = Differential
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
ipb
RTE - Routes
$--RTE,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,c--c,.....,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | +------------ 6
Sh
| | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | +---------------------------- 4
| | +-------------------------------- 3
| +----------------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------------- 1
1. Total number of messages being transmitted

DA
2. Message number
3. Message mode:
c=complete route, all waypoints
w=working route, first listed waypoint is "FROM",
second is "TO" and remaining reset of route
4. Route identifier
5. Waypoint identifier
6. Waypoint "n" identifier
N
7. Checksum
KA
AP-16
APPENDIX
td.
TLL - Target latitude and longitude
$--TLL,xx,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c,hhmmss.ss,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | +--------- 8
| | | | | | | | +----------- 7
| | | | | | | +------------- 6
| | | | | | +-------------------- 5
| | | | | +-------------------------- 4
| | | +-----+------------------------------ 3
| +----+------------------------------------------ 2
Co
+----------------------------------------------------- 1
1. Target number 00 - 99
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. Target name
5. UTC of data
6. Target status(see note)
ing
7. Reference target=R,null otherwise
8. Checksum
NOTE - Target status

L = lost,tracked target has beenlost
Q = query,target in the process of acquisition
uild
T = tracking
VBW – Dual ground/water speed

$--VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | | | +----- 10
| | | | | | | | +-------- 9
ipb
| | | | | | | +----------- 8
| | | | | | +-------------- 7
| | | | | +----------------- 6
| | | | +-------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------ 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------ 2
Sh
+---------------------------------- 1
1. Longitudial water speed, knots

2. Transverse water speed, knots
3. Status: water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
4. Longitudial ground speed, knots
5. Transverse ground speed, knots
6. Status: ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
DA
7. Stern transverse water speed, knots

8. Status: stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots
10. Status: stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
11. Checksum
N
KA
AP-17
APPENDIX
td.
VDR – Set and drift
$--VDR,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 4
., L
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+----------------------- 1
1. Direction, degrees true

2. Direction, degrees magnetic
3. Current speed, knots
4. Checksum
Co
VHW – Water speed and heading
$--VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | | +--+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
ing
| | +---+----------------------- 2
+---+----------------------------- 1

2. Heading, degrees magnetic
3. Speed, knots
uild
4. Speed, km/h
5. Checksum
VTG - Course over ground and ground speed

$--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
ipb
| | | | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | | +--+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
| | +--+----------------------- 2
+--+----------------------------- 1
Sh

2. Course over ground, degrees magnetic
4. Speed over ground, km/h
6. Checksum
DA

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The positioning system Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.
N
KA
AP-18
APPENDIX
td.
WCV - Waypoint closure velocity
$--WCV,x.x,N,c--c,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | || |
., L
| | | | | +------- 4
| | | | +--------- 3
| | +--+----------- 2
+--+---------------- 1
1. Velocity component, knots

Co
4. Checksum

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
ing
WPL - Waypoint location
$--WPL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
uild
| | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +------------ 3
| | +-----+---------------- 2
+-----+---------------------------- 1
1. Waypoint latitude, N/S

2. Waypoint longitude, E/W
ipb
4. Checksum
Sh
DA
N
KA
AP-19
APPENDIX
td.
XTE - Cross-track error, measured
$--XTE,A,A,x.x,a,N,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 7
., L
| | | | | +----------- 6
| | | | +------------- 5
| | | +--------------- 4 NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:
| | +------------------ 3 A = Autonomous mode
| +--------------------- 2 D = differential mode
+----------------------- 1 S = Simulator mode
N = Data not valid
Co
1. Status: A=data valid
V=LORAN-C blink or SNR warning
V=general warning flag or other navigation systems
when a reliable fix is not available
2. Status: A=data valid
V=LORAN-C cycle lock warning flag
3. Magnitude of cross-track error
4. Direction to steer, L/R
ing
5. Units, nautical miles
7. Checksum
uild
ZDA - Time and date
$--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | +----------- 6
| | | | +-------------- 5
| | | +------------------ 4
ipb
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1
1. UTC
2. Day, 01 to 31(UTC)
3. Month, 01 to 12(UTC)
Sh
4. Year(UTC)
5. Local zone hours, 00h to +-13h
6. Local zone minutes, 00 to +59
as local hours
7. Checksum
N DA
KA
AP-20
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
TIME DIFFERENCES
uild
ing
Co
., L
AP-21
td.
td.
GEODETIC CHART LIST
., L
001 : WGS84 088 : NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Western United States
002 : WGS72 089 : : Eastern United States
003 : TOKYO : Mean Vallue (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa) 090 : : Alaska
004 : NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Mean Vallue (CONUS) 091 : : Bahamas (Excluding San Saivador Island)
005 : EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Vallue 092 : : Bahamas • • San Saivador Island
006 : AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australla and Tasmania Island 093 : : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)
007 : ADINDAN : Mean Value(Ethiopia and Sudan) 094 : : Alberta and British Columbla
008 : : Ethiopia 095 : : East Canada
009 : : Mall
096 : : Manitoba and Ontario
010 : : Senegal
097 : : Nothwest Territories and Saskatchewan
Co
011 : : Sudan
098 : : Yukon
012 : AFG : Somalla
099 : : Canal Zone
013 : AIN EL ABD 1970 : Bahrain Island
100 : : Caribbean
014 : ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island
101 : : Central America
015 : ARC 1950 : Mean Value
102 : : Cuba
016 : : Bostswana
017 : : Lesotho 103 : : Greenland
018 : : Malawi 104 : : Mexico
019 : : Swazlland 105 : NORTH AMERICAN 1983 : Alaska
020 : : Zaire 106 : : Canada
021 : : Zambla 107 : : CONUS
022 : : Zimbabwe 108 : : Mexico, Central America
023 : ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kanya, Tanzania) 109 : OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
024 : : Kenya 110 : OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt
ing
025 : : Tanzania 111 : OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value
026 : ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island 112 : : Hawaii
027 : ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island 113 : : Kaual
028 : ASTRO B4 SOR. ATOLL : Tem Island 114 : : Maui
029 : ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island 115 : : Oahu
030 : ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island 116 : OMAN : Oman
031 : AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australla and Tasmania Island 117 : ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 : Mean Value
032 : BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands 118 : : England
033 : BERMUDA 1957 : Bermuda Islands 119 : : England, Isie of Man, and Wales
034 : BOGOTA OBSERVATORY : Colombla
120 : : Scotland and Shetland Islands
035 : CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina
121 : : Wales
uild
036 : CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands
122 : PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands
037 : CAPE : South Africa
123 : PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcaim Island
038 : CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama Islands)
124 : PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile (near 53° s)
039 : CARTHAGE : Tunisia
125 : PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value
040 : CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand)
041 : CHUA ASTRO : Paraguay 126 : : Bolivia
042 : CORREGO ALEGRE : Brazil 127 : : Chile • • Northem Chie (near 19° s)
043 : DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia) 128 : : Chile • • Southem Chile (near 43° s)
044 : DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgla Island) 129 : : Colombia
045 : EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island 130 : : Ecuador
046 : EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Westem Europe 131 : : Guyana
047 : : Cypus 132 : : Peru
048 : : Egypt 133 : : Venezuela
049 : : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland 134 : PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgln Islands
ipb
Islands 135 : QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar

050 : : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands 136 : QORNOQ : South Greenland
051 : : Greece 137 : ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands
052 : : Iran 138 : SANTNA BRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
053 : : Italy • • Sardinla 139 : SANTO (DOS) : Espirlto Santo Island
054 : : Italy • • Sicily 140 : SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Faikland Island
055 : : Norway and Finland 141 : SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value
056 : : Portugal and Spain 142 : : Argentina
057 : EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value
143 : : Bollvia
058 : GANDAJIKA BASE : Republlc of Maldives
144 : : Brazil
059 : GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand
145 : : Chile
Sh
060 : GUAM 1963 : Guam Island

146 : : Colombia
061 : GUX 1 ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island
147 : : Ecuador
062 : HJORSEY 1955 : Iceland
148 : : Guyana
063 : HONG KONG 1963 : Hong kong
149 : : Paraguay
064 : INDIAN : Thailand and Vletnam
065 : : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal 150 : : Peru
066 : IRELAND 1956 : Ireland 151 : : Trinldad and Tobago
067 : ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia 152 : : Venezuela
068 : JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Jhonston Island 153 : SOUTH ASIA : Singapore
069 : KANDAWALA : Sri Lanka 154 : SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands
070 : KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island 155 : SOUTHWEST BASE : Falal, Graclosa,Pico, Sao Jorge, and Terceira
071 : KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore Islands
072 : LA REUNION : Mascarene Island 156 : TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sadah)
DA
073 : L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island 157 : TOKYO : Japan

074 : LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia 158 : : Korea
075 : LUZON : Philippines (Exciuding Mindanao Island) 159 : : Okinawa
076 : : Mindanao Island 160 : TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha
077 : MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island 161 : VITI LEVU 1916 : Vitl Levu Island (Fiji Islands)
078 : MARCO ASTRO : Salvage Islands 162 : WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands
079 : MASSAWA : Eritrea (Ethlopia) 163 : ZANDERIJ : Suriname
080 : MERCHICH : Morocco 164 : BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belltung Islands (Indonesia)
081 : MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 : Midway Island 165 : CAMP AREA ASTRO : Camp Mcmurdo Area, Antarctica
082 : MINNA : Nigeria
166 : G. SEGARA : Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)
083 : NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)
167 : HERAT NORTH : Afghanistan
084 : : United Arab Emirates
168 : HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan
N
085 : : Saudi Arabia

169 : TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 : Madagascar
086 : NAMIBIA : Namibla
170 : YACARE : Uruguay
087 : MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinldad and Tobago
171 : RT-90 : Sweden
172 : PULKOVO 1942 : Russia
173 : FINNISH KKJ : Finland
KA
AP-22 AP-7
td.
LORAN C CHAINS
., L
Chain GRI S1 S2 S3 S4 S5
Central Pacific 4990 11 29 – – –
Canadian East Coast 5930 11 25 38 – –
Co
Commando Lion (Korea) 5970 11 31 42 – –
Canadian West Coast 5990 11 27 41 – –
South Saudi Arabia 7170 11 26 39 52 –
Labrador Sea 7930 11 26 – – –
Eastern Russia 7950 11 30 46 61 –
ing
Gulf of Alaska 7960 11 26 44 – –
Norwegian Sea 7970 11 26 46 60 –
Southeast USA 7980 11 23 43 59 –
Mediterranean Sea 7990 11 29 47 – –
Western Russia 8000 10 25 50 65 –
uild
North Central USA 8290 11 27 42 – –
North Saudi Arabia 8990 11 25 40 56 69
Great Lakes 8970 11 28 44 59 –
South Central USA 9610 11 25 40 52 65
West Coast USA 9940 11 27 40 – –
ipb
Northeast USA 9960 11 25 39 54 –

Northwest Pacific (old) 9970 11 30 55 81 –
Icelandic 9980 11 30 – – –
North Pacific 9990 11 29 43 – –
Sh
Suez 4991 10 24
England, France 8940 12 30
Northwest Pacific 8930 11 30 50 70
Newfoundland East Coast 7270 11 25
Lessay 6731 10 39
DA
BØ 7001 11 27
Sylt 7499 11 26
Ejde 9007 10 23 38
Saudia Arabia North 8830 11 25 39 56
Saudia Arabia South 7030 11 25 37 55
N
KA
AP-23
AP-24
td.
DECCA CHAINS
., L
Chain Chain Chain Location Chain Chain Chain Location
No. code no. code
01 South Baltic 0A Europe 34 Kanto 8C Japan
02 Vestlandet 0E " 35 Shikoku 4C "
Co
03 Southwest British 1B " 36 Hokuriku 2C "
04 Northumbrian 2A " 37 Kita Kyushu 7C "
05 Holland 2E " 38 Namaqualand 4A Southern Africa
06 North British 3B " 39 Cape 6A "
07 Lofoten 3E " 40 Eastern Province 8A "
08 3F " 41 South West Africa 9C "
ing
09 North Baltic 4B " 42 Natal 10C "
10 North West 4C " 43 Dampier 8E Australia
11 Trondelag 4E " 44 Port Headland 4A "
12 English 5B " 45 Anticosti 9C Northern America

uild
13 North Bothnian 5F " 46 East Newfoundland 2C "
14 Southern Spanish 6A " 47 Cabot Strait 6B "
15 North Scottish 6C " 48 Nova Scotia 7C "
16 Gulf of Finland 6E "
17 Danish 7B "
18 Irish 7D "
ipb
19 Finnmark 7E "
20 French 8B "
21 South Bothnian 8C "
22 Hebridean 8E "
Sh
23 Frisian Islands 9B "
24 Helgeland 9E "
25 Skagerrak 10B "
26 North Persian Gulf 5C Persian Gulf & India

DA
27 South Persian Gulf 1C "
28 Bombay 7B "
29 Calcutta 8B "
30 Bangladesh 6C "
N
31 Saliyah 2F "
32 Hokkaido 9C Japan
33 Tohoku 6C "
KA
AP-25
AP-24
td.
PARTS LIST
., L
This equipment contains complex modules in which fault diagnosis and repair down to
component level are not practical (IMO A.694(17)/8.3.1). Only some discrete components
are used. FURUNO Electric Co., Ltd. believes identifying these components is of no value
for shipboard maintenance; therefore, they are not listed in the manual. Major modules can
be located on the parts location photos on the next page.
Co
FURUNO Model GP-150
Unit
DISPLAY UNIT GP-150
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
Sep-05 Blk.No.
ing
SYMBOL TYPE
DISPLAY UNIT GP-150 Code No.

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
20P8148, PNL 004-401-410
uild
20P8192, NP 004-401-960
ASSEMBLY
20S0395, GN-8096 000-150-957-12
08S0334, GR-7000A (option) 000-143-249
LCD
20S0394, EW50379FDW 000-151-235
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
AP-25
td.
Parts Location
Display unit
., L
GR-7000A
(Option)
Co
(08S0334)
GN-8096
(20S0395)
ing
NP Board
(20P8192)
uild
LCD PNL Board
EW50379FDW (20P8148)
ipb
Sh
Display unit, cover opened, GR-7000A installed

N DA
KA
AP-26
td.
WHAT IS WAAS?
., L
WAAS, available in North America is a provider in the worldwide SBAS (Satellite
Based Augmentation System) navigation system. CBAS provides GPS signal
corrections to SBAS users, for even better position accuracy, typically better
than three meters. There are three more SBAS providers, MSAS
(Multi-Functional Satellite Augmentation System) for Japan, EGNOS (Euro
Co
Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service) for Europe and GAGAN (GPS And
GEO Augmented Navigation) for India. The illustration below shows the
coverage area. (Accuracy may be affected when using a GEO satellite not within
your current location.) This manual uses “WAAS” for these three providers
generically.
ing
EGNOS
WAAS
MSAS
uild
GAGAN
ipb
Provider Satellite type Longitude Satellite No.

WAAS Intelsat Galaxy XV 133°W 135
Sh
TeleSat Anik F1R 107.3°W 138

EGNOS Inmarsat-3-F2/AOR-E 15.5°W 120
Artemis 21.5°E 124
Inmarsat-3-F5/IOR-W 25°E 126
MSAS MTSAT-1R 140°E 129
MTSAT-2 145°E 137
DA
GAGAN Inmarsat-4-F1/IOR 64°E 127

N
KA
AP-27
td.
LIST OF TERMS/SYMBOLS
., L
The following table shows the terms used in the GP-150.
Term/Symbol Meaning
◎, Own Ship
Marks/Lines
Co
Event Marks
Waypoints
----- Routes
ing
, MOB Man Overboard
┼ Cursor
ENT Enter
% Percentage
2D, 3D Dimensions
ALARM Alarm
uild
ALT Altitude
ANCH Anchor Watch
ANT Antenna
AP Autopilot
APR April
ARRV Arrival
ipb
AUG August
AUTO Automatic
AVG Average
BRG Bearing
℃ Degree(s) Celsius
CLR Clear
Sh
CMNT Comment
COG Course Over the Ground
COM Communication
CURS Cursor
DE Decca
deg, ° degree(s)
DA
DFT Drift
DGPS Differential GPS
DISP Display
DIST Distance
DPTH Depth
DRIFT Drift
N
E/W East/West
ENT Enter
ERR Error
KA
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
AP-28
td.
Term/Symbol Meaning
EXT External
℉ Degree(s) Fahrenheit
FEB February
., L
FIX Fix
fm Fathom
FMT Format
FREQ Frequency
ft Feet
Co
FWD Forward
GPS Global Positioning System
GC Great Circle
EVENT Event
HDG Heading
hr(s) hours
IN In
ing
I/O Input/Output
ID Identification
JAN January
JUL July
JUN January
uild
kHz kilo Hertz
km kilo metre
kn knot
LAT Latitude
LC Loran-C
LON Longitude
LOP Line Of Position
ipb
LOG Log
LORAN Loran
m metre(s)
m/s Meter/second
MAG Magnetic
Sh
MAN Manual
MAR March
MAY May
MENU Menu
min, ' minute(s)
N/S North/South
NAV Navigation
DA
NG No Good
NM Nautical Mile
No. Number
NOV November
OCT October
N
OFF Off
OFFSET Offset
ON On
KA
PORT Port/Portside
POSN Position
AP-29
td.
Term/Symbol Meaning
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
RAM Random Access Memory
RCVR Receiver
., L
REC Record
REF Reference
RL Rhumb Line
RNG Range
ROUTE Route
Co
s, " second(s)
SEP September
SET Set
sm Statute Mile
SNR Signal to Noise Ratio
SOG Speed Over the Ground
SPD Speed
ing
STBD Starboard/Starboard Side
STN Station
STR Steer
STW Speed Through the Water
T True
uild
TEMP Temperature
TEST Test
TIME Time
TRIAL Trial
TRK Track
Pt, Pts. Point(s)
TTG Time To Go
ipb
UTC Universal Time, Coordinated

VAR Variation
WAT Water
WPT Waypoint
XTE Cross Track Error
Sh
N DA
KA
AP-30
FURUNO GP-150/Dual
td.
GP-150/Dual
., L
1 GPS RECEIVER
Co
1.5 Accuracy
1.6 Ship’s speed accuracy 0.2kn (10kn or less), 2 % of ship’s speed (more than 10kn)
ing
1.7 Course accuracy ±3° (within 1 to 17kn), ±1° (more than 17kn)
1.9 Tracking velocity 999 kn
1.10 Position update interval 1 s
uild
1.11 RAIM indicators Safe, Unsafe, Caution
ipb
2 DISPLAY SECTION
Sh
Scale 0.02 to 320 NM, 14 steps

Plot interval By time 0 to 60m00s or by distance 0 to 99.99NM, sm or km, or halt
2.5 Memory capacity
Track and Marks 2,000 points
DA

2.6 Alarms Arrival and anchor watch, XTE, Speed, Trip, Water temperature*,
Water depth*
N
KA
SP-1 E4440S01C-M
FURUNO GP-150/Dual
td.
3 INTERFACE
., L
3.1.1 Data format IEC61162-1 (JUL-2000), NMEA0183 Ver1.5/2.0
3.1.2 IN: DATA 1 and 2*: AGFPA, DBT, DPT, MTW, TLL
HDG**, HDM**, HDT**, VBW**, VHW**
DATA 3: MOB from external device (contact closure),
DATA 4: DGPS correction data in RTCM SC-104 V2.0,
Co
Waypoint data downloaded from YEOMAN plotter,
ZDA (or LOGOUT depending on jumper setting for Port 3),
Waypoint data to conventional PC (Data 4 only)
ing
*GP-150-Dual: DATA 2 port is used for the system connection.
**: GP-150 only
4 POWER SUPPLY
uild
4.1 Display unit 12-24 VDC: 0.8-0.4 A (w/ internal beacon receiver)
4.2 Rectifier (PR-62, option) 100/110-115/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60Hz
ipb

Antenna unit IPX6
Sh

5.4 Vibration -2 - 5 Hz and up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of ±1 mm ±10%
(7 m/s² maximum acceleration at 13.2 Hz)
-13.2 - 100 Hz with a constant maximum acceleration of 7 m/s²
DA
6 COATING COLOR
N
KA
SP-2 E4440S01C-M
td.
INDEX
., L
A E
Anchor watch alarm 7-2 Editing Waypoints 4-5
Apportioning the Memory 2-5 Entering marks 3-1
Arrival Alarm 7-1 entry of comment 4-2
Co
Automatic testing 9-6 Entering position 8-3
Enlarging characters 8-5
B Erasing Track 2-3
brilliance 1-3 Erasing marks 3-1
Erasing Route Waypoints 5-6
C Error Messages 9-2
Canceling Destination 5-5 Event Marks 3-3
ing
Centering Cursor Position 2-2 Event Mark Shape 3-3
Clearing the Memory 9-1 external DGPS receiver 8-12
Cross Track Error Alarm 7-2
contrast 1-3 F
Course-up 2-1 Fix mode 8-1
uild
Connecting Marks 3-2
Course bar tone 8-4 G
Cursor size 8-5 Geodetic datum 8-1
[CURSOR ON/OFF] 2-1 GPS Menu 8-1
GPS smoothing 8-1
D GPS Monitor Displays 8-13
ipb
Data display 1-6, 6-1 GPS error 9-2

DATA 1 out setting 8-6 Grid tone 8-4
DATA 2 output setting 8-7 Great Circle 5-7
DATA 3 output setting 8-7
Deleting Waypoints 4-5 H
Sh
Deleting Route Waypoints 4-6 Highway display 1-4

Deleting Routes 4-7 Hold icon 1-6, 2-3
Decca LOPs 6-2
Demo Display 6-4 K
Depth Alarm 7-4display mode 1-3 Keyboard test 9-5
DGPS Settings 8-10
DGPS error 9-2 L
DA
Display Orientation 2-1 Loading lighthouse data 8-9

Displaying LOPs 6-2 Loran LOPs 6-2
Disable satellite 8-1
Display test 9-6 N
Navigation display 1-5
N
North-up 2-1
KA
IN-1
INDEX
td.
M U
Magnetic variation 2-6 User-defined display 6-1
Mark Shape 3-2 Unit distance 8-3
., L
mark connection line 3-2 Unit of depth 8-3
Memory and I/O circuits test 9-5 Unit of water temperature 8-4
MOB Mark 3-4 Unit of altitude 8-4
P W
Co
Plotter 1 display 1-4 Water Temperature Alarm 7-4
Plotter 2 display 1-4 Waypoint mark size 8-5
[PLOT ON/OFF]key 2-2
Position offset 8-1 X
Position-fixing Accuracy 1-2 XTE alarm 7-2
[POWER]key 1-2
Z
ing
R ZOOM IN key 2-1
receiver indication 1-2 ZOOM OUT key 2-1
Registering Waypoints 4-1
Registering Routes 4-6
Replacing Route Waypoints 4-7
uild
Rhomb Line 5-7
S
Selecting the Display Mode 1-3
Selecting DGPS station 8-10
Self Tests 9-5
ipb
Shifting the Display 2-2

Setting Destination 5-1
Setting DATA to NMEA 8-7
Ship's Speed Alarm 7-3
Skipping route waypoint 5-5
Sh
Speed average 8-1

Stopping Plotting 2-2
Starting Plotting 2-2
T
Track Plotting Interval 2-4
True bearing 2-6
DA
Trip Alarm 7-3

Turning on the power 1-2
Turning the power off 1-3
Time difference 8-1
Time mark tone 8-4
N
KA
IN-2
td.
9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, Japan
Tel: +81 (798) 65-2111 Fax: +81 (798) 65-4200
www.furuno.co.jp
Publication No. DOC-1104
Declaration of Conformity
., L
0560
We FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Manufacturer)
Co
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Address)
declare under our sole responsibility that the product
ing
GPS navigator Types: GP-150 and GP-150 DUAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Model name, type number)
to which this declaration relates conforms to the following standard(s) or normative document(s)
uild
IMO Resolutions Test standards
IMO Resolution A.694(17) EN 60945: 2002-10 (IEC 60945 Ed. 4: 2002-08)
IMO Resolution A.819(19) EN 61108-1: 2003 (IEC 61108-1 Ed. 2: 2003-07)
IMO Resolution MSC.112(73) EN 61162-1: 2000 (IEC 61162-1 Ed. 2: 2000-07)
IMO Resolution MSC.191(79) IEC 62288 Ed. 1: 2008-07
IMO SN Circular SN/Circ.243
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ipb
(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document(s))
For assessment, see

• EC type-examination (Module B) certificate No 06212001 issued by Telefication b.v. (0560), The
Netherlands
Sh
• Production Quality System (Module D) certificate No. P 112 issued by Telefication b.v. (0560), The
Netherlands
This declaration is issued according to the provisions of European Council Directive 96/98/EC on
marine equipment amended by Commission Directive 2008/67/EC.
DA
On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.

N
Hiroaki Komatsu
KA
Nishinomiya City, Japan Manager,

April 10, 2009 International Rules and Regulations
------------------------------------------------------ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Place and date of issue) (name and signature or equivalent marking of authorized person)
.
Ltd
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
.,
Co
MULTI-DISTRIBUTOR
lding
MODEL MD-550
bui
hip
AS
ND
KA
www.furuno.co.jp
td.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
., L
Read these safety instructions before you operate the equipment.
Indicates a condition that can cause death or serious

WARNING injury if not avoided.
Co
Indicates a condition that can cause minor or moderate
CAUTION injury if not avoided.
Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action
ing
WARNING CAUTION
Ground the equipment
Do not open the cover of the
equipment. cable armor to prevent
mutual interference and
electrical shock.
uild
This equipment uses high
voltage electricity which can Observe the following compass safe
shock or burn. distances to prevent deviation of a
Only qualified personnel magnetic compass:
should work inside the
equipment. Standard Steering
compass compass
ipb
MD-550 1.45 m 0.95 m

CAUTION
The mounting location should satisfy Turn off the power switch at the
the following conditions: switchboard before beginning the
Sparate from radio transmitter, radar, installation.
direction finder (at least 3m).
Sh
Locate the equipment away from air

conditioner vents. Warning Label
Keep the equipment out of direct Warning labels are attached to the equipment.
sunlight. Do not remove the labels.If a label is missing or
Vibration should be minimal. illegible, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer
The location should be free of water about replacement.
spray.
DA
To avoid electrical shock, do not

remove cover. No user-serviceable
Do not install this unit on the parts inside.
overhead.
Do not use the cable having a

diameter greater than 11.7 mm.
N

Type 86-003-1011-3
Code No.: 100-236-233-10
KA
i
td.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
., L
System Configuration ..........................................................................................................................1
Installation materials and Spare parts................................................................................................1
Cables ....................................................................................................................................................2
Co
Mounting ...............................................................................................................................................2
Setting....................................................................................................................................................3
Fabrication of signal cable ..................................................................................................................3
Digital Interface.....................................................................................................................................4
SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................................................... SP-1
ing
PACKING LISTS ................................................................................................................................A-1
OUTLINE DRAWING .........................................................................................................................D-1
INTECONNECTION DIAGRAM.........................................................................................................S-1
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
ii
td.
System Configuration
Nameplate
., L
Co
12-24 VDC Attach label here.
Distribute NMEA from one Distribute NMEA from one

input to four output input to eight output
Input1 Output1 Input1 Output1
ing
Output2 Output2
Output3 Output3
Output4 Output4
Input2 Output5 Output5
uild
Output6 Output6
Output7 Output7
Output8 Output8
Distribute AD-10 format

When connecting by current loop, the
Input1 Output1 standard FURUNO receive circuit
ipb
Output2 (current limiter circuit: 470 Ω,

Output3 photocoupler: PC-400/900 are
included) accepts one unit per output
Output4
line. For connection of multiple
equipment, contact a FURUNO agent
Sh
or dealer for details.

Note: Write on the label the signal name of output 1-8 with an oil-based magic marker, and then
attach it below the nameplate. Clean the location before attaching the label.
Installation materials and Spare parts

Name Type Code No. Qty Remarks
DA
Self-tapping
4x16 SUS304 000-162-605-10 4
screw CP14-06601
Label 14-070-1006 100-337-840-10 1
Fuse FGMB 125V 0.5A PBF 000-157-462-10 1 SP14-03001
N
Environmental category: Protected from the weather

KA
1
td.
Cables
Use the following cables (Japan Industrial
Standard cables) or the equivalents.
., L
DPYC-1.5 Power cable
Armor CR4 (POWER)
LEDs CR5 (IN1)
Sheath CR6 (IN2)
Jumpers
Jumpers
Co
φ = 11.7 mm
Conductor
S = 1.5 mm 2
φ = 1.56 mm
TTYCS-1 (Twisted pair cable)
Current loop or RS-422 21
6 5
14
ing
Armor
MAIN board 14P0361
Sheath
POWER LED: Lights when the power is
supplied.
Shield
φ = 10.1 mm IN1 LED: Blinks when data is input.
Conductor
uild
IN2 LED: Blinks when data is input.
S = 0.75 mm 2
φ = 1.11 mm
Note: You can confirm working of output port
(by LED) by connecting it to the other
TTYCS-1Q (Four core twisted)
input port. (Refer to schematic diagram.)
AD-10 format
CR5
ipb
Armor Input1 Output1

Output2
Sheath
Output3
Shield Output4
φ = 11.3 mm CR6
Conductor Input2 Output5
Sh
S = 0.75 mm2
φ = 1.11 mm Output6
Output7
We recommend use of the following crimp-on Output8
lug. Connection for confirming working of output
FV1.25-M3 (Code no.: 000-538-110) port
DA
φ = 6.6 mm
4.0 mm If the LEDs do not blink, the MAIN board
φ = 3.7 mm 14P0361 (004-010-860) may be defective.
Contact FURUNO serviceman.
Mounting
This unit has not power switch. If you do not
N
connect the MD-550 to power switchboard or

circuit breaker, install an external power switch
KA
(local supply), locating it near the MD-550.
2
td.
Setting TTYCS-1
77 3
Factory jumper settings are for current loop
and “1 in 4 out”. Shield Armor
., L
IN1 (OUT1-4) IN2 (OUT5-8)
JP1 (#1-#2), JP4 (#1-#2), 8
twist and cut
Current loop JP2 (#1-#2), JP5 (#1-#2), Earth wire fabrication
JP3 (#1-#2) JP6 (#1-#2) 55
JP1 (#2-#3), JP4 (#2-#3), 6 5
RS-422 JP2 (#2-#3), JP5 (#2-#3),
Co
1
JP3 (#2-#3) JP6 (#2-#3)
Crimp-on lug
JP7 6
1 in 4 out #1-#2
Solder
1 in 8 out #2-#3
Earth wire
Note1: Put short jumper into connector in 15 10
6
ing
same direction as before.
Note2: Do not short jumpers JP13 & JP14. They Vinyl tape
should be “open.”
Fabrication of signal cable

uild
DPYC-1.5 TTYCS-1Q
77 3 77 3
Sheath Armor Shield Armor
8
Cut the sheath. twist and cut
ipb
15 10 Earth wire fabrication

6 55
6 5
Vinyl tape
1
Crimp-on lug
1 Crimp-on lug
Sh
Solder
Earth wire
15 10
DA
Vinyl tape
N
KA
3
td.
Digital Interface (IEC 61162-1 Edition 3 (2007-04))
Schematic diagrams
., L
DATA-IN port (1, 2)
DIC-149-3P JP VCC
DATA-IN JP 1 2
VCC
R R
TB1 DSS306_91FZ103N100 100 390 PC900V R
U 6 2.2k
RD-H 1
FL 0.01u DIC-149-3P CR
B 4
JP 1 2 1SS133
Co
2
RD-C
FL B
0.01u 3 5
Isolation: Photocoupler
ing
Input Impedance: 470 ohms
Max. Voltage: ±15 V
Threshold: 3 mA (In case of FURUNO device talker connection)
OUTPUT DATA port (1- 8)

uild
Output drive capability: Max. 15 mA
OUTPUT DATA
TB1 DSS306_91FZ103N100
TD-A
0.01u B FL
TD-B
0.01u FL DSS306_91FZ103N100
ipb
RS_422_A
Y
Sh
N DA
KA
4
FURUNO MD-550
td.
MD-550
., L
Co
1 GENERAL
1-input 8-outputs (1 circuit), change JP7 setting
1.2 Type of signal Serial data: RS-422 or current loop
IEC 61162-1 ed-3 (Apr-2007), NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0 or
ing
AD-10 format
2 POWER SUPPLY
12-24 VDC: 0.25-0.15 A
uild
3.1 Ambient temperature -15°C to +55°C
3.3 Degree of protection IPX0
ipb
4 COATING COLOR
2.5GY5/1.5 (fixed)
Sh
N DA
KA
SP-1 E4408S01H
A-1
ＰＡＣＫＩＮＧＬＩＳＴ 14CK-X-9851 -4 1/1
td.
MD-550
N A M E O U T L I N E DESCRIPTION/CODE № Q'TY
ユニット UNIT
., L
分配器
MD-550 1
MULTI-DISTRIBUTOR
000-043-102-00
予備品 SPARE PARTS
予備品
Co
SP14-03001 1
SPARE PARTS
004-010-880-00
工事材料 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
工事材料
CP14-06601 1
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
001-011-190-00
ing
図書 DOCUMENT
取扱説明書(英）
OME-44080-* 1
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
000-809-267-1*
uild
取扱説明書(和)
OMJ-44080-* 1
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
000-809-266-1*
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
型式/ｺｰﾄﾞ番号が２段の場合、下段より上段に代わる過渡期品であり、どちらかが入っています。なお、品質は変わりません。
TWO TYPES AND CODES MAY BE LISTED FOR AN ITEM. THE LOWER PRODUCT MAY BE SHIPPED IN PLACE OF THE UPPER
PRODUCT. QUALITY IS THE SAME.
（略図の寸法は、参考値です。 DIMENSIONS IN DRAWING FOR REFERENCE ONLY.） 14CK-X-9851
KA
NDA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
D-1
td.
1 2 3 4
AD-10フォーマットのとき NMEA データのとき

FOR AD-10 FORMAT FOR NMEA DATA
MD-550 MD-550
*1 TB1 TB1 *1 *1 TB1 *2 TB1 *1
KA AD-10 TTYCS-1Q 1 DATA-H DATA-A 4 TTYCS-1Q AD-10 OUT1 NMEA TTYCS-1 1 RD1-A/RD1-H TD1-A 4 TTYCS-1 OUTPUT DATA1
10m MAX. 2 DATA-C DATA-B 5 10m MAX. (DATA-IN) 100m MAX. 2 RD1-B/RD1-C TD1-B 5 100m MAX. NMEA
A INPUT No.1
18 SHIFT-H SHIFT-A 21 3 FG FG 6
N 19 SHIFT-C
20 FG
SHIFT-B 22
FG 23
*1
１系統８分配時
JP7の設定変更が必要。 TD2-A 7
TD2-B 8
*1
TTYCS-1
100m MAX.
OUTPUT DATA2
NMEA
TTYCS-1Q AD-10 OUT2
DATA-A 7 1-INPUT, 8-WAY FG 9
DATA-B 8 10m MAX. DATA-OUT *1
DISTRIBUTION No.1 TTYCS-1 OUTPUT DATA3
DA SHIFT-A 24 REQUIRES CHANGING TD3-A 10
SHIFT-B 25 TD3-B 11 100m MAX. NMEA
JP7 SETTING.
FG 26 FG 12
*1 *1
DATA-A 10 TTYCS-1Q AD-10 OUT3 TTYCS-1 OUTPUT DATA4
TD4-A 13
10m MAX. 100m MAX. NMEA
DATA-B 11 TD4-B 14
SHIFT-A 27 FG 15
Sh SHIFT-B 28 NC 16
FG 29 *1 TB1 *2 *1
*1 NMEA TTYCS-1 18 RD2-A/RD2-H TTYCS-1 OUTPUT DATA5
TD5-A 21
TTYCS-1Q AD-10 OUT4 (DATA-IN) 100m MAX. 100m MAX. NMEA
DATA-A 13 19 RD2-B/RD2-C TD5-B 22
DATA-B 10m MAX. No.2
14 20 FG FG 23
SHIFT-A 30 ２系統４分配時 *1
ipb
SHIFT-B 31 （工場設定） TD6-A 24 TTYCS-1 OUTPUT DATA6
B FG 32 TD6-B 25
100m MAX. NMEA
33 2-INPUT, 4-WAY FG 26
DISTRIBUTION DATA-OUT *1
(DEFAULT SETTING） No.2
TD7-A 27
TTYCS-1 OUTPUT DATA7
100m MAX. NMEA
TD7-B 28
uild
FG 29
*1
TTYCS-1 OUTPUT DATA8
TD8-A 30
TD8-B 31 100m MAX. NMEA
*1 TB1 *1 TB1 FG 32
12-24VDC DPYC-1.5 12-24VDC DPYC-1.5
34 V-IN(+)
ing 34 V-IN(+) NC 33
17 V-IN(-) 17 V-IN(-)
GND GND
IV-1.25SQ. IV-1.25SQ.
Co
C DRAWN TITLE
Nov. 10, '04 E. MIYOSHI MD-550
注記＊１）造船所手配 CHECKED
., L
名称分配器
＊２）工場設定：カレントループ。 TAKAHASHI. T
APPROVED
Y. Hatai 相互結線図
NOTE *1. SHIPYARD SUPPLY. SCALE MASS NAME
*2. DEFAULT SETTING: CURRENT LOOP. kg MULTI-DISTRIBUTOR
S-1
DWG No.
td.
C4408-C01- G 14-070-5001-1 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
td.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb

Sh
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200
DA
All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : NOV . 2001

B2 ：Mar.
B2 : AUG19,
. 09,
2010 2010
Pub. No. OME-44080-B2
(YOSH ) MD-550 *00080926711*
N
*00080926711*
* 0 0 0 8 0 9 2 6 7 1 1 *
KA
KA
ND
AS
hip
bui
ldin
gC
o.,
Ltd
.
td.
IMPORTANT NOTICES
., L
General
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong
operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
Co
ing
uild
Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For
disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance
(http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal.
ipb

Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery(ies),
see the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery(ies) is used.
Sh
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of

batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a
trash site. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site
according to your national legislation and the Batteries
Directive 2006/66/EU. Cd
In the USA
DA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that

Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled.
Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to
local laws. Ni-Cd Pb
N
There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of
symbols can increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the
future.
KA
i
td.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
., L
The operator must read the safety instructions before attempting to operate this equipment
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

WARNING could result in death or serious injury.
Co
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
CAUTION can result in minor or moderate injury.
Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action
ing
WARNING WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Immediately turn off the power at the
Do not open the equipment. switchboard if the equipment is
emitting smoke or fire.
Only qualified personnel should work
inside the equipment. Continued use of the equipment can
uild
cause fire or electrical shock. Contact a
The antenna emits electromagnetic FURUNO agent for service.
radio frequency (RF) energy, which
can be harmful. Distances at which Make sure no rain or water splash leaks
RF radiation level of 100, 10 and 2 into the equipment.
W/m2 are present are given below.
Fire or electrical shock can result if water
leaks in the equipment.
100 W/m2: Nil
ipb
10 W/m2: 0.1 m Do not operate the equipment with wet

2 W/m2: 1.0 m hands.
Immediately turn off the power at the Electrical shock can result.
switchboard if water leaks into the
equipment or something is dropped in
the equipment.
Sh
WARNING LABEL
Continued use of the equipment can
A warning label is attached to the AC-DC
cause fire or electrical shock. Contact a
power supply. Do not remove the label.
FURUNO agent for service.
If the label is missing or damaged, contact
Do not disassemble or modify the a FURUNO agent or dealer about
equipment. replacement.
DA
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury WARNING

To avoid electrical shock, do not Type: 86-003-1011-1
can result. remove cover. No user-serviceable Code No.: 100-236-231
parts inside.
Do not place liquid-filled containers on

the top of the equipment.
Fire or electrical shock can result if a

liquid spills into the equipment.
N
Use the proper fuse.

KA
Use of the wrong fuse can cause fire or

permanent damage to the equipment.
ii
td.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
., L
FOREWORD...........................................iv 3. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLE-
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ..................vi SHOOTING ...................................... 3-1
PROGRAM NUMBER ...........................vii 3.1 Maintenance ............................................. 3-1
3.2 Replacement of Fuse, Resetting the
SYSTEM OVERVIEW ...........................viii Breaker.................................................... 3-2
Co
3.2.1 Replacement of fuse..................... 3-2
1. OPERATION .................................... 1-1 3.2.2 Resetting the breaker ................... 3-2
1.1 Description of Controls.............................. 1-1
3.3 Troubleshooting ........................................ 3-3
1.2 Turning the Power On and Off .................. 1-2 3.4 Diagnostics ............................................... 3-3
1.3 Adjusting Panel Dimmer and Contrast ...... 1-4 3.4.1 Monitor unit test ............................ 3-3
1.4 Menu Overview ......................................... 1-5
3.4.2 Transponder test........................... 3-5
1.4.1 Menu operating procedure............ 1-5 3.4.3 Power on/off history ...................... 3-7
1.5 Entering Voyage-Related Data.................. 1-7 3.4.4 Tx on/off history ............................ 3-7
ing
1.6 Setting CPA/TCPA .................................. 1-11
3.5 Alarm Status.............................................. 3-8
1.7 Selecting a Display ................................. 1-12 3.6 Error and System Messages..................... 3-9
1.7.1 Plotter display ............................. 1-13 3.7 GPS Monitor ........................................... 3-11
1.7.2 Target list (displaying target data)1-15
3.8 Displaying Sensor Status ........................ 3-12
1.7.3 Dangerous (target) list ................ 1-22 3.9 Restoring Default Settings ...................... 3-13
1.7.4 Static data display....................... 1-22 3.10 AIS-SART Test Indication in Target List.. 3-14
uild
1.7.5 Dynamic data display.................. 1-24
1.7.6 Alarm status display.................... 1-24 APPENDIX........................................ AP-1
1.8 Messages ............................................... 1-25 Menu Tree - Class A AIS ................................. AP-1
1.8.1 Sending a message .................... 1-25 Menu Tree - Inland AIS ................................... AP-3
1.8.2 Receiving messages................... 1-27 Parts List ......................................................... AP-5
1.8.3 TX and RX message logs ........... 1-29 Parts Location ................................................. AP-6
1.9 Regional Operating Channels ................. 1-30 Monitor unit ............................................ AP-6
ipb
1.9.1 Viewing channels, Tx power ....... 1-30 Transponder unit .................................... AP-6
1.9.2 Displaying, editing regional Digital Interface (IEC 61162-1 Edition 2, IEC
operating area status ................ 1-31 61162-2) ...................................................... AP-8
1.10 Enabling/Disabling Alarm Buzzer, Sentence data ........................................ AP-8
Key Beep............................................... 1-34 Serial interface I/O circuit ....................... AP-9
1.11 Long Range Mode ................................. 1-35 Sentence description............................ AP-10
Sh
1.12 Viewing Initial Settings ........................... 1-37 Inland AIS specific sentences............... AP-24
VHF Channel List .......................................... AP-27
2. INLAND AIS OPERATION............... 2-1 International mode ............................... AP-27
2.1 Activating the Inland AIS ........................... 2-1 USA mode............................................ AP-28
2.2 Selecting AIS Mode................................... 2-2 ERI Codes..................................................... AP-29
2.3 Entering Voyage-Related Data.................. 2-3
Terminology, Units, Symbols ......................... AP-30
2.4 Static Data................................................. 2-8
2.5 Dynamic Data ......................................... 2-10 SPECIFICATIONS ............................ SP-1
DA
2.6 Details Ship Display (Mobile Class A) ..... 2-11

2.7 Inland AIS Specific Messaging ................ 2-13 INDEX .................................................IN-1
2.7.1 Text message.............................. 2-13
2.7.2 ETA and RTA messages ............. 2-15
2.7.3 No. of persons message............. 2-19
2.7.4 EMMA warning message ............ 2-21
N
2.7.5 Water level message .................. 2-23

2.7.6 Message logs.............................. 2-24
2.8 Viewing Initial Settings ............................ 2-26
KA
iii
td.
FOREWORD
., L
A Word to the Owner of the FA-150
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the FA-150 UAIS Transponder. We
are confident you will discover why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with
quality and reliability.
Co
For over 60 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for
quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to excellence is furthered by
our extensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine
environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly
ing
operated and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance
procedures in this manual.
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving
our purposes.
uild
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.
Features
The FA-150 is a universal AIS (Automatic Identification System) for open sea and inland
ipb
waterways, capable of exchanging navigation and ship data between own ship and other
ships or coastal stations. It complies with IMO MSC.74(69) Annex 3, A.694, ITU-R
M.137-3 and DSC ITU-R M.825. It also complies with IEC 61993-2 (Type testing standard),
IEC 60945 (EMC and environmental conditions).
The FA-150 consists of VHF and GPS antennas, a transponder unit, a monitor unit, and
Sh
several associated units. The transponder contains a VHF transmitter, two TDMA
receivers on two parallel VHF channels, a DSC channel 70 receiver, interface,
communication processor, and internal GPS receiver. The internal GPS is a 12-channel
all-in-view receiver with a differential capability, and provides UTC reference for system
synchronization to eliminate clash among multiple users. It also gives position, COG and
SOG when the external GPS fails.
N DA
KA
iv
td.
The main features are
• Safety of navigation by automatically exchanging navigational data between ships and
between ship and coast
• Static data:
., L
- MMSI (Maritime Mobile Service Identity)
- IMO number (where available)
- Call sign & name
- Length and beam
- Type of ship
Co
- Location of position-fixing antenna on the ship
• Dynamic data:
- Ship’s position with accuracy indication and integrity status
- Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)
- Course over ground (COG)
- Speed over ground (SOG)
- Heading
ing
- Rate of turn (ROT) where available
• Voyage-related data
- Ship’s draught
- Navigation status (manual input)
- Hazardous cargo (type)
uild
- Destination and ETA (at master’s discretion)
• Short safety-related messages, free messages
• LCD panel satisfies the IMO minimum requirements plus simple plotting modes
• Interfaces for radar, ECDIS, PC for future networking expansion
• GPS/VHF combined antenna for easy installation available
ipb
• CPA/TCPA alarm
• Built-in GPS receiver for UTC synchronization and backup position-fixing device
• The Inland AIS feature is based on CCNR (Vessel Tracking and Tracing Standard for
Inland Navigation). Inland AIS receives and sends SOLAS AIS information, and
interfaces automatic data input such as blue sign, draught (in centimeters), air draught
Sh
(height from waterline), hazardous cargo blue cone indication, euro ship identifier and
inland ship type. Further, the inland AIS sends ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) to lock,
bridge, terminal, etc. and displays response as RTA (Requested Time of Arrival) from
the lock, bridge or terminal. Information receivable from land stations include EMMA
warning, water level data, etc.
N DA
KA
v
td.
., L
Either
GPS antenna
GSC-001 VHF antenna
GPS/VHF
GPA-017S combined antenna
Co
GVA-100
MONITOR UNIT
Distributor unit FA-1502
DB-1 (two units may
be connected)
ing
UNIVERSAL AIS
MENU ENT
DISP DIM
NAV
STATUS
FA-150 PWR
uild
12-24 VDC
TRANSPONDER UNIT
FA-1501
External display, Pilot plug,
NavNet2, Sensor
ipb
Alarm system
PC, Beacon receiver
LAN
Blue Sign
: Standard
Sh
Power supply
PR-240 : Option
: Local supply
GSC-001 Exposed to the weather

GVA-100 Exposed to the weather
100/110/115/200/ 24 VDC FA-1501 Protected from the weather
DA
220/230 VAC FA-1502 Protected from the weather

1φ, 50/60Hz 12-24 VDC DB-1 Protected from the weather
PR-240 Protected from the weather
N
KA
vi
td.
PROGRAM NUMBER
., L
PCB Location Program No. Version No. Date of Modification
CPU Monitor Unit 2450021 (Prog) 01.**
(24P0062) 2450020 (Boot) 01.**
02.** September 2009
Co
02.**
MAIN Transponder Unit 2450018 01.**
(24P0035) GPS Receiver 485026 40**
Transponder Unit 02.** September 2009
**: Minor Modification
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
vii
td.
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
., L
System overview
The Automatic Identification System (AIS) was originally developed to aid the Vessel
Traffic Services (VTS) by use of a VHF transponder working on Digital Selective Call
(DSC) at VHF CH70, and is still in use along the UK coastal areas and others. Some time
Co
later the IMO developed a Universal AIS using the new sophisticated technology called
Self-Organized Time Division Multiple Access (SOTDMA) based on a VHF Data Link
(VDL).
The system operates in three modes – autonomous (continuous operation in all areas),
assigned (data transmission interval remotely controlled by authority in traffic monitoring
service) and polled (in response to interrogation from a ship or authority). It is
ing
synchronized with GPS time to avoid conflict among multiple users (IMO minimum 2000
reports per minute and IEC requires 4500 reports on two channels). The VHF channels
87B and 88B are commonly used and in addition there are local AIS frequencies.
Shipborne AIS transponders exchange various data as specified by the IMO and ITU on
either frequency automatically set up by the frequency management telecommand
uild
received by the DSC receiver on ship.
AIS-fitted AtoN broadcasts its

identification, type of operation,
location, displacement, etc. at
3-min intervals or at a reporting
rate designated by the
Administration authorities.
ipb
VTS Center transmits TDMA CH

management message including
Aids to code, type, position, etc. of buoys
Navigation every 3 min, and the AtoN broadcasts
(AtoN) these messages for ships.
Transponder
Sh
VTS center
The VTS center transmits a command on
frequency assignment, slots, report rate,
VHF output power, channel spacing, etc.
(Assigned mode)
Trans-
ponder
DA
Transponder
Static and Dynamic information incl.
MMSI, Name, POSN, HDG, COG, SOG
Interrogation and Response

Own ship Ship 1
All ships broadcast Static and Dynamic information (autonomous and
continuous mode). If OS wants to know information about ship 1, OS shall
N
send an interrogation in polling mode; then ship 1 will transmit her

response on the same VHF channel without operator intervention.
KA
AIS system
viii
td.
Not all ships carry AIS
The Officer of the Watch (OOW) should always be aware that other ships, and in particular
leisure craft, fishing boats and warships, and some coastal shore stations (including
., L
Vessel Traffic Service centers) might not be fitted with AIS.
The OOW should also be aware that AIS fitted on other ships as a mandatory carriage
requirement might be switched off by the master if its use might compromise the security
of the vessel. Thus, users are therefore cautioned to always bear in mind that information
Co
provided by AIS may not be giving a complete or correct “picture” of shipping traffic in their
vicinity.
Use of AIS in collision avoidance

As an anti-collision aid, the AIS has the following advantages over radar:
• Information provided in near real-time
ing
• Capable of instant presentation of target course alterations
• Not subject to target swap
• Not subject to target loss in clutter
• Not subject to target loss due to abrupt maneuvers
uild
• Able to "detect" ships within VHF/FM coverage, including in some circumstances,
around bends and behind islands.
When using the AIS for anti-collision purposes it is important to remember that the AIS is
an additional source of navigation information. It does not replace other navigational
systems. The AIS may not be giving a complete or correct “picture” of shipping traffic in its
vicinity.
ipb
The use of the AIS does not negate the responsibility of the OOW to comply with all
collision regulation requirements, especially the maintaining of a proper look-out. The
prudent navigator uses all aids available to navigate the ship.
Sh
Erroneous information
Erroneous information implies a risk to other ships as well as your own. Poorly configured
or improperly calibrated sensors might lead to incorrect information being transmitted. It is
the user’s responsibility to ensure that all information entered into the system is correct
and up to date.
N DA
KA
ix
td.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
x
td.
1. OPERATION
., L
1.1 Description of Controls
1 3 2 4
Co
UNIVERSAL AIS
MENU ENT
ing
DISP DIM
NAV
STATUS
uild
FA-150 PWR
5 7 8 6
ipb
1 LCD Screen: Displays various data.

2 CursorPad: Shifts cursor; chooses menu items and options;
selects alphanumeric data.
Sh
3 MENU key: Opens the menu.

4 ENT key: Terminates keyboard input; changes screen.
5 DISP key: Chooses a display screen; closes menu.
6 DIM key: Adjusts panel dimmer and LCD contrast.
7 NAV STATUS key: Displays NAV STATUS menu, which contains voyage-related data.
DA
8 PWR key: Turns the power on and off.
Notice: The nominal viewing distance is 50 cm.

N
KA
1-1
1. OPERATION
td.
1.2 Turning the Power On and Off
Press the PWR key to turn the equipment on or off. When powered, the
equipment sounds a beep then proceeds in the sequence shown below.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
The startup screen displays the program version number and the results of the
ROM, RAM and backup data test, showing OK or “NG” (No Good) as the result.
Sh
If “NG” appears for any of the check result, try resetting the power to restore
normal operation. If that does not work, contact your dealer for advice. After the
startup test is completed the plotter display appears, showing the messages
“NO OWN SHIP POSITION AVAILABLE.” and “NOW INITIALIZING.” These
messages mean that position data has not yet arrived and the transponder is
initializing itself, respectively. When both messages disappear, the equipment
DA
is ready for use. If the message “ENTER MMSI!” appears, the vessel’s MMSI
has not been registered in the equipment. Enter MMSI.
If there is no response from the transponder unit or AIS symbols do not appear,
the message “COMMUNICATION ERROR” appears on the screen. Press any
key to erase the message. Check if the transponder unit is powered. Also
N
check the connection between the monitor unit and the transponder unit.
KA
1-2
1. OPERATION
td.
The FA-150 should be powered while underway or at anchor. The master may
switch off the AIS if he believes that the continual operation of the AIS might
compromise the safety or security of his ship. The AIS should be restarted
once the source of danger has gone.
., L
The equipment transmits own ship static data within two minutes of start-up
and it is transmitted at six-minute intervals thereafter. Static data includes
MMSI number, IMO number, call sign, ship name, ship length and width, ship
type and GPS antenna position.
Co
In addition to static data, ship’s dynamic data is also transmitted. This data
includes position with quality indication, SOG, COG, rate of turn, heading, etc.
Dynamic data is transmitted every 2 s to 3 min depending on ship’s speed and
course change. Voyage-related data, such as ship’s draft, hazardous cargo,
destination and estimated time of arrival, are transmitted at six-minute
intervals.
ing
The FA-150 starts receiving data from AIS-equipped ships as soon as it is
turned on, and those ships’ location are shown on the plotter display with the
AIS symbol. (To learn more about the plotter display, see section 1.7.) With
connection of a radar or ECDIS, the AIS target symbols may be overlaid on the
uild
radar or ECDIS.
Note 1: If no navigation sensor is installed or a sensor such as a gyrocompass

has failed, the AIS automatically transmits “not available” data to AIS-equipped
ships.
Note 2: The reporting intervals are as follows:
ipb
Ship’s dynamic conditions and nominal reporting interval
Ship’s navigation status Nominal reporting interval

Sh
Ship at anchor and not moving faster than 3 kn 3 minutes

Ship at anchor and moving faster than 3 kn 10 seconds
Ship speed 0-14 kn 10 seconds
Ship speed 0-14 kn and changing course 3 1/3 seconds
Ship speed 14-23 kn 6 seconds
DA
Ship speed 14-23 kn and changing course 2 seconds

Ship speed faster than 23 kn 2 seconds
Ship speed faster than 23 kn and changing course 2 seconds
N
KA
1-3
1. OPERATION
td.
1.3 Adjusting Panel Dimmer and Contrast
The panel dimmer and display contrast may be adjusted as follows:
., L
1. Press the DIM key to show the dimmer and contrast setting screen.
DIMMER ( 0 ~8 )
4
C O N T R A S T ( 0 ~6 3 )
44
Co
EXIT: [ENT]
2. Use ▲ or ▼ to adjust the panel dimmer; ◄ or ► to adjust the contrast.

(The default dimmer and contrast settings are 4 and 45, respectively. To
restore default settings see section 3.9 Restoring Default Settings.)
3. Press the ENT key to close the setting screen.
ing
Note: If the equipment is turned off with the contrast setting of 35 or lower, the
equipment will start up with the contrast setting 36 when the power is again
turned on.
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-4
1. OPERATION
td.
1.4 Menu Overview
You can select the functionality of the equipment through the menu. If you get
lost in operation, press the MENU key until you return to the main menu. The
., L
complete menu tree is provided in the Appendix.
1.4.1 Menu operating procedure

1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
Co
[MENU]
MSG
SENSOR STATUS
INTERNAL GPS
USER SETTINGS
INITIAL SETTINGS
CHANNEL SETTINGS
DIAGNOSTICS
ing
2. Press ▲ or ▼ on the CursorPad to select a menu then press the ENT key.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select a sub-menu then press the ENT key.
There are two types of sub-menus: option selection and data input. (Some
uild
sub-menus combine both.) Below are examples of each type of sub-menu.
[USER SETTINGS] [DRAUGHT&PERSONS]

KEY BEEP : ON DRAUGHT: 0.0 m
ALARM BUZZER : ON NO. OF PERSONS: 0
AUTO SORT : ON
DISP SART TEST : ON
LR MODE : AUTO
ipb
RECEIVED MSG
CPA/TCPA ALARM
USER SETTINGS sub-menu DRAUGHT&PERSONS input screen

(Option selection) (Data input)
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu item then press the ENT key.

Sh
5. Depending on the sub-menu selected, select an option or enter

alphanumeric data.
N DA
KA
1-5
1. OPERATION
td.
Selecting an option
The example below shows how to select an option from the USER
SETTINGS menu.
., L
a) A window showing the options for the item selected is overlaid on the
sub-menu. For example, the options for KEY BEEP are as shown below.
[USER SETTINGS]
KEY BEEP : ON
ALARM BUZZER : ON
Co
ON
AUTO SORT : ON
OFF Options window
DISP SART TEST : ON
LR MODE : AUTO
RECEIVED MSG
CPA/TCPA ALARM
b) Press ▲ or ▼ to select option desired then press the ENT key.
ing
Entering alphanumeric data
The example below shows how to enter numeric data on the
DRAUGHT&PERSONS sub-menu, which is on the NAV STATUS menu.
uild
[DRAUGHT&PERSONS] W
DRAUGHT: 00.0 m
NO. OF PERSONS: 0 Cursor
ipb
a) Select DRAUGHT and press the ENT key.

b) Press ▲ or ▼ to select appropriate numeric. Pressing ▲ displays
alphanumeric characters cyclically in order of blank space, alphabet,
Sh
numerals, and symbols.

c) Press ► to shift the cursor to the adjacent place, then use ▲ or ▼ to
select alphanumeric character.
d) Repeat steps b) and c) to finish entering data. To erase a character, insert
a space.
e) After entering all data, press the ENT key to register input.
DA
6. Press the DISP key to close the menu.

N
KA
1-6
1. OPERATION
td.
1.5 Entering Voyage-Related Data
There are six items on the NAV STATUS menu that you will need to enter at
the start of a voyage.
., L
• Navigation status • Cargo type • Arrival time
• Destination • No. of persons • Draught
1. Press the NAV STATUS key to open the NAV STATUS menu.
Co
ing
2. If your navigation status is different from that shown, follow the procedure
below. If it is the same as shown, go to step 3.
a) Press the ENT key.
b) Press ▲ or ▼ to select appropriate status then press the ENT key. Refer
uild
to the data below to select appropriate nav status.
00: UNDER WAY USING ENGINE
01: AT ANCHOR
02: NOT UNDER COMMAND
03: RESTRICTED MANEUVERABILITY
04: CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT
05: MOORED
ipb
06: AGROUND
07: ENGAGED IN FISHING-TRAWLING
08: UNDER WAY SAILING
09: ENGAGED IN FISHING OTHER THAN TRAWLING
10: AIR-CUSHION VESSEL IN NON-DISPLACEMENT MODE OR WIG
CRAFT TAKING OFF, LANDING OR IN FLIGHT
Sh
11: POWER-DRIVEN VESSEL TOWING ASTERN

12: POWER-DRIVEN VESSEL PUSHING AHEAD OR TOWING
ALONGSIDE
13: IN DISTRESS OR REQUIRING ASSISTANCE
14: AIS-SART (ACTIVE), SEEKING TO ATTRACT ATTENTION*
* Input not possible. “ERROR REGIST PRESS ANY KEY” appears.
15: NOT DEFINED (DEFAULT), AIS-SART (TEST)
DA
3. Press ► to show the DESTINATION sub-menu.

N
KA
1-7
1. OPERATION
td.
4. NEW is selected; press the ENT key.
[DESTINATION]
ENTER A NEW
., L
DESTINATION
QUIT:[NAV STATUS]
Co
NAV STATUS menu, DESTINATION sub-menu, destination input
5. Press the ENT key. Enter destination then press the ENT key. You can use
up to 20 alphanumeric characters (\, ^, !, ,, $, and * count as three
characters), and enter 20 destinations. (For how to enter alphanumeric
characters, see “Entering alphanumeric data” on page 1-6.)
ing
PROCESSING DESTINATIONS
If you have already registered some destinations, the DESTINATION
sub-menu looks something like the one below. From this screen you can
select, edit or delete destinations.
uild
[DESTINATION] WX
COTE D'IVOIRE Current destination
(0/3)
*************
[NEW?]
COTE D'IVOIRE
SAN FRANCISCO
ipb
Destination list
SEATTLE
1) Select appropriate destination then press the ENT key to show the options
window below.
Sh
SELECT
EDIT
DELETE
2) Select SELECT, EDIT or DELETE as appropriate then press the ENT key.
Do one of the following according to your objective.
SELECT: Select a destination.

DA
EDIT: Press the ENT key twice then edit the destination.
DELETE: The prompt below appears. Press W to select
YES; press the ENT key.
DESTINATION DELETE.
ARE YOU SURE?

N
YES NO
KA
1-8
1. OPERATION
td.
6. Press ► to show the ARRIVAL TIME sub-menu.
[ARRIVAL TIME]
DATE [UTC]: 25/APR
., L
TIME[UTC]: 0:00
Co
7. DATE[UTC] is selected; press the ENT key.
8. Enter the date of arrival then press the ENT key.
9. TIME[UTC] is selected; press the ENT key.
10. Enter the estimated time of arrival, in 24-hour notation, then press the ENT
key.
11. Press ► to show the CARGO TYPE sub-menu.
ing
[CARGO TYPE]
TYPE NO.: 00
**** TYPE DETAIL****

NOT AVAILABLE
uild
12. TYPE NO. is selected; press the ENT key.
13. Select type of vessel/cargo, referring to the table on the next page, then
press the ENT key.
Note 1: Only the second digit for the type of vessel is entered here; the first
ipb
digit is entered on the INITIAL SETTINGS menu, during installation.

Note 2: When “Tanker” is selected and the Nav status is “Moored”, output
power is automatically switched to 1 W when SOG is less than 3 knots.
Further, in the above condition, when SOG becomes higher than 3 knots,
Sh
the pop-up message “CHANGE NAV STATUS?” appears and a beep

sounds. (The pop-up message “TX POWER CHANGED” also appears to
notify you that the Tx power has changed). To erase the pop-up message,
press any key or lower SOG below 3 knots.
DA
N
KA
1-9
1. OPERATION
td.
10 FUTURE USE ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE 60 PASSENGER SHIPS ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
11 FUTURE USE CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP( ) 61 PASSENGER SHIPS CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(X)
12 FUTURE USE CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Y) 62 PASSENGER SHIPS CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Y)
13 FUTURE USE CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Z) 63 PASSENGER SHIPS CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Z)
., L
14 FUTURE USE CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(OS) 64 PASSENGER SHIPS CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(OS)
15 FUTURE USE FUTURE USE 65 PASSENGER SHIPS FUTURE USE
19 FUTURE USE NONE 69 PASSENGER SHIPS NONE
20 WIG ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE 70 CARGO SHIPS ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
21 WIG CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(X) 71 CARGO SHIPS CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(X)
22 WIG CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Y) 72 CARGO SHIPS CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Y)
Co
23 WIG CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Z) 73 CARGO SHIPS CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Z)
24 WIG CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(OS) 74 CARGO SHIPS CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(OS)
25 WIG FUTURE USE 75 CARGO SHIPS FUTURE USE
29 WIG NONE 79 CARGO SHIPS NONE
30 FISHING 80 TANKER ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
31 TOWING 81 TANKER CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(X)
ing
32 LENGTH OF THE TOW EXCEEDS 200M OR BREADTH EXCEEDS 25M 82 TANKER CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Y)
33 ENGAGED IN DREDGING OR UNDERWATER OPERATIONS 83 TANKER CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Z)
34 ENGAGED IN DIVING OPERATIONS 84 TANKER CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(OS)
35 ENGAGED IN MILITARY OPER ATIONS 85 TANKER FUTURE USE
36 SAILING 86 TANKER FUTURE USE
37 PLEASURE CRAFT 87 TANKER FUTURE USE
38 FUTURE USE 88 TANKER FUTURE USE
39 FUTURE USE 89 TANKER NONE
uild
40 HSC ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE 90 OTHER TYPE OF SHIP ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
41 HSC CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(X) 91 OTHER TYPE OF SHIP CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(X)
42 HSC CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Y) 92 OTHER TYPE OF SHIP CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Y)
43 HSC CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Z) 93 OTHER TYPE OF SHIP CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(Z )
44 HSC CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(OS) 94 OTHER TYPE OF SHIP CARRYING DG, HS, OR MP(OS)
45 HSC FUTURE USE 95 OTHER TYPE OF SHIP FUTURE USE
ipb
49 HSC NONE 99 OTHER TYPE OF SHIP NONE

50 PILOT
51 SEARCH AND RESCUE VESSELS WIG: Wing in ground
52 TUGS HSC: High speed craft
53 PORT TENDERS DG: Dangerous goods
54 VESSELS WITH ANTI-POLL UTION FACILITIES OR EQUIPMENT HS: Harmful substances
55 LAW ENFORCEMENT VESSELS MP: Marine pollutants
56 SPARE-FOR ASSIGNMENTS TO LOCAL VESSELS 0-9: Undefined
Sh
57 SPARE-FOR ASSIGNMENTS TO LOCAL VESSELS

58 MEDICAL TRANSPORTS
59 SHIPS ACCORDING TO RESOLUTION NO 18
14. Press ► to display the

DRAUGHT&PERSONS sub-menu. [DRAUGHT&PERSONS]
15. DRAUGHT is selected; press the ENT key. DRAUGHT: 0.0 m
DA
16. Enter ship’s draught (setting range: 0-25.5(m)) NO. OF PERSONS: 0

then press the ENT key.
17. NO. OF PERSONS is selected; press the
ENT key.
18. Enter total number of persons onboard
(setting range: 0-8191) then press the ENT
N
key. Enter 8191 for total greater than 8190.

KA
1-10
1. OPERATION
td.
1.6 Setting CPA/TCPA
Set the CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest Point of
Approach) range for which you want to be alerted to AIS targets which can be
., L
on a collision course. When a ship’s CPA and TCPA are lower than that set
here, the buzzer sounds (if active) and the message COLLISION ALARM
appears.
1. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.
Co
2. Select USER SETTINGS then press the ENT key.
3. Select CPA/TCPA ALARM then press the ENT key.
[CPA/TCPA ALARM]
CPA : 6.00 NM
TCPA : 60 min
ALARM MODE : ON
ALARM BUZZER : ON
4.
ing
QUIT[MENU]
CPA is selected; press the ENT key.

uild
5. Enter CPA (setting range: 0-6.00 NM) then press the ENT key.
6. TCPA is selected; press the ENT key.
7. Enter TCPA (setting range: 0-60 min) then press the ENT key.
8. ALARM MODE is selected; press the ENT key.
9. Select ON to activate the CPA/TCPA alarm; OFF to deactivate it. Press the
ENT key.
10. ALARM BUZZER is selected; press the ENT key.
ipb
11. Select ON to enable the CPA/TCPA audio alarm, or OFF to disable it. Press
the ENT key.
Sh
N DA
KA
1-11
1. OPERATION
td.
1.7 Selecting a Display
Use the DISP key to select a display. Each time the key is pressed, the display
changes in the sequence shown below.
., L
PLOTTER DISPLAY
PLOTTER
DISPLAY
(See section 1.7.1.)
Co
TARGET LIST DANGEROUS (TARGET) LIST
(See section 1.7.2. ) DANGEROUS (See section 1.7.3.)
TARGET LIST
LIST When a dangerous target
exists, the dangerous target
Switch between these list has priority.
displays with , .
ing
OWN STATIC OWN STATIC OWN STATIC OWN STATIC OWN STATIC
DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5
OWN SHIP'S STATIC DATA

Switch among these
uild
displays with .
OWN SHIP'S DYNAMIC DATA
OWN DYNAMIC
DATA
ipb
ALARM ALARM STATUS DISPLAY

(See section 3.5.)
STATUS
Sh
N DA
KA
1-12
1. OPERATION
td.
1.7.1 Plotter display
The plotter display, which automatically appears after the power-on sequence,
shows the name, heading, SOG, COG, CPA and TCPA of AIS-equipped ships,
., L
AIS-SARTs, etc. within the range selected. The number of dangerous targets is
also indicated.
Data for ship target

A target marker (hollow triangle) indicates the presence of a vessel equipped
Co
with AIS in a certain location and course. To find detailed information about a
vessel, see section 1.7.2.
If two or more targets occupy a similar position, the display priority order is
selected target, AIS-SART and ship target.
ing
uild
Data for AIS-SART
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-13
1. OPERATION
td.
Operations on the plotter display
1. Press the DISP key to show the plotter display.
2. Use ▼ or ▲ to select the range. The available ranges are (in nm) 0.125,
., L
0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, and 24.
3. To find a target’s data, see section 1.7.2.
Note 1: A target is declared a lost target under the conditions shown in the
table below. A target is erased from the screen 6 minutes and 40 seconds after
it is declared a lost target.
Co
Ship’s navigation status Target declared as
lost target after;
Class A
Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 kn 10 minutes
Ship at anchor or moored and moving at more than 3 kn 50 seconds
0-14 kn speed 50 seconds
ing
0-14 kn speed with course change 50 seconds
14-23 kn speed 30 seconds
14-23 kn speed with course change 30 seconds
Speed higher than 23 kn 10 seconds
Speed higher than 23 kn with course change 10 seconds
uild
Class B
Speed over ground less than 2 kn 10 minutes
Speed over ground 2 kn or higher 150 seconds
Note 2: When a target’s CPA and TCPA are lower than set in section 1.6, the
audio alarm sounds (if active). Press any key to silence the audio alarm. Take
ipb
suitable measures to avoid collision.

Note 3: "DNGR" (DANGER) appears at the end of the HDG line when a
target's CPA and TCPA are lower than the CPA and TCPA alarm settings.
Further, when a target becomes a lost target, “LOST” appears at the end of the
HDG line.
Sh
N DA
KA
1-14
1. OPERATION
td.
1.7.2 Target list (displaying target data)
1. At the plotter display, press the DISP key to show the TARGET LIST, which
lists all AIS targets and AIS-SARTs being detected by the FA-150.
., L
Co
ing
Note 1: The dangerous target list appears when there are dangerous
targets. You can switch to the target list by pressing ◄.
Note 2: If there is no data for the target selected, the message NO SEL
uild
appears. Hit any key to escape.
Note 3: Targets are automatically sorted in range order (closest to furthest)
when no key is operated for 30 seconds. Target order is then updated every
five seconds.
Note 4: When AUTO SORT on the USER SETTINGS menu is OFF, the
range and bearing to a target are updated. However, target order is not
ipb
updated. To do this, press ◄, and targets are sorted in range order. “NOW
SORTING” is shown while sorting.
Note 5: To select a target on the plotter display, press ◄ or ► to select the
target then press the ENT key. Press ► to select from nearest to furthest;
◄ to select from furthest to nearest. The display then looks something like
Sh
the one shown at the top of the next page. If you wish to see other target
data, go to step 3 below.
Note 6: The information source is specified from obtained MMSI and ship's
name of an AIS target.
2. Use ▼ or ▲ to select the target whose data you wish to view then press
the ENT key. The display then looks something like one of the displays
DA
shown on the next several pages, according to type of target.

3. Use ▼ or ▲ to scroll the display to see other data.
N
KA
1-15
1. OPERATION
td.
Ship info display, mobile class A
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-16
1. OPERATION
td.
Ship info display, mobile class B
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-17
1. OPERATION
td.
Base station display
., L
Co
SAR (Search and Rescue) info display
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-18
1. OPERATION
td.
AIS-SART info display
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-19
1. OPERATION
td.
AtoN (Aid to Navigation) info display
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-20
1. OPERATION
td.
The table below shows all the AtoN types and names that may appear on the
AtoN INFO display.
A to N type and name
., L
Type Name of AtoN
0 DEFAULT, TYPE OF A TO N NOT SPECIFIED
1 REFERENCE POINT
2 RACON
Co
3 OFF SHORE STRUCTURE
4 SPARE
5 LIGHT, WITHOUT SECTORS
6 LIGHT, WITH SECTORS
7 LEADING LIGHT FRONT
8 LEADING LIGHT REAR
ing
9 BEACON, CARDINAL N
10 BEACON, CARDINAL E
11 BEACON, CARDINAL S
12 BEACON, CARDINAL W
13 BEACON, PORT HAND
uild
14 BEACON, STARBOARD HAND
15 BEACON, PREFERRED CHANNEL PORT HAND
16 BEACON, PREFERRED CHANNEL STARBOARD HAND
17 BEACON, ISOLATED DANGER
18 BEACON, SAFE WATER
19 BEACON, SPECIAL MARK
ipb
20 CARDINAL MARK N
21 CARDINAL MARK E
22 CARDINAL MARK S
23 CARDINAL MARK W
24 PORT HAND MARK
Sh
25 STARBOARD HAND MARK

26 PREFERRED CHANNEL PORT HAND
27 PREFERRED CHANNEL STARBOARD HAND
28 ISOLATED DANGER
29 SAFE WATER
30 SPECIAL MARK
DA
31 LIGHT VESSEL / LANBY / RIGS

N
KA
1-21
1. OPERATION
td.
1.7.3 Dangerous (target) list
You can easily find dangerous ships whose CPA and TCPA are lower than the
CPA and TCPA alarm settings.
., L
1. At the plotter display, press the DISP key to show the Target List (see
section 1.7.2).
Note 1: If the target list appears, press ► to show the dangerous list.
Note 2: Targets are automatically sorted by TCPA when no key is operated
Co
for 30 seconds. Target order is then updated every five seconds.
2. Press ► to show the Dangerous List.
ing
3. To find detailed information about a dangerous target, use ▼ or ▲ to select
the target then press the ENT key.
uild
4. To change page: ▼ or ► to go forward; ▲ or ◄ to go back.
Note 1: The message “LOST” appears at the top of the Dangerous List when
no AIS signal is received from the target selected.
Note 2: CPA and TCPA are automatically updated when AUTO SORT on the
USER SETTINGS menu is OFF, however target order is not updated. To do
ipb
this, press ◄, and the targets are sorted in TCPA order.

“NOW SORTING” is shown while sorting.
1.7.4 Static data display

Sh
The OWN STATIC DATA display shows, on five pages, your ship’s static data,
which includes MMSI, call sign and name, IMO number, type of ship and
location of position-fixing antenna. This data should be checked once per
voyage or once per month whichever is shorter. Data may be changed only on
the authority of the master.
DA
1. At the plotter display, press the DISP key twice to show “OWN STATIC
DATA”. See the next page.
2. To view other own static data: ▼ or ► to go forward, ▲ or ◄ to go back.
See the illustration on the next page for own ship’s static data examples.
N
KA
1-22
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
1-23
1. OPERATION
td.
1. OPERATION
td.
1.7.5 Dynamic data display
The OWN DYNAMIC DATA display shows your ship’s dynamic data, which
includes time, date, ship’s position, SOG, COG, heading, ROT, position
., L
accuracy, and RAIM use.
The Officer of the Watch should periodically check position, SOG and sensor
information for quality.
At the plotter display, press the DISP key three times to show the OWN
Co
DYNAMIC DATA display.
ing
uild
1.7.6 Alarm status display
The alarm status display shows the date and time alarms were violated. For
further details, see section 3.5.
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-24
1. OPERATION
td.
1.8 Messages
You may send and receive messages via VHF channels , to a specified MMSI
or all AIS-equipped ships in the area. Messages can be sent to warn of safety
., L
of navigation; for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages are also
permitted.
Short safety-related messages are only an additional means to broadcast

safety information. They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS.
Co
When a message is received, the equipment beeps and the indication
“MESSAGE” appears. The contents of the message may be viewed on the RX
log.
1.8.1 Sending a message
ing
2. Use ▼ or ▲ to select MSG then press the ENT key.
[MSG]
CREATE MSG
TX LOG
uild
RX LOG
3. CREATE MSG is selected; press the ENT key. (For Inland AIS, additionally
ipb
select CREATE MSG then press the ENT key.)
[CREATE MSG]
SET MSG TYPE
SET MSG
SEND MSG
Sh
4. SET MSG TYPE is selected; press the ENT key.

DA
[SET MSG TYPE]

ADRS TYPE: BROAD CAST
MMSI :---------
MSG TYPE : NORMAL
CHANNEL: ALTERNATE
RETRY TIMES: -
MMS
N
KA
1-25
1. OPERATION
td.
5. ADRS TYPE is selected; press the ENT key.
BROAD CAST
ADRS CAST
., L
6. Select ADRS CAST to send a message to a specific AIS-equipped ship, or
BROAD CAST to send a message to all AIS-equipped ships within
broadcasting range. Press the ENT key.
7. For BROAD CAST, go to step 8. For ADRS CAST, “MMSI” is selected;
press the ENT key, enter MMSI number of the vessel that you want to
receive your message, then press the ENT key.
Co
8. MSG TYPE is selected; press the ENT key.
SAFETY
NORMAL
9. Select message type: NORMAL (message other than safety) or SAFETY

(important navigational or meteorological warning). Press the ENT key.
ing
10. CHANNEL is selected; press the ENT key.
ALTERNATE
BOTH A & B
A
B
11. Select which channel to transmit your message over then press the ENT
uild
key.
12. RETRY TIMES is selected; press the ENT key. If the ADRS TYPE is
BROADCAST go to step 14.
13. For ADRS CAST, enter the number of times to re-transmit a message (0-3)
14. Press the MENU key to return to the CREATE MSG sub-menu.
ipb
15. Select SET MSG then press the ENT key.
[SET MSG] *: Number of characters available with each message type for
Class A, SOLAS is as follows:
NORMAL message with BROAD-CAST : 156 characters
NORMAL message with ADDRESS-CAST : 151 characters
SAFETY message with BROAD-CAST : 161 characters
Sh
SAFETY message with ADDRESS-CAST : 156 characters
01(151)* [DIM]HOLD:CLEAR
Number of characters used/available

16. Use the CursorPad to enter your message.
17. Press the ENT key to return to the CREATE MSG sub-menu.
DA
18. Select SEND MSG then press the ENT key. The prompt shown below
appears.
SEND MESSAGE.
ARE YOU SURE?

N
YES NO
KA
1-26
1. OPERATION
td.
19. Press ◄ to select YES then press the ENT key to send your message.
Message status is shown as follows:
., L
AIS message status messages and their meanings
Message Meaning
NOW SENDING. Message is being sent.
SEND MESSAGE COMPLETE. Transmission of message completed. (MMSI is
PRESS ANY KEY additionally shown in case of addressed message.)
Co
SEND MESSAGE UNSUCCESSFUL. Message could not be sent.
PRESS ANY KEY
SEND MESSAGE UNSUCCESSFUL. Message sent successfully, however there is no reply
MMSI: XXXXXXXXX from receiver of message.
PRESS ANY KEY
NOW WAITING RESPONSE. You tried to send a message while the transponder is
PRESS ANY KEY awaiting receive confirmation (successful or
ing
unsuccessful) for the first-sent message. After
confirmation is received, the next sequential message
will be sent.
1.8.2 Receiving messages

uild
How to view a received message
When a message is received, the window below appears on the display. To
view the contents of the message follow the procedure below.
MESSAGE !
ipb
PRESS ANY KEY
1. Press any key to erase the message.

2. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
Sh
3. Select MSG then press the ENT key.

4. Select RX LOG then press the ENT key.
[RX LOG]
Date and time 03/MAY 13:25 NEW
message received [UTC] FROM: 4310199111 MMSI of sender
("NEW" displayed for 28/MAR 03:43
DA
unread message) [UTC] FROM: 431099111

22/MAR 18:00
[UTC] FROM: 431099111
1/3[ ] MSG[ENT] QUIT[MENU]
N
KA
1-27
1. OPERATION
td.
5. To view the contents of a message, select the message then press the ENT
key. Below is an example of a received message.
[RX ADDRESSED MSG]*
., L
I HAVE CHANGED MY
COURSE TO 350 DEGREE.
QUIT[MENU]
Co
*RX BROADCAST MSG for
received broadcast message
6. Press the DISP key to close the log.
Automatically displaying incoming messages

You can display incoming messages automatically as follows:
ing
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
[USER SETTINGS]
KEY BEEP : ON
uild
ALARM BUZZER : ON
AUTO SORT : ON
DISP SART TEST : ON
LR MODE : AUTO
RECEIVED MSG
CPA/TCPA ALARM
ipb
3. Select RECEIVED MSG, then press the ENT key.
[RECEIVED MSG]
POPUP : ALL
BUZZER : ON
Sh
4. Select POPUP, then press the ENT key ALL

5. Select which category of receive message to ABM
DA
display automatically then press the ENT key. OFF
ALL: Display any message upon receipt.

ABM: Display only addressed binary messages, upon their receipt.
OFF: Disable automatic displaying of incoming messages.
6. To get an audio alert when the message type selected at step 5 is received,
N
set "BUZZER" to ON.

KA
1-28
1. OPERATION
td.
1.8.3 TX and RX message logs
The FA-150 stores the latest 20 each of transmitted and received messages in
respective message logs. When a log becomes full, the oldest message in the
., L
log is automatically deleted to make room for the latest.
When you receive a message, a popup shows MESSAGE! To display a

message log, do the following:
Co
3. Select TX LOG or RX LOG as appropriate then press the ENT key. Below
is an example of the TX log. For the appearance of the RX log, see section
1.8.2.
[TX LOG]
Date and time message 31/APR 13:25 OK
ing
transmitted, message status [UTC] TO: 431099111 Time transmitted, addressee
OK: Message transmitted 27/MAR 03:43 OK
successfully [UTC] TO: 431099111
FAIL: Message could not 19/MAR 18:00 OK
be transmitted [UTC] TO: 431099111
- - - -: Waiting for results
uild
4. To view the contents of a message, select it with ▼ or ▲ then press the
ENT key. Below is an example of a transmitted message. For an example
of a received message, see section 1.8.2.
[TX ADDRESSED MSG]*

CHANGE YOUR COURSE TO
350 DEGREE.
ipb
QUIT[MENU]
Sh
*TX BROADCAST MSG for

transmitted broadcast message
5. Press the DISP key to close the log.

N DA
KA
1-29
1. OPERATION
td.
1.9 Regional Operating Channels
AIS operates primarily on two dedicated VHF channels, CH 2087 and CH2088.
Where these channels are not available regionally, the AIS is capable of being
., L
automatically switched to designated alternate channels by means of a
message from a shore facility. Where no shore based AIS or GMDSS sea area
A1 station is in place, the AIS should be switched manually as in section 1.9.2.
A regional operating area is set with the procedure shown below. The most
Co
recent eight areas are memorized.
• Automatic setting of VHF DSC (channel 70) from shore-based AIS
• Automatic setting by AIS message from shore-based AIS
• Setting by shipboard system such as ECDIS
• Manual setting
The default area is as follows:
ing
• Tx power: 12.5 W
• Channel no. 2087, 2088
• Frequency bandwidth: 25 kHz
• Tx/Rx mode: Tx/Rx
uild
1.9.1 Viewing channels, Tx power
Do the following to view current channels.

2. Select CHANNEL SETTINGS then press the ENT key.
ipb
[CHANNEL SETTINGS]
VIEW CHANNEL
EDIT CHANNEL
Sh
QUIT[MENU]
3. Select VIEW CHANNEL then press the ENT key.

[VIEW CHANNEL]
Power POWER : 12.5W
DA
Channel CHANNEL NO.

CH-A: 2087
CH-B: 2088
QUIT[MENU]
4. Press the DISP key to close the display.

N
KA
1-30
1. OPERATION
td.
1.9.2 Displaying, editing regional operating area status
You may display the status of regional operating areas currently memorized in
the equipment. Nine of any combination of AIS message from shore-based AIS,
., L
DSC message, manual settings and commands from ECDIS or a PC may be
registered and one will be HIGH SEA.
About registering areas

• AIS and DSC messages registered within last two hours cannot be edited.
Co
• An item labeled HIGH SEA cannot be registered. (“HIGH SEA” are data used
for international waters not controlled by shore-based AIS.)
• If two areas overlap one another the older data is deleted.
• Data older than five weeks is deleted.
• Area data is deleted when it is more than 500 miles from the area for which it
was registered.
ing
2. Select CHANNEL SETTINGS then press the ENT key.
3. Select EDIT CHANNEL then press the ENT key.
[EDIT CHANNEL]
uild
SELECT NO. : 0
TIME [UTC]
- -/- - - - -: - -: - -
FROM
MMSI: - - - - - - - - -
TYPE: MANUAL
QUIT [MENU] EDIT[ENT]
ipb
SELECT NO.: File number, 0-9. In order of distance from own ship,
from closest to furthest.
TIME: Data and time equipment controlled by external source.
Sh
MMSI: MMSI displayed for control by DSC or shore-based AIS.

Dashes or “EMPTY” (no data) otherwise.
TYPE: How channel is controlled: AIS, AIS message; HIGH SEA

(for reference setting), PI, ECDIS or PC; DSC, DSC;
MANUAL, manual control
DA
Note: MMSI and TYPE must be set to other than “HIGH SEA” to edit.
4. Select desired file number from SELECT NO.
N
KA
1-31
1. OPERATION
td.
5. Press the ENT key to show details.
[EDIT CHANNEL] 1/2

FROM MMSI: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
., L
POWER : 12.5W
CH NO. CH-A: 2087
CH-B: 2088
MODE CH-A: TX/RX
CH-B: TX/RX
ZONE: 1NM
Co
6. POWER is selected; press the ENT key to show the channel power
options.
1W
12.5W
7. Select power desired then press the ENT key.
ing
8. CH NO. CH-A is selected; press the ENT key.
9. Select channel number for CH-A then press the ENT key.
10. CH NO. CH-B is selected; press the ENT key.
11. Select channel number for CH-B then press the ENT key.
12. MODE CH-A is selected; press the ENT key.
uild
TX/RX
RX
UNUSED
13. Select desired mode for CH-A then press the ENT key.
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6
ipb
CH-A TX/RX TX/RX RX RX RX UNUSED

CH-B TX/RX RX TX/RX RX UNUSED RX
14. MODE CH-B is selected; press the ENT key.
15. Select desired mode for CH-B then press the ENT key.
16. ZONE is selected; press the ENT key.
Sh
17. Key in the zone distance then press the ENT key. (The setting range is 1 to
8 (nm)).
18. Use ▼ or ▲ to show page 2 of the [EDIT CHANNEL] sub-menu.
[EDIT CHANNEL] 2/2

CH AREA
RIGHT TOP
DA
LAT: 0°00.0'N
LON: 0°00.0'E
LEFT BOTTOM
LAT: 0°00.0'N
LON: 0°00.0'E
19. LAT of RIGHT TOP is selected; press the ENT key. Enter latitude for the
N
right-top position (northeast point) of the AIS operating area then press the
ENT key.
KA
1-32
1. OPERATION
td.
20. LON of RIGHT TOP is selected; press the ENT key. Enter longitude for the
right-top position (northeast point) of the AIS operating area then press the
ENT key.
21. LAT of LEFT BOTTOM is selected; press the ENT key. Enter latitude for the
., L
left-bottom position (southwest point) of the AIS operating area then press
the ENT key.
22. LON of LEFT BOTTOM is selected; press the ENT key. Enter longitude for
the left-bottom position (southeast point) of the AIS operating area then
press the ENT key.
Co
Note: The available range is 20-200 nm. If the area contains overlapping
data the older data will be erased.
20-200 nm
RIGHT-TOP
20-200 nm
LEFT-BOTTOM ing ZONE

1-8 nm
uild
23. Press the MENU key. The prompt shown below appears.
SAVE CHANNEL.
ARE YOU SURE?

YES NO
ipb
24. Press ◄ to select YES then press the ENT key.

Note: If a combination other than that shown in the table at step 13 is
selected, the message “ILLEGAL MODE WAS SELECTED PRESS ANY
KEY.” appears.
Sh
Note: If you enter invalid data, the message “OUT OF RANGE!: OO” appears.
Press any key to escape. Reenter data.
DA
N
KA
1-33
1. OPERATION
td.
1.10 Enabling/Disabling Alarm Buzzer, Key Beep
You may turn on or off the buzzers that sound for alarms or incoming
messages. Further, you may turn off the beep, which sounds for valid key input.
., L
Note that the alarm buzzer is not related to a radar or ECDIS alarm.

Co
[USER SETTINGS]
KEY BEEP : ON
ALARM BUZZER : ON
AUTO SORT : ON
DISP SART TEST : ON
LR MODE : AUTO
RECEIVED MSG
CPA/TCPA ALARM
ing
3. Select KEY BEEP or ALARM BUZZER as appropriate then press the ENT
key.
4. Select ON or OFF as appropriate then press the ENT key.
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-34
1. OPERATION
td.
1.11 Long Range Mode
The long range mode sets how to reply to a request for own ship data from a
distant station, for example, Inmarsat C station. You may reply automatically or
., L
manually.

Co
[USER SETTINGS]
KEY BEEP : ON
ALARM BUZZER : ON
AUTO SORT : ON
DISP SART TEST : ON
LR MODE : AUTO
RECEIVED MSG
CPA/TCPA ALARM
ing
3. Select LR MODE then press the ENT key.
AUTO
MANUAL
4. Select AUTO (auto reply) or MANUAL (manual reply) as appropriate then

uild
press the ENT key.
Manual reply
For manual reply, the requesting ship's MMSI, name and information requested
ipb
(code, see next page) appear. Press the ENT key to send the data, or press
any key other than ENT to send no data. The screen then changes according
to your selection.
[RECEIVED LR] [LR RESPONSE]

MMSI: 431456789 MMSI: 431456789
Sh
NAME: FURUNO NAME: FURUNO

Press key
Information C C
requested RESPONSE?
(See table YES: [ENT] NO: OTHER PRESS ANY KEY
on next page.)
NDA
KA
1-35
1. OPERATION
td.
Automatic reply
For automatic reply, the message below appears when a request for own ship
data arrives from a distant station. Requested data is automatically transmitted.
., L
Press the ENT key to erase the message.
[LR RESPONSE]
MMSI: 431456789
NAME: FURUNO
Co
PRESS ANY KEY
Codes used in long range messages
Code Meaning
A Ship name, call sign, IMO number
ing
B Date message created
C Position
E Course over ground
F Speed over ground
uild
I Waypoint, ETA
O Draft
P Ship type, Load
U Ship length, width, type
W Number of crew
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-36
1. OPERATION
td.
1.12 Viewing Initial Settings
The INITIAL SETTINGS menu, which is locked with a password, is where the
installer enters ship’s MMSI, internal and external antenna positions, ship type
., L
and I/O port settings. You can view the settings on this menu as follows.
1. Press the MENU to open the menu.

2. Select INITIAL SETTINGS then press the ENT key.
3. Press the ENT key twice.
Co
4. Select item to view then press the ENT key.
[VIEW MMSI]
MMSI : 999999999
NAME : FURUNO
CALL SIGN: FQC3544

IMO NO. : 009999999
ing
QUIT [MENU]
[VIEW INT ANT POSN]

[INITIAL SETTINGS]
VIEW MMSI
VIEW INT ANT POSN A: 45m
VIEW EXT ANT POSN A B: 15m
uild
VIEW SHIP TYPE C: 8m
B
VIEW I/O PORT D: 7m
C D
QUIT[MENU]
QUIT [MENU]
[VIEW EXT ANT POSN]
A: 45m
ipb
A B: 15m
C: 8m
B
D: 7m
C D
QUIT[MENU]
[VIEW SHIP TYPE]

Sh
TYPE NO.: 0
***TYPE DETAIL*****
NOT AVAILABLE
QUIT [MENU]
DA
[VIEW I/O PORT]

Choose port to view and VIEW COM PORT
press the [ENT] key. VIEW PC PORT
VIEW LAN PORT*1
VIEW PRIORITY
*1 Shown when optional LAN VIEW QUALITY*2
kit is installed.
*2 Shown with Inland AIS.
N
QUIT [MENU]
KA
1-37
1. OPERATION
td.
.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1-38
td.
2. INLAND AIS OPERATION
., L
This section provides the operating procedures for the Inland AIS feature,
which allows use of the AIS transponder on inland waterways or the open sea.
Only those procedures that are different from the Class A AIS transponder are
presented.
Co
Ships with Inland AIS transponders on board autonomously determine their
actual position using the Global Positioning System (GPS), which is part of the
AIS transponder. Furthermore they broadcast their ID and position to other
ships over a distance of 10 to 30 kilometers (depending on the geographical
environment). Other ships in the area receive this information and are able to
display their own position and that of other ships. Inland AIS helps the skipper
in his direct nautical decisions, especially in critical situations, like the approach
ing
of a bend or a constriction.
Further, authorities have the possibility to allow electronic submission of cargo

lists e.g. for transports of dangerous cargo. The standard for “Electronic
Reporting” (ERI) allows the digital, language independent submission of cargo
uild
or passenger reports from ships or agencies to authorities. In combination with
electronic data exchange between the authorities of different countries this
results in less reporting for the skippers. On the other hand all cargo
information is available to authorities in case of an accident.
ipb
2.1 Activating the Inland AIS

Enter your key number (received from dealer) to activate the Inland AIS. (If the
key was entered during the installation, entry is not necessary.)

Sh
2. Select DIAGNOSTICS then press the ENT key.

3. Select ACTIVATE KEY then press the ENT key.
[ACTIVATE KEY]
DEVICE ID
XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
KEY
- - -
DA
QUIT[MENU]
4. Press the ENT key, enter your activation key then press the ENT key.
5. Press the MENU key to quit.
N
If you entered the activation key correctly, the indication "ACTIVATED!"

appears then the system is automatically restarted. Start up with the SOLAS
KA
mode active.
2-1
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2.2 Selecting AIS Mode
The Inland AIS has two operating modes: Inland (inland waterways) and
SOLAS (SOLAS compliant class A AIS transponder). Select desired mode as
., L
follows:
1. Press the NAV STATUS key to open the NAV STATUS menu.
[NAV STATUS]
NAV STATUS: 15
Co
AIS MODE: SOLAS
***STATUS DETAIL***
NOT DEFINED
(DEFAULT)
ing
2. Push ▼ to select AIS MODE then press the ENT key.
SOLASRX
INLAND
3. Select SOLAS or INLAND as appropriate then press the ENT key.

uild
You are asked if you are sure to reboot the system. Select YES then press the
ENT key to reboot.
Notes on Inland AIS operation

ipb
• IMO NO. is transmitted with all zeroes.

• The draught used in Inland AIS is "Inland draught".
• The number of characters for a text message is as follows
NORMAL MSG with BROAD-CAST: Solas, 156, Inland, 86
NORMAL MSG with ADDRESS-CAST: Solas, 151, Inland, 80
Sh
SAFETY MSG with BROAD-CAST: Solas, 161, Inland, 90

SAFETY MSG with ADDRESS-CAST: Solas, 156, Inland, 85
N DA
KA
2-2
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2.3 Entering Voyage-Related Data
Before you embark on a voyage using Inland AIS, set the various voyage
related data (see the list below) on the NAV STATUS menu.
., L
• Destination • No. of persons
• Arrival time • Length and beam of ship
• Draught • Dynamic information rate
• Cargo type • Hazardous cargo
Co
• ERI code • Ship loading status
1. Press the NAV STATUS key.
[NAV STATUS]
NAV STATUS: 0
ing
AIS MODE: INLAND
***STATUS DETAIL***
UNDER WAY USING
ENGINE
uild
2. Press ► to show the DESTINATION sub-menu.
[DESTINATION]
[DESTINATION}
*************(0/0)
[NEW?]
ipb
3. NEW is selected; press the ENT key.

Sh
[DESTINATION]
ENTER A NEW
DESTINATION
DA
QUIT:[NAV STATUS]
N
KA
2-3
2. INLAND AIS
td.
4. Press the ENT key. Enter destination then press the ENT key. You can use
up to 20 alphanumeric characters, and enter 20 destinations. (For how to
enter alphanumeric characters, see “Entering alphanumeric data” on page
1-6.)
., L
Note 1: Each of the characters shown below counts as three characters.
! $ * , \
Note 2: Destinations can be selected, edited and deleted from the
DESTINATION sub-menu. See section 1.5.
Co
5. Press ► to show the ARRIVAL TIME sub-menu.
[ARRIVAL TIME]
DATE [UTC]: - -/- - -
TIME[UTC]: - -*- -
6.
7.
ing
DATE[UTC] is selected; press the ENT key.
Enter the date of arrival then press the ENT key.
uild
9. Enter the estimated time of arrival then press the ENT key. Use 24-hour
notation.
10. Press ► to show the DRAUGHT sub-menu.
[DRAUGHT]
SOLAS DRAUGHT: 0.0 m
ipb
INLAND DRAUGHT:
0.00m
Sh
11 SOLAS DRAUGHT is selected; press the ENT key.

12. Enter SOLAS draught (tenths place resolution) then press the ENT key. The
13. INLAND DRAUGHT is selected; press the ENT key.
14.Enter inland draught (hundredths place resolution) then press the ENT key.
15. Press ► to show the CARGO TYPE sub-menu.
DA
[CARGO TYPE]
TYPE NO.: 00
**** TYPE DETAIL****

NOT AVAILABLE
N
16. TYPE NO. is selected; press the ENT key.

KA
2-4
2. INLAND AIS
td.
17. Select type of vessel/cargo, referring to the table on page 1-10, then press
the ENT key.
Note 1: Only the second digit for the type of vessel is entered here; the first
., L
digit is entered on the initial settings menu, during installation.
Note 2: When “Tanker” is selected and the Nav status is “Moored”, output
power is automatically switched to 1 W when the SOG is less than 3 knots.
Further, in the above condition, when the SOG becomes higher than 3
knots, the pop-up message “CHANGE NAV STATUS?” appears and a beep
Co
sounds. (The pop-up message “TX POWER CHANGED” also appears to
notify you that the Tx power has changed). To erase the pop-up message,
press any key or lower the SOG below 3 knots.
18. Press ► to go to the ERI CODE sub-menu.
[ERI CODE]
ERI CODE: 8000
ing
****CODE DETAIL****
VESSEL,
TYPE UNKNOWN
uild
19. ERI CODE is selected; press the ENT key.
20. Enter four-digit ERI code (type of ship), referring to the ERI code table in
the Appendix, then press the ENT key.
21. Press ► to go to the NO. OF PERSONS sub-menu.
ipb
[NO. OF PERSONS]
CREW: ___
PASSENGER: _ _ __
SHIPBOARD PERSONNEL
___
NO. OF PERSONS: 0
Sh
22. CREW is selected; press the ENT key.

23. Enter number of crew (0-254) then press the ENT key.
24. PASSENGER is selected; press the ENT key.
25. Enter number of passengers (0-8191) then press the ENT key. Enter "8191"
DA
if the total number of passengers is more than 8190.

26. SHIPBOARD PERSONNEL is selected; press the ENT key.
27. Enter number of shipboard personnel (persons other than passengers and
crew, 0-254) then press the ENT key.
Note: Crew, passenger and shipboard personnel are sent in RFM55
N
messages.
28.NO. OF PERSONS is selected; press the ENT key.
KA
2-5
2. INLAND AIS
td.
29. Enter the total number of persons (sum of crew, passengers and shipboard
personnel) onboard then press the ENT key.
Note: NO. OF PERSONS is sent in IFM16 messages.
., L
30. Press ► to go to the LENGTH&BEAM sub-menu.
[LENGTH&BEAM] WX
LENGTH OF SHIP
0.0 m
BEAM OF SHIP: 0.0 m
Co
31. Enter the length and beam of your ship, pressing the ENT key after entering
each item. (If LENGTH OF SHIP is more than three meters greater than the
ing
LENGTH OF CONVOY (A+B total for INT ANT POSN or EXT ANT POSN),
the message "DIFFERENT FROM ANT POSN VALUE" appears. The same
message also appears when the value for BEAM OF SHIP is more than
three meters greater than the total for the BEAM OF CONVOY (C+D ANT
POSN.)
32. Press ► to go to the OTHER sub-menu.
uild
[OTHER] W
DYNAMIC INFORMATION
RATE: AUTO
HAZARDOUS CARGO:
UNKNOWN
UN/LOADED: UNKNOWN
ipb
33. DYNAMIC INFORMATION RATE is selected; press the ENT key. If the
report rate from a base station is used, this setting is ignored. For that
Sh
reason, this setting is not always the same as the actual report rate, which
appears on page 2/2 of the DYNAMIC DATA screens.
DA
34. Select AUTO, 10S, 5S or 2S as appropriate then press the ENT key.
Note 1: This setting is fixed to AUTO in the SOLAS mode.
Note 2: The new rate takes effect in 4-8 minutes. In the meantime the rate
is AUTO, regardless of the indication.
N
KA
2-6
2. INLAND AIS
td.
35. HAZARDOUS CARGO is selected; press the ENT key.
NUMBER OF CONES 0
NUMBER OF CONES 1
., L
NUMBER OF CONES 2
NUMBER OF CONES 3
B-FLAG
UNKNOWN
36. If your ship is carrying hazardous cargo, "cones" (max. 3) have to be shown
on the mast, in daylight with cones and nighttime with blue lights. The
Co
greater the number of the cones the more hazardous the cargo. Select
"NUMBER OF CONES 0" if your ship is not carrying hazardous cargo.
Select B-FLAG if your ship carries explosives or hazardous cargo that
exceeds the hazard level expressed with cones. Select UNKNOWN if you
are unsure of cargo type.
37. Press the ENT key.
ing
38. UN/LOADED is selected; press the ENT key.
UNKNOWN
LOADED
UNLOADED
39. Select LOADED for vessel loaded with cargo, UNLOADED for vessel with
uild
no cargo, or UNKNOWN if you are unsure of the loading status.
40. Press the ENT key.
ipb
Sh
DA
N
KA
2-7
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2.4 Static Data
The STATIC DATA display shows various navigation data such as your MMSI
no., ship name, etc. This data should be checked once per voyage or once per
., L
month whichever is shorter. Data may be changed only on the authority of the
master. To show your static data, press the DISP key twice at the plotter
display to show “OWN STATIC DATA”. Use ▼ or ► to go forward, ▲ or ◄ to
go back.
[STATIC DATA] 1/9
Co
MMSI : 123456789 MMSI no.
NAME : FURUNO Name of ship
VOYAGER
CALL SIGN: ZL6DEF1 Call sign
IMO NO. : 9241062* IMO no.
ENI : 1654321 ENI no.
AIS MODE : SOLAS AIS mode
* All zeroes (0) are transmitted when
ing
the Inland AIS mode is active.
[STATIC DATA] 2/9

SOLAS DESTINATION: Destination
* * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * *
MAINZ
uild
ETA: 15/JUL 11:22 UTC Estimated date of arrival,
estimated time of arrival
ipb
[STATIC DATA] 3/9

INLAND DESTINATION Destination type
COUNTRY CODE : DE Country code no.
LOCATION CODE : MAI Location code no.
FAIRWAY NO. : 03901 Fairway section no.
TERMINAL CODE : 00FRB Terminal code no.
Sh
FAIRWAY HECT : 00000 Fairway hectometre no.

ETA: 15/JUL 11:22 UTC Estimated date of arrival,
estimated time of arrival
[STATIC DATA] 4/9

NAV STATUS: 15 Navigation status no.
DA
UN/LOADED: UNLOADED Cargo status, unloaded, loaded, or unknown

***STATUS DETAIL*** Navigation status description
NOT DEFINED
(DEFAULT)
N

KA
2-8
KA
N DA
Sh
ipb
uild
ing
Co
., L
2-9
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2.5 Dynamic Data
The DYNAMIC DATA display shows your ship’s dynamic data, which includes
date, time, ship’s position, etc. To show these displays, press the DISP key
., L
three times at the plotter display.
The Officer of the Watch should periodically check position, speed over ground
and sensor information for quality.
* If no ROT device is connected and HDG
Co
[DYNAMIC DATA] 1/2
Date DATE: 10/APR/2008 sentence is input from a gyrocompass, etc.,
Time TIME: 13:24:55 UTC the following is displayed:
Latitude LAT : 51°55.0213'N
Longitude LON : 4°30.0012'E Rate of turn less than 10°/min.: 0.0
Speed over ground SOG: 8.1kn Rate of turn 10°/min. rightward or higher: R>10
Course over ground, Heading COG: 118.5° HDG:118° Rate of turn 10°/min. leftward or higher: L>10
Rate of turn ROT: R10.3°/min*
ing
[DYNAMIC DATA] 2/2
SENSOR: EXTERNAL GPS Navigator (EXTERNAL GPS, INTERNAL
RAIM: USED GPS, EXTERNAL DGPS, INTERNAL DGPS, NO FIX)
POSITION ACCURACY Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
uild
HIGH (USED or UNUSED)
DYNAMIC INFORMATION Position accuracy (HIGH or LOW)
REPORT RATE: 3.3SEC Report rate for dynamic information
BLUE SIGN: YES Blue sign presence (YES or NO)
( "---" if BLUE SIGN on the INITIAL
SETTINGS menu is "NOT AVAILABLE", or
the SOLAS mode is in use.)
ipb
Update rate of dynamic ship information
Ship’s dynamic conditions and nominal reporting interval
Ship’s dynamic conditions Nominal reporting interval

Ship at anchor and not moving faster than 3 kn 3 minutes
Sh
Ship at anchor and moving faster than 3 kn 10 seconds

Ship operating in SOLAS mode, moving 0-14 kn 10 seconds
Ship operating in SOLAS mode, moving 0-14 kn 3 1/3 seconds
speed and changing course
DA
and changing course

Ship operating in SOLAS mode, moving faster 2 seconds
than 23 kn
Ship operating in SOLAS mode, moving faster 2 seconds
than 23 kn and changing course
Ship operating in inland waterway mode Assigned between 2 seconds
N
and 10 minutes
KA
2-10
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2.6 Details Ship Display (Mobile Class A)
See section 1.7.2 for how to show this display.
., L
[SHIP INFO] 1/9
MMSI [A] : 431099806 MMSI no. "DNGR" (DANGER) appears
NAME : FURUNO* Name of (in reverse video) when a
ship target's CPA and TCPA
CALL SIGN : ZL6DEF1*1 Call sign are lower than the CPA/TCPA
IMO NO. : 9241062 IMO no. setting.
ENI : 1654321*1, *2 ENI no. "LOST" appears (in reverse video)
Co
BLUE SIGN: YES when signal from a target is lost.
Blue sign
Six minutes and 40 seconds after
presence,
loss of signal the target's data is erased.
absence
*1 If any of these contain an "@" it is
replaced with a space.
[SHIP INFO] 2/9
LAT : 51°55.0213'N Latitude
LON : 4°30.0012'E Longitude
SOG : 17.8kn Speed over ground
ing
COG : 213.5° Course over ground
HDG : 278° PA: H Heading, Position Accuracy (H, High, L, Low)
R/B : 25.12 NM/351.5° Range and bearing from own ship
ROT : 0.1°/min Rate of turn
*2 The ENI (European Number of

Identification) is an unique vessel
uild
identification number of barges,
[SHIP INFO] 3/9 passenger ships and tugboats on
CPA : 0.12NM European inland waters.
CPA
TCPA : 0'23" TCPA
NAV STATUS: 10 Navigation status
***STATUS DETAIL*** Navigation status details
RESERVED FOR
WING IN GROUND
(WING)
ipb
[SHIP INFO] 4/9

SOLAS DRAUGHT: 10.0m SOLAS draught
INLAND DRAUGHT Inland draught
Sh
10.00m
ANT LENGTH A : 75m Antenna position A
ANT LENGTH B : 20m Antenna position B
ANT LENGTH C : 15m Antenna position C
ANT LENGTH D : 15m Antenna position D
DA
[SHIP INFO] 5/9

LEN[SHIP]: 95.0m Length of ship
BEAM[SHIP]: 30.0m Beam of ship
LEN[CONVOY]: 95m Length of convoy
BEAM[CONVOY]: 30m Beam of convoy
HAZARDOUS CARGO Hazardous cargo status
NUMBER OF CONES 1 (number of cones (0-3), blue sign, unknown)
N
UN/LOADED: UNLOADED Vessel loading status

(loaded, unloaded, unknown)
KA
2-11
2. INLAND AIS
td.
(Continued from previous page)
[SHIP INFO] 6/9
TYPE OF SHIP: 71 Type of ship
., L
***TYPE DETAIL*** Type of ship details
FUTURE USE
CARGO SHIP
CARRYING
DG, HS, OR MP(X)
Co
[SHIP INFO] 7/9
ERI CODE: 8080 ERI code no.
**CODE DETAIL***
MOTOR FREIGHTER
WITH TANKER
[SHIP INFO]
SENSOR QUALITY
SPEED:
8/9
HIGH ing
Quality of speed data (HIGH, LOW)
uild
COURSE: LOW Quality of course data (HIGH, LOW)
HEADING: HIGH Quality of heading data (HIGH, LOW)
DESTINATION Destination
ROTTERDAM
ETA: 15/JUL 17:21 UTC
ipb
[SHIP INFO] 9/9

CREW: 10 No. of crew
PASSENGER: 100 No. of passengers
SHIPBOARD PERSONNEL No. of shipboard personnel
20
NO. OF PERSONS: 130 No. of persons in total
Sh
Note 1: BLUE SIGN information (contained in message type 1) is displayed

when the FA-150 receives an RFM10* message type 6 (inland ship and voyage
related data) or type 8 (safety-related message). When this happens, "BLUE
SIGN" appears on page 1/9 of the DETAILS SHIP displays. If the target
becomes lost but later is re-detected, the target is treated as a mobile station
DA
class A AIS target until BLUE SIGN information is again received.

* RFM=Regional Function Message
Note 2: A target detected as Inland AIS remains as such once information from
the target is received, regardless of any subsequent AIS mode changes.
Note 3: If a ship changes its mode from CLASS B SO Inland AIS to CLASS B
N
SO, the Inland AIS information is erased and replaced with CLASS B SO
information.
KA
2-12
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2.7 Inland AIS Specific Messaging
2.7.1 Text message
., L
[MSG]
TEXT
ETA/RTA
Co
NO. OF PERSONS
EMMA WARNING
WATER LEVEL
3. TEXT is selected; press the ENT key.
ing
[TEXT]
CREATE MSG
TX LOG
RX LOG
uild
4. CREATE MSG is selected; press the ENT key.
[CREATE MSG]
ipb
SET MSG TYPEE

SET MSG
SEND MSG
Sh
[SET MSG TYPE]

MMSI :---------
MSG TYPE: SAFETY
DA
CHANNEL: ALTERNATE
RETRY TIMES: -
MMS
6. ADRS TYPE line is selected; press the ENT key.

N
BROAD CAST
ADRS CAST
KA
2-13
2. INLAND AIS
td.
7. Select ADRS CAST to send a message to a specific AIS-equipped ship, or
BROAD CAST to send a message to all AIS-equipped ships within
broadcasting range of your ship. Press the ENT key. For ADRS CAST,
select MMSI then enter MMSI no.
., L
8. Select MSG TYPE then press the ENT key.
SAFETY
NORMAL
9. Select message type: NORMAL (message other than safety) or SAFETY

(important navigational or meteorological warning). Press the ENT key.
Co
ALTERNATE
BOTH A & B
A
B
11 Select which channel to transmit your message over then press the ENT
ing
key.
12. RETRY TIMES is selected; press the ENT key. If the ADRS TYPE is
BROAD CAST go to step 13. For ADRS CAST, enter the number of times to
re-transmit a message (0-3) then press the ENT key.
uild
14. Select SET MSG then press the ENT key.
[SET MSG] *: Number of characters available with each message type for
Inland AIS is as follows:
NORMAL message with BROAD-CAST : 86 characters
NORMAL message with ADDRESS-CAST : 80 characters
SAFETY message with BROAD-CAST : 90 characters
SAFETY message with ADDRESS-CAST : 85 characters
ipb
1( 90)* [DIM]HOLD:CLEAR
Number of characters used/available

SET MSG screen
15.Use the CursorPad to enter your message.
Sh
17. Select SEND MSG then press the ENT key. The prompt shown below
appears.
SEND MESSAGE.
ARE YOU SURE?

DA
YES NO
18. Press ◄ to select YES then press the ENT key to send your message.
N
KA
2-14
2. INLAND AIS
td.
Message status is shown as follows:
AIS message status messages and their meanings
., L
Message Meaning
NOW SENDING. Message is being sent.
SEND MESSAGE COMPLETE. Transmission of message completed. (MMSI is
PRESS ANY KEY. additionally shown in case of addressed message.)
SEND MESSAGE UNSUCCESSFUL. Message could not be sent.
PRESS ANY KEY
Co
SEND MESSAGE UNSUCCESSFUL. Message sent successfully, however there is no reply
MMSI: XXXXXXXXX from receiver of message.
PRESS ANY KEY.
NOW WAITING RESPONSE. You tried to send a message while the transponder is
PRESS ANY KEY. awaiting receive confirmation (successful or
unsuccessful) for the first-sent message. After
confirmation is received, the next sequential message
ing
will be sent.
2.7.2 ETA and RTA messages

The purpose of an ETA message is to apply for a time slot at a lock, bridge or
uild
terminal. (Hereafter "lock" refers to lock, bridge or terminal.) The message
contains your ship's ETA at the lock, air draught, the number of assisting
tugboats required and the particulars of the lock (country code, location code,
etc.).
Upon receipt of your ETA message, the lock authority responds with an RTA
(Requested Time of Arrival) message, usually within 15 minutes of receipt of
ipb
the ETA message. The RTA message contains lock operational status,
requested time of arrival and the particulars of the lock (country code, location
code, etc.).
Sending an ETA message

Sh

[MSG]
TEXT
ETA/RTA
DA
NO. OF PERSONS
EMMA WARNING
WATER LEVEL
N
KA
2-15
2. INLAND AIS
td.
3. Select ETA/RTA then press the ENT key.
[ETA/RTA]
CREATE MSG
., L
ETA LOG
RTA LOG
Co
[CREATE MSG]
SET MSG TYPEE
SET DESTINATION
SET ETA
SEND MSG
ing
uild
[SET MSG TYPE]
MMSI : 000000000
CHANNEL: ALTERNATE
RETRY TIMES: 3
MMS
ipb
6. MMSI is selected; press the ENT key.

7. Enter the MMSI of the lock/bridge/terminal you want to pass through then
press the ENT key.
Sh

ALTERNATE
BOTH A & B
A
B
9. Select the channel over which to send the message then press the ENT
key.
DA
10. RETRY TIMES is selected; press the ENT key.

11. Enter the number of times to re-send the message (if the first transmission
is unsuccessful) then press the ENT key. An ETA message can be resent a
maximum of three times.
12. Press the MENU key to return to the CREATE MSG menu.
N
KA
2-16
2. INLAND AIS
td.
13. Select SET DESTINATION then press the ENT key.
[SET DESTINATION]
., L
* * * * * * * * * * * * * (0/0)
[NEW?]
(If you have entered some
destinations, they appear here.)
Co
14. NEW is selected. If your destination is shown on screen, select it, press the
ENT key then go to step 18. To enter a new destination, go to step 15.
15. With NEW selected, press the ENT key.
[SET DESTINATION]
ENTER A NEW DEST
ing
COUNTRY CODE: UN country code, two 6 bit characters
LOCATION CODE: UN location code, three 6 bit characters
FAIRWAY NO. : 00000 Fairway section no., five 6 bit characters
TERMINAL CODE: Terminal code, five 6 bit characters
FAIRWAY HECT: 00000 Fairway hectometre, five 6 bit characters
QUIT: [MENU]
uild
16. COUNTRY CODE is selected; press the ENT key. Enter the UN country
code of your destination, referring to ISO 3166, then press the ENT key.
17. Enter location code, fairway no., terminal code, and fairway hectometre,
referring to the ERI (Electronic Reporting International) Guide Part IV
Annex 2 for examples.
ipb
Note: To see the results of an entry, show the SET DESTINATION screen.
[SET DESTINATION]
* * * * * * * * * * * * * (0/1)
[NEW?]
NLRTM02552LEUVE00000
Sh
Fairway Hectometer
Terminal Code
DA
Fairway No.
Location Code
Country Code
18. Press the MENU key twice to return to the CREATE MSG menu.
N
KA
2-17
2. INLAND AIS
td.
19. Select SET ETA then press the ENT key.
[SET ETA]
ETA
., L
DATE[UTC] --/---
TIME[UTC] --:--
AIR DRAUGHT: 0.00 m
NO. OF TUGBOATS: -
Co
20. DATE[UTC] is selected; press the ENT key.
21. Enter the day (1-2 digits) and month (three-character abbreviation) of ETA
23. Enter your ETA, in 24-hour notation, then press the ENT key.
24. AIR DRAUGHT is selected; press the ENT key.
ing
25. Enter your ship's air draught then press the ENT key. (Air draught is the
vertical distance measured from the ship's waterline to the highest point on
the ship.)
26. NO. OF TUGBOATS is selected; press the ENT key.
27. Enter the no. of assisting tugboats (0-6) your ship requires then press the
uild
ENT key. Enter "0" for none.
29. Select SEND MSG then press the ENT key. You are asked if you are sure
to send the message. Select YES then press the ENT key to send the
message.
ipb
Receiving an RTA message

A lock authority responds to an ETA message with an RTA message. An RTA
message contains the date and time the lock authority requests that your ship
arrive to the lock, lock status and the particulars of the lock (country code,
location code, etc.)
Sh
When an RTA message is received, a popup shows " MESSAGE! RTA". To

view the message, do the following:

DA
3. Select ETA/RTA then press the ENT key.

4. Select RTA LOG then press the ENT key to show the RTA log. A sample log
is shown at the top of the next page. New or unread messages show
"NEW" on the date and time line.
N
KA
2-18
2. INLAND AIS
td.
[RTA LOG]
31/APR 13:25 NEW
[UTC] FROM: 431099111
., L
27/MAR 03:43
[UTC] FROM: 431099111
19/MAR 18:00
[UTC] FROM: 431099111
5. Select the message then press the ENT key.
Co
Lock Status
- Operational
- Limited Operation*
- Out of Order [RTA LOG] 1/2 [RTA LOG] 2/2
- Not Available STATUS COUNTRY CODE: DE
LIMITED OPERATION LOCATION CODE: TRI
Date and time RTA: 05/JUN 12:32 UTC FAIRWAY NO.: 01234
lock authority Lock
ing
TERMINAL CODE: 11111
requests your particulars
FAIRWAY HECTOMETRE
ship to arrive 01000
to the lock
* Obstructed by technical
conditions, only one lock
chamber available, etc. RTA message (page 1) RTA message (page 2)
uild
6. Press the MENU key to close the message.
2.7.3 No. of persons message

A number of persons message informs authorities or ships how many persons
(passengers, crew, shipboard personnel) you have on board your ship. Send
this message on request or in case of an event.
ipb

3. Select NO. OF PERSONS then press the ENT key.
Sh
[NO. OF PERSONS]
CREATE MSGE
TX LOG
DA

N
KA
2-19
2. INLAND AIS
td.
[CREATE MSG]
SET MSG TYPEE
VIEW MSG
., L
SEND MSG
Co
[SET MSG TYPE]
MMSI :---------
TYPE: SOLAS (IFM16)
CHANNEL: ALTERNATE
RETRY TIMES: -
ing
MMS
6. ADRS TYPE is selected; press the ENT key.

BROAD CAST
uild
ADRS CAST
7. Select ADRS CAST to send a message to a specific AIS-equipped ship or

authority, or BROAD CAST to send a message to all AIS-equipped ships
within broadcasting range. Press the ENT key.
8. For BROAD CAST, go to step 9. For ADRS CAST, select MMSI then press
the ENT key. Enter the MMSI of the vessel which you want to receive your
ipb
message then press the ENT key.

9. Select TYPE then press the ENT key.
SOLAS(IFM16)
INLAND(RFM55)
9. Select SOLAS(IFM16) or INLAND(RFM55) as applicable then press the

Sh
ENT key.
SOLAS(IFM16): Send no. of persons.
INLAND(RFM55): Send no. of crew, passengers and shipboard personnel.
ALTERNATE
DA
BOTH A & B
A
B
11. Select the channel to use to send the message then press the ENT key.
12. RETRY TIMES is selected; press the ENT key.
13. Enter the number of times to re-send the message (if the first transmission
N
is unsuccessful) then press the ENT key.

KA
2-20
2. INLAND AIS
td.
Note: To view your message before sending it, return to the CREATE MSG
screen, select VIEW MSG then press the ENT key.
., L
[VIEW MSG]
INLAND MSG(RFM55)
CREW: 100
PASSENGER: 1000
SHIPBOARD PERSONNEL
200
Co
SOLAS MSG(IFM16)
NO. OF PERSONS: 1300
15. Select SEND MSG then press the ENT key. You are asked if you are sure
to send the message. Select YES then press the ENT key to send the
message.
ing
2.7.4 EMMA warning message
EMMA (European Multiservice Meteorological Awareness) warnings are sent
by base stations to skippers to inform them of special meteorological situations.
EMMA does not provide continuous weather information, but only warnings of
uild
wind, rain, snow and ice, thunderstorm, fog, extreme temperatures (low and
high), flood, fire in the forest. These messages are additional to the Notices to
Skippers warnings.
The information includes the following:

ipb
• Start time of validity

• End time of validity
• Fairway section start and end co-ordinates
• Type of weather warning
• Minimum value
•
Sh
Maximum value
• Classification of warning
• Wind direction
When you receive an EMMA warning, a popup displays "MESSAGE! EMMA

WARNING". To see the contents of the message, do the following:
DA

3. Select EMMA WARNING then press the ENT key.
4. Select a message then press the ENT key.
The EMMA warning message has three pages and the 1st page looks
N
something like the left-hand screen on the next page. To view the other
screens, press ►.
KA
2-21
2. INLAND AIS
td.
[EMMA WARNING] 1/3 [EMMA WARNING] 2/3 [EMMA WARNING] 3/3
START TIME [UTC] START TYPE: SN
12/JUN 11:30 LAT : 51°55.0213'N SNOW AND ICE
LON : 4°30.0012'E MIN VALUE: 1
., L
END TIME [UTC]
12/JUN 11:35 END MAX VALUE: 4
LAT : 49°55.0213'N CLASS: MEDIUM
LON : 2°30.0012'E WIND DIRECTION: NW
Start and end times of validity Fairway section start and Type, minimum and maximum
Co
of warning end co-ordinates of warning values, class and wind direction
(See below for description.)
Item Description
TYPE FI: Fire in the Forests
FO: Fog
FL: Flood
ing
HT: High Temperature
LT: Low Temperature
RA: Rain
SN: Snow and Ice
TH: Thunderstorm
uild
WI: Wind
Units of measurement are fixed as follows:

• km/h (wind)
• °C (temperature)
• cm/h (snow)
ipb
• l/m²h (rain)
• m (visibility distance in fog)
MIN, MAX VALUE The minimum and maximum value of respective item over one hour.
For example, if the minimum and maximum values for snow and ice
are 1 and 4 respectively, this means that 1-4 cm of snow or ice has
Sh
fallen in one hour.
The indication range is -254 to +254, or "----" in case where a value

is not reported, for example, fire in the forests and flood.
CLASS Weather classification: SLIGHT, MEDIUM, STRONG/HEAVY,
"- - - - - - - -" (unknown)
DA
WIND DIRECTION N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW

N
KA
2-22
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2.7.5 Water level message
The water level message is sent by base stations to inform skippers about
actual water levels in their area. It is additional short-term information to the
., L
water levels distributed via Notices to Skippers. The message contains the
country code(location), gauge ID and water level.
When you receive a water level message, a popup displays "MESSAGE!

WATER LEVEL". To see the contents of the message, do the following:
Co
3. Select WATER LEVEL then press the ENT key.
4. Select a message then press the ENT key.
[WATER LEVEL] 1/1
ing
Country code COUNTRY CODE: DE
National unique ID of gauge GAUGE ID: 2047
Positive or negative value WATER LEVEL: -83.82m
GAUGE ID: 2123
WATER LEVEL: -12.32m
GAUGE ID: 3234
WATER LEVEL: 83.82m
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
2-23
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2.7.6 Message logs
TX logs
The TX logs store transmitted text messages, ETA, and no. of persons
., L
messages, in respective logs. To see a TX message, do the following:

3. Select TEXT, ETA/RTA or NO. OF PERSONS as appropriate then press the
Co
ENT key.
4. Select TX LOG (for TEXT, NO. OF PERSONS) or ETA LOG as appropriate
[TX LOG]
Date and time message 31/APR 13:25 OK
transmitted, message status [UTC] TO: 431099111 Time transmitted, addressee
OK: Message transmitted 27/MAR 03:43 OK
ing
successfully [UTC] TO: 431099111
FAIL: Message could not 19/MAR 18:00 OK
be transmitted [UTC] TO: 431099111
- - - -: Waiting for results
.
5. Select a message then press the ENT key. Below are sample TX log
uild
messages.
[TX ADDRESSED MSG] [TX BROADCAST MSG]
CHANGING COURSE TO CHANGING COURSE TO
357 DEGREES AT 357 DEGREES AT
12:35. 12:35.
ipb
QUIT[MENU] QUIT[MENU]
TX addressed message TX broadcast message
[ETA LOG] 1/2 [ETA LOG] 2/2

ETA: 05/JUN 12:32 UTC NUMBER OF TUGBOATS: 6
COUNTRY CODE: DE AIR DRAUGHT: 1.23m
Sh
LOCATION CODE: TRI

FAIRWAY NO.: 01234
FAIRWAY HECTOMETRE
01000
ETA message (page 1) ETA message (page 2)
[TX LOG] [TX LOG]

DA
SOLAS(IFM16) INLAND(RFM55)
NO. OF PERSONS: 100 CREW: 100
PASSENGER: 255
SHIPBOARD PERSONNEL
41
N
SOLAS IFM16 no. of INLAND RFM55 no. of

persons message persons message

KA
2-24
2. INLAND AIS
td.
RX logs
The RX logs store received text messages, RTA, EMMA warning and water
level messages, in respective logs. When you receive one of those messages,
., L
a popup shows "MESSAGE! XXX (XXX=message type)". To see the contents
of the message, do the following:

3. Select RX LOG (Text), ETA LOG (ETA), RTA LOG (RTA), EMMA WARNING
Co
or WATER LEVEL as appropriate then press the ENT key. Below is the RX
log for text messages. (The RX log for other message types is similar.)
NEW: New or unread message
[RX LOG]
Date and time 31/APR 13:25 NEW
ing
message received [UTC] FROM: 431099111 MMSI of sender
27/MAR 03:43
[UTC] FROM: 431099111
19/MAR 18:00
[UTC] FROM: 431099111
uild
4. Select the message to view then press the ENT key. Below are examples of
text and RTA messages. For EMMA warning and water level messages, see
section 2.7.4 and 2.7.5, respectively.
[RX ADDRESSED MSG] [RX BROADCAST MSG]
WILL CHANGE COURSE STORM WARNING FOR
ipb
TO 352 DEGREES AT SAN FRANCISCO AREA.

13:10 APR 10.
QUIT[MENU] QUIT[MENU]
Sh
RX addressed message RX broadcast message
[RTA LOG] 2/2 [RTA LOG] 2/2

STATUS COUNTRY CODE: DE
LIMITED OPERATION LOCATION CODE: TRI
RTA: 05/JUN 12:32 UTC FAIRWAY NO.: 01234
FAIRWAY HECTOMETRE
DA
01000
RTA message (page 1) RTA message (page 2)

N
KA
2-25
2. INLAND AIS
td.
2.8 Viewing Initial Settings
The INITIAL SETTINGS menu, which is locked with a password, is where the
installer enters ship’s MMSI, internal and external antenna positions, ship type,
., L
I/O port settings and blue sign status. You can view the settings on this menu
as follows.
1. Press the MENU to open the menu.

2. Select INITIAL SETTINGS then press the ENT key.
Co
3. Press the ENT key twice.
4. Select item to view then press the ENT key.
[VIEW MMSI] [VIEW INT ANT POSN]

MMSI : 999999999
NAME : FURUNO
ing
A: 45m
CALL SIGN: FQC3544 A B: 15m
IMO NO. : 009999999 C: 8m
B
ENI: 01820013 D: 7m
C D
QUIT [MENU] QUIT[MENU]
uild
[INITIAL SETTINGS]
VIEW MMSI
VIEW INT ANT POSN
VIEW EXT ANT POSN
VIEW SHIP TYPE
VIEW I/O PORT [VIEW EXT ANT POSN] [VIEW SHIP TYPE]
VIEW BLUE SIGN SW TYPE NO : 0
ipb
QUIT [MENU] A: 45m ***TYPE DETAIL*****

A B: 15m NOT AVAILABLE
C: 8m
B
D: 7m
C D
QUIT[MENU] QUIT [MENU]
Sh
[VIEW I/O PORT] [VIEW BLUE SIGN SW]

Choose port to view and VIEW COM PORT BLUE SIGN SW
DA
press the ENT key. VIEW PC PORT NOT AVAILABLE

VIEW LAN PORT*
* Shown when
VIEW PRIORITY
optional LAN
VIEW QUALITY
kit is installed.
QUIT [MENU] QUIT [MENU]

N
KA
2-26
td.
3. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
., L
WARNING NOTICE
Co
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant
Do not open the equipment. or contact spray to coating or plastic
parts of the equipment.
Only qualified personnel
should work inside the Those items contain organic solvents that
equipment. can damage coating and plastic parts,
especially plastic connectors.
ing
3.1 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is necessary to maintain performance. A monthly
maintenance program should be established and should at least include the
items listed in the table below.
uild
Maintenance items
Item Check point

Connectors Check that all connectors on the rear panel of the transponder
unit and monitor unit are firmly connected.
Cabling Check cabling for damage. Replace if damaged.
ipb
Ground terminal Check the ground terminal on the monitor unit and transponder
unit for rust. Clean if necessary.
Ground wire Check that the ground wire on the monitor unit and
transponder unit is firmly fastened.
Monitor unit, Dirt and dust should be removed from units with a soft, dry
Sh
Transponder unit cloth. For the LCD, wipe it carefully to prevent scratching,
using tissue paper and an LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt
deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping slowly with tissue paper
so as to dissolve the dirt or salt. Change paper frequently so
the salt or dirt will not scratch the LCD. Do not use solvents
such as thinner, acetone or benzene for cleaning any unit; they
DA
can remove paint and marks and deform the equipment.

N
KA
3-1
3. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
td.
3.2 Replacement of Fuse, Resetting the Breaker
3.2.1 Replacement of fuse
., L
The power cable for the monitor unit contains a 3A fuse which protects the
equipment from overvoltage, reverse polarity and equipment fault. If the power
cannot be turned on, check if the fuse has blown. If the fuse has blown, find the
cause before replacing the fuse. If the fuse blows again after replacement,
contact your dealer for advice.
Co
Part Type Code No.
Fuse FGBO-A 3A AC125V 000-549-063
WARNING
ing
Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire or

result in damage to the equipment.
uild
3.2.2 Resetting the breaker
If the power cannot be turned on, the BREAKER button on the rear panel of the
transponder unit may have activated. The BREAKER button pops out when
overvoltage, reverse polarity or equipment fault is detected, to protect the
system from damage. If the button pops out, find the reason before pushing it
ipb
in to restore normal operation.

Sh
BREAKER
10A
Breaker
VHF ANT
GPS ANT PC
N DA
KA
3-2
td.
3.3 Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting table below provides common symptoms of trouble and
the means to rectify them. If you cannot restore normal operation, do not
., L
attempt to check inside the equipment. Refer any repair work to a qualified
technician.
Troubleshooting
Symptom Remedy
Co
Power
Cannot turn on the power. • Check that the power connector is firmly fastened.
• Check the power supply.
Transmitting, receiving messages
Cannot transmit or • Check that the VHF antenna cable is firmly
receive. fastened.
• Check the VHF antenna for damage.
ing
• For TX message, try different TX channel.
(operating sequence: MENU, MSG, CREATE
MSG, SET MSG TYPE, CHANNEL)
Can transmit but message • On the SET MSG TYPE sub-menu, check that
is sent to wrong party. ADRS TYPE is selected to ADRS-CAST and
uild
MMSI is correct, before sending a message.
(operating sequence: MENU, MSG, CREATE
MSG, SET MSG TYPE, ADRS TYPE and MMSI)
Position data
No position data • Check the GPS antenna for damage.
• Check the GPS antenna cable and its connectors.
ipb
3.4 Diagnostics
The FA-150 provides diagnostic tests to check the monitor unit and
transponder unit for proper operation.
Sh
3.4.1 Monitor unit test

The monitor unit test shows program no., and checks the ROM, RAM, LCD and
controls.
DA

[DIAGNOSTICS]
MONITOR TEST
TRANSPONDER TEST
PWR ON/OFF HISTORY
N
TX ON/OFF HISTORY
MEMORY CLEAR
ACTIVATE KEY
For service technician. FOR SERVICE
KA
Not accessible by user.
3-3
td.
3. MONITOR TEST is selected; press the ENT key. The test program
automatically proceeds in the sequence shown below.
XX.XX = Program version no.
., L
[MONITOR TEST] [MONITOR TEST]
BOOT NO.: 2450020-XX.XX BOOT NO.: 2450020-XX.XX
PROG NO.: 2450021-XX.XX PROG NO.: 2450021-XX.XX
ROM : CONT : ROM : OK CONT :53
SDRAM: DIM : SDRAM: OK DIM :4
PORT : PORT : OK
KEY : PUSH KEY KEY :
Co
QUIT[MENU] 3 TIMES QUIT[MENU] 3 TIMES
(a) (b)
<LCD CHECK>
ing
ALL ON 2 SEC.
ALL OFF 3 SEC.
(e) (d) (c)

uild
a) The first screen in the test shows boot no. and program no. The message
“PUSH KEY” prompts you to test the keys. Press each key (except the
PWR key) and arrows on the CursorPad one by one. The name of the
pressed key or arrow appears next to “KEY” if the control is functioning
normally.
b) The ROM, RAM, SDRAM and (I/O)PORT (special test connector required,
otherwise “NG” appears) are checked. The results of the
ipb
ROM/RAM/SDRAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). If NG

appears, try the test again. If NG still appears, contact your dealer for
advice.
The contrast and dimmer settings are automatically changed. Check that
their setting indications are reasonable.
Sh
c) The screen announces the start of the LCD check.

d) The screen turns black.
e) The screen turns white.
4. The test is repeated. To escape from the test and return to the
DIAGNOSTICS menu, press the MENU key three times when PUSH KEY
is displayed.
N DA
KA
3-4
td.
3.4.2 Transponder test
The transponder test consists of two tests: memory test and internal GPS
receiver test.
., L
Memory test
The memory can be checked for proper operation and the program number
displayed as follows:
Co
3. Select TRANSPONDER TEST then press the ENT key.
4. Select MEMORY TEST then press the ENT key. The program no. is
displayed and the ROM and RAM are checked. The results of the ROM and
RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, contact your
dealer for advice. The version of the Mother Board is also shown.
ing
[MEMORY TEST]
PROGRAM NO.
2450018-xx.xx
MAIN ROM : OK
MAIN RAM : OK
uild
SUB RAM : OK
MOT HW :x
xx.xx: Program Version No.

x: 0, Non-Inland AIS, other
than 0: Inland AIS
ipb
5. Press the MENU key to return to the DIAGNOSTICS sub-menu.

Sh
N DA
KA
3-5
td.
Internal GPS test
The internal GPS receiver can be checked for proper operation as follows:
., L
3. Select TRANSPONDER TEST then press the ENT key.
4. Select GPS TEST then press the ENT key to start the test. The program no.
and the test results appear as shown below.
OK: Normal
Co
NG: (No Good). NG appears along with reason for NG:
DATA BACKUP ERR: Data backup problem
GPS COMMUNICATION ERROR: Comm. error with internal GPS
receiver
PARAMETER BACKUP ERR: Parameter backup problem
ROM ERROR
ing
RAM ERROR
ANTENNA ERROR
[GPS TEST]
PROGRAM NO.
485026xxxx
uild
TEST: OK
xxxx: Program Version No.
5. Press the MENU key to return to the DIAGNOSTICS sub-menu..

ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
3-6
td.
3.4.3 Power on/off history
The PWR ON/OFF HISTORY log shows the date and time of the latest 30
power-ons and power-offs. If the interval between power-off and power-on is
., L
less than 15 minutes those times are not shown.

3. Select PWR ON/OFF HISTORY then press the ENT key.
Co
[PWR ON/OFF HISTORY]
PWR-ON 17/MAY/2009 Power turned on 17 May 2009
05:35:54 at 05:35:54
PWR-OFF 17/MAY/2009
04:56:57
PWR-ON 17/MAY/2009
04:06:34
QUIT[MENU]
ing
4. Use ▼ or ► to change page in the forward direction; ▲ or ◄ to change
page in the reverse direction.
3.4.4 Tx on/off history

uild
The TX ON/OFF HISTORY log shows the date and time of the latest 30
transmissions.

ipb
3. Select TX ON/OFF HISTORY then press the ENT key.
[TX ON/OFF HISTORY]

TX-ON 17/MAY/2009 Tx at 17 May 2009
05:35:54 at 05:35:54
TX-OFF 17/MAY/2009
04:34:57
Sh
TX-ON 17/MAY/2009
04:33:57
PAGE (1/2) :[ ] QUIT[MENU]
4. Use ▼ or ► to change page in the forward direction; ▲ or ◄ to change

page in the reverse direction.
DA

N
KA
3-7
td.
3.5 Alarm Status
The alarm sounds for equipment error and is accompanied by a flashing popup
indication. Press any key to silence the alarm and erase the popup. To see
., L
which alarm(s) has been violated, display the ALARM STATUS log as shown
below.
1. At the plotter display, press the DISP key four times to show the ALARM
STATUS display.
Co
[ALARM STATUS]
Alarm name, EPFS 7/MAY 4:32:16
date and time L/L 7/MAY 4:02:01
of alarm SOG 7/MAY 2:34:54
COG 6/MAY 7:09:32
HDG 3/MAY 8:00:21
ROT 19/APR 9:05:22
2. Use ▼ or ▲ to scroll the log.
ing
Alarm statuses and their meanings
uild
Alarm Status Meaning
Indication
ANT Antenna VSWR trouble. Continued operation possible.
CH1 TDMA RX1 Board trouble. TX stopped on corresponding TX
channel.
ipb
CH2 TDMA RX2 Board trouble. TX stopped on corresponding TX

channel.
CH70 DSC RX Board trouble, transmission stopped on CH70.
COG Invalid COG data
EPFS No data from external navigator. Continued operation
Sh
possible.
FAIL General system failure
HDG Invalid/nonexistent HDG data
L/L No L/L data
MKD Minimum input device failure
ROT Invalid ROT data
DA
SOG Invalid SOG data

TX TX malfunction
N
KA
3-8
td.
3.6 Error and System Messages
The FA-150 displays the following error and system messages to alert you to
errors and events.
., L
Error and system messages and their meanings
Message Meaning
CAN’T DISPLAY INVALID DATA No position data.
CAN’T DISPLAY OVER LAT85° Own ship’s latitude is higher than 85°.
Co
COLLISION ALARM AIS target within set CPA/TCPA range.
COMMUNICATION ERROR No communication with transponder.
DIFFERENT FROM ANT POS For Inland AIS. Total sum of internal and external
VALUE antenna distances are more than 3 meters greater than
LENGTH (BEAM) OF SHIP.
ERROR REGIST 1) You entered MSG22 or DSC data whose sea areas
ing
overlap one another, or wrong NAV STATUS
2) You entered NAV STATUS as 14 on page 1 of NAV
STATUS menu.
GPS COMMUNICATION ERROR Communication error with internal GPS, shown at
internal GPS self test.
ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF Duplication in priority setting.
uild
PRIORITY
ILLEGAL MODE WAS SELECTED. Invalid combination of channels is selected for editing.
PRESS ANY KEY.
INCORRECT NUMBER! PRESS Incorrect ERI code entered.
ANY KEY
MESSAGE! Class A AIS text message received.
ipb
MESSAGE! EMMA WARNING Inland AIS EMMA warning message received.

MESSAGE! RTA Inland AIS RTA message received.
MESSAGE! TEXT Inland AIS text message received.
MESSAGE! WATER LEVEL Inland AIS water level message received
NO CREW Number of crew not entered in no. of persons
message.
Sh
NO ETA, DESTINATION You attempted to send a message that does not have
ETA or destination.
NO MESSAGE No TX message to send when you attempted to send a
message.
NO NUMBER OF PERSONS Number of persons not entered in no. of persons
message.
DA
NO OWN SHIP POSITION Invalid own ship position.

AVAILABLE
NO PASSENGER Number of passengers not entered in no. of persons
message.
NO SEL Attempted to see detailed data for a target which has
no data.
N
NO SHIPBOARD PERSONNEL Number of shipboard personnel not entered in no. of

persons message.
OUT OF RANGE! 0-255 Wrong IP, sub net mask or gateway address.
KA
3-9
td.
OUT OF RANGE! 0-65535 Invalid port number entered.
OUT OF RANGE! 10-30 Invalid NavNet port number entered.
., L
OUT OF RANGE! BEAM:0-100 Invalid beam of ship entered.
OUT OF RANGE! CH-A(CH-B) Invalid channel entered.
DOESN'T EXIST
OUT OF RANGE! CPA:0-6.00 Invalid CPA range entered.
OUT OF RANGE! CREW:0-254 Invalid crew no. entered.
OUT OF RANGE! DAY Invalid day entered.
Co
OUT OF RANGE! DRAUGHT:0-20.0 Invalid inland draught entered.
OUT OF RANGE! DRAUGHT:0-25.5 Invalid SOLAS draught entered.
OUT OF RANGE! HOUR:0-23* Invalid hour entered.
OUT OF RANGE!: INVALID Invalid CH-NO. A or CH-NO. B entered.
CHANNEL
OUT OF RANGE! LENGTH:0-800 Invalid ship's length entered.
ing
OUT OF RANGE! MINUTE:0-59* Invalid minute entered.
OUT OF RANGE! NAV STATUS:0-15 Invalid nav status entered.
OUT OF RANGE! Invalid no. of passengers entered.
PASSENGER:0-8190
OUT OF RANGE! Invalid no. of personnel entered.
PERSONNEL:0-254
uild
OUT OF RANGE! RETRY Invalid no. of retry times entered.
TIMES:0-3. PRESS ANY KEY.
OUT OF RANGE! TCPA:0-60 Invalid TCPA entered.
OUT OF RANGE! TUGBOAT:0-6 Invalid tugboat quantity entered.
OUT OF RANGE! TYPE NO.:10-99 Invalid cargo type entered.
OUT OF RANGE! ZONE:1-8 Invalid zone entered.
ipb
SEND MESSAGE UNSUCCESSFUL Message could not be sent.

TRANSPONDER WAS REBOOTED Transponder was rebooted.
* Error message displayed for both even if only one is out of range.
Sh
Note: Detection of RX malfunction
1) Detection of TDMA RX malfunction

Frequency error
PLL chip on receiver board generates lock or unlock signal for
synthesizer.
DA
MPU watches and sets status flag which reflects data of ALR sentence.
ID 003 for RX1, ID 004 for RX2
2) Detection of DSC RX malfunction
General error
N
DSC Error (ID: 005) will happen in case of DSC MPU could not receive
format specifier of the data from DSC amplifier unless RSSI exists more
than 90 seconds.
KA
3-10
td.
3.7 GPS Monitor
The GPS monitor display shows information about the built-in GPS receiver,
including position, speed over ground, course over ground, date, time, mode
., L
position accuracy, position-fixing status and RAIM status.

2. Select INTERNAL GPS then press the ENT key.
[INTERNAL GPS]
Co
Latitude position LAT : 34°44.4639'N
Longitude position LON : 135°21.2395'E
Speed over ground, Course over ground S/C : 10.9 kn/ 98.9°
Date UTC : 16/MAY/2009
Time 06:29:02
Mode DGPS STS: D3D STS (Position fix Status)
DGPS PA: H RAIM: USED 2D: 2D GPS position fix
GPS 3D: 3D GPS position fix
ing
NO FIX D2D: 2D DGPS position fix
Position Accuracy D3D: 3D DGPS position fix
RAIM Status* DOP: HDOP > 4 in 2D fix,
H: High (<10 m, differential mode)
(Receiver Autonomous or HDOP > 6 in 3D fix
L: Low (>10, autonomous mode)
Integrity Monitoring) NO FIX: No position fix
USED or UNUSED
uild
*RAIM: Technique whereby the GPS receiver verifies the integrity
of the signals received from the GPS constellation.
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
3-11
td.
3.8 Displaying Sensor Status
The SENSOR STATUS screen shows sensor status.
., L
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Select SENSOR STATUS then press the ENT key.
[SENSOR STATUS]
Sensor status message UTC CLOCK LOST
Co
QUIT[MENU]
ing
Sensor status messages and their meanings
Sensor Status Message Meaning

CH MANAGEMENT Channel changed (displayed about 30 s)
EXT DGNSS Using external DGNSS
uild
EXT GNSS Using external GNSS
EXT SOG/COG Using external SOG/COG
HDG VALID Heading data normal
INT DGNSS BEACON Using internal DGNSS beacon
INT DGNSS MSG 17 MSG 17 corrects internal GNSS with differential
ipb
correction
INT GNSS Using internal GNSS
INT SOG/COG Using internal SOG/COG
OTHER ROT Value calculated from HDT, or ROT device used and
talker is other than T1
Sh
ROT VALID ROT data normal

UTC CLOCK LOST Internal position fix lost
N DA
KA
3-12
td.
3.9 Restoring Default Settings
You may clear all or specific settings to start afresh with default settings. When
all data is cleared, the default settings for all items in the INIT SETTING and
., L
SYSTEM SETTINGS sub-menus are restored. GPS data is also cleared;
however, MMSI and IMO numbers, ship’s name and call sign are not cleared.

Co
3. Select MEMORY CLEAR then press the ENT key.
[MEMORY CLEAR]
MONITOR CLEAR
SET USER DEFAULT
GPS COLD START
ing
QUIT[MENU]
4. Select MONITOR CLEAR, SET USER DEFAULT or GPS COLD START as

appropriate then press the ENT key.
uild
MONITOR CLEAR: Restore default settings for dimmer, contrast
CPA/TCPA, key beep, audio alarm, and received
message alarm.
USER DEFAULT: Restores all settings to default, except items in the
INITIAL SETTINGS menu (MMSI No., IMO No., ship’s
name and call sign, etc.)
ipb
GPS COLD START: Clears GPS Almanac to receive latest Almanac.
MONITOR CLEAR. SET USER DEFAULT GPS COLD START.
ARE YOU SURE? ARE YOU SURE? ARE YOU SURE?

YES NO YES NO YES NO
Sh
MONITOR CLEAR USER DEFAULT GPS COLD START
5. Press ◄ to select YES then press the ENT key.
For MONITOR CLEAR and USER DEFAULT, a beep sounds then the
equipment restarts.
N DA
KA
3-13
td.
3.10 AIS-SART Test Indication in Target List
The FA-150 can confirm if an AIS-SART is working properly. This test requires
message 1 data (MMSI No. 97 XXXXXXX, NAV STATUS: 15). Note that this
., L
setting is turned off when the power is turned off.

Co
[USER SETTINGS]
KEY BEEP : ON
ALARM BUZZER : ON
AUTO SORT : ON
DISP SART TEST : ON
LR MODE : AUTO
RECEIVED MSG
CPA/TCPA ALARM
ing
3. Select DISP SART TEST then press the ENT key.
4. Select ON then press the ENT key.
6. At the plotter display, press the DISP key.
uild
7. Select SART then press the ENT key to show detailed information for the
AIS-SART.
8. Confirm that the STATUS field is showing “SART TEST”. (See page 1-28.)
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
3-14
td.
APPENDIX
., L
Menu Tree - Class A AIS
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
NDA
KA
AP-1
APPENDIX
td.
CHANNEL VIEW CHANNEL (View power and channel settings of channel in use.)
., L
SETTINGS
Press [ENT] key to display.
EDIT CHANNEL SELECT NO. (0-9)
TIME (UTC)
FROM MMSI (HIGH SEA, MMSI, EMPTY)
TYPE (HIGH SEA, AIS, PI, DSC,
MANUAL, EMPTY)
FROM MMSI
Co
POWER (1W, 12.5W)
CH NO. CH-A, CH-B
MODE CH-A, CH-B
ZONE (1-8 (NM)
CH AREA RIGHT TOP LAT

LON
ing
LEFT BOTTOM LAT
LON
DIAG- MONITOR TEST (Displays PROG NO. and BOOT NO.; checks ROM, RAM, LCD, controls.)
NOSTICS
TRANSPONDER MEMORY TEST (Displays PROGRAM NO.;
uild
TEST checks ROM, RAM, and MOT HW.)
GPS TEST (Display PROGRAM NO. and checks internal GPS receiver.)
PWR ON/OFF HISTORY (Log for time of equipment power on and off.)
TX ON/OFF HISTORY (Log for time of equipment transmission on and off.)

ipb
MEMORY CLEAR MONITOR CLEAR (YES, NO)

SET USER DEFAULT (YES, NO)
GPS COLD START (YES, NO)
ACTIVATE KEY (DEVICE ID, KEY[ACTIVATED])

Sh
FOR SERVICE (For service technician. Not accessible by user.)
[NAV STATUS] NAV STATUS (00-15)

key DESTINATION SELECT
EDIT
DELETE
ARRIVAL TIME DATE

DA
TIME
CARGO TYPE (10-99)
DRAUGHT&PERSONS DRAUGHT (0-25.5(m))

NO. OF PERSONS (0-8191)
N
KA
AP-2
APPENDIX
td.
Menu Tree - Inland AIS
[MENU] key
., L
MSG TEXT CREATE MSG SET MSG TYPE ADRS TYPE
ETA/RTA TX LOG SET MSG (BROAD CAST, ADRS CAST)
NO. OF PERSONS RX LOG SEND MSG MMSI
EMMA WARNING CREATE MSG SET MSG TYPE MSG TYPE
WATER LEVEL ETA LOG SET DESTINATION (NORMAL, SAFETY)
RTA LOG SET ETA CHANNEL
SEND MSG (ALTERNATE, BOTH A & B, A, B)
CREATE MSG
RETRY TIMES (0-3)
TX LOG SET MSG TYPE
Co
VIEW MSG COUNTRY CODE, LOCATION CODE,
FAIRWAY NO., TERMINAL CODE,
SEND MSG
FAIRWAY HECT
ETA (DATE, TIME), AIR DRAUGHT,
NO. OF TUGBOATS
ADRS TYPE
(BROAD CAST, ADRS CAST)
MMSI
TYPE
SENSOR STATUS (Display sensor status.)
(SOLAS(IFM16), INLAND(RFM55))
INTERNAL GPS (Displays data about internal GPS receiver.) CHANNEL
ing
(ALTERNATE, BOTH A & B, A, B)
USER SETTINGS KEY BEEP (ON, OFF) RETRY TIMES (0-3)
ALARM BUZZER (ON, OFF) POPUP (ALL, ABM, OFF)
AUTO SORT (ON,OFF) BUZZER (ON, OFF)
DISP SART TEST (ON, OFF CPA (0.0-6.00 (NM))
LR MODE (AUTO, MANUAL) TCPA (0-60 (min))
RECEIVED MSG ALARM MODE (ON, OFF)
CPA/TCPA ALARM ALARM BUZZER (ON, OFF)
uild
INITIAL SET MMSI (MMSI, IMO NO., NAME, CALL SIGN, ENI)
SETTINGS
SET INT ANT POSN A (0-511 (m)) Note: The INITIAL SETTINGS sub-menu
B (0-511 (m)) shown here is the one accessed with a
C (0-63 (m)) password, which permits changing of
D (0-63 (m)) settings. If accessed without a password,
in which case "SET" in a menu title is
SET EXT ANT POSN A (0-511 (m))
replaced with "VIEW" and settings cannot
B (0-511 (m))
be changed.
C (0-63 (m))
ipb
D (0-63 (m))
SET SHIP TYPE (Type no.)
SET I/O SET SET COM1 MODE (LONG RANGE, EXT DISPLAY, DISABLE)
PORT COM SPEED (IEC61162-1, IEC61162-2)
PORT SET COM2 MODE (EXT DISPLAY, MONITOR, HI LEVEL IF, DISABLE)
SPEED (IEC61162-1, IEC61162-2)
SET COM3 (Same as SET COM2.)
SET COM4 MODE (SENSOR, EXT DISPLAY, DISABLE)
Sh
SPEED (IEC61162-1, IEC61162-2)

SET COM5 MODE (SENSOR(Fixed)
SPEED (IEC61162-1, IEC61162-2)
SET COM6 MODE (SENSOR(Fixed)
SPEED (IIEC61162-1, IEC61162-2, AD-10)
SET PC MODE (STANDARD, MONITOR, SERVICE, BEACON, DISABLE)

PORT SPEED (4800BPS, 9600BPS, 19.2KBPS, 38.4KBPS, 57.6KBPS)
SET LAN MODE (STANDARD, MONITOR, SERVICE, DISABLE)

DA
* Shown when *1
optional LAN kit PORT* *2 IP ADDRESS (000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255; 172.031.024.001)
is installed. SUB NET MASK (000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255; 255.255.000.000)
PORT NO. (0 - 65535; 10000)
IP ADDRESS (000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255; 172.031.024.001)
SUB NET MASK (000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255; 255.255.000.000)
NAVNET PORT NO. (10000 - 30000; 10000)
GATEWAY ADDRESS (000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255)
HOSTNAME (AIS0 - AIS9)
AIS OUTPUT (AUTO, CONTINUOUS) *1: For PC Network
N
2
GPS OUTPUT (AUTO, CONTINUOUS) * : For NAVNET 3D
ZDA OUTPUT (AUTO, CONTINUOUS)
VIEW PRIORITY
VIEW QUALITY
KA
SET BLUE SIGN SW (AVAILABLE, NOT AVAILABLE)

AP-3
APPENDIX
td.
CHANNEL VIEW CHANNEL (View power and channel settings of channel in use.)
SETTINGS
Press [ENT] key to display.
., L
EDIT CHANNEL SELECT NO. (0-9)
TIME
FROM MMSI (HIGH SEA, MMSI, EMPTY)
TYPE (HIGH SEA, AIS, PI, DSC,
MANUAL, EMPTY)
FROM MMSI
POWER (1W, 12.5W)
CH NO. CH-A, CH-B
MODE CH-A, CH-B
Co
ZONE (1-8 (NM)
CH AREA RIGHT TOP LAT

LON
LEFT BOTTOM LAT
LON
DIAG- MONITOR TEST (Displays program no.; checks ROM, RAM, LCD, controls.)
NOSTICS
TRANSPONDER MEMORY TEST (Displays PROG NO.;
ing
TEST checks ROM, RAM, and MOT HW.)
GPS TEST (Display PROGRAM NO. and checks internal GPS receiver.)
PWR ON/OFF HISTORY (Log for time of equipment power on and off.)
TX ON/OFF HISTORY (Log for time of equipment transmission on and off.)
MEMORY CLEAR MONITOR CLEAR (YES, NO)

uild
SET USER DEFAULT (YES, NO)
GPS COLD START (YES, NO)
ACTIVATE KEY [DEVICE ID, KEY[ACTIVATED])
FOR SERVICE (For service technician. Not accessible by user.)
[NAV STATUS] NAV STATUS (00-15) SELECT

key AIS MODE (SOLAS, INLAND) EDIT
DESTINATION DELETE
ipb
ARRIVAL TIME
DRAUGHT (SOLAS DRAUGHT (0-25.5m), INLAND DRAUGHT (0.01-20.00m))
CARGO TYPE (10-99)
ERI CODE
NO. OF PERSONS (CREW (0-254), PASSENGER (0-8190),
SHIPBOARD PERSONNEL (0-254), NO. OF PERSONS (0-8191))
LENGTH&BEAM (LENGTH (0.0-800.0m) BEAM (0.0-100.0m))
OTHER DYNAMIC INFORMATION RATE (AUTO, 10sec, 5sec, 2sec)
Sh
HAZARDOUS CARGO (NUMBER OF CONES 0-3, B-FLAG, UNKNOWN)

UN/LOADED (UNLOADED, LOADED, UNKNOWN)
N DA
KA
AP-4
APPENDIX
td.
Parts List
component level are not practical (IMO A.694(17)/8.3.1). Only some discrete components
., L
are used. FURUNO Electric Co., Ltd. believes identifying these components is of no value
for shipboard maintenance; therefore, they are not listed in the manual. Major modules
can be located on the parts location photo on page AP-6 and AP-7.
FURUNO
Co
Model FA-150
Unit MONITOR UNIT,
TRANSPONDER UNIT
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
Blk.No.
TYPE, NAME LOCATION
ing
24P0062, CPU MONITOR UNIT

24P0034, DSC TRANSPONDER UNIT
24P0043, GPSTB TRANSPONDER UNIT
uild
24P0035, MAIN TRANSPONDER UNIT
24P0036, MOT TRANSPONDER UNIT
24P0037, PWR TRANSPONDER UNIT
24P0033A, RX1 TRANSPONDER UNIT
24P0033B, RX2 TRANSPONDER UNIT
24P0032, TX TRANSPONDER UNIT
ipb
GN-8093, GPS RECEIVER TRANSPONDER UNIT

Sh
N DA
KA
AP-5
APPENDIX
td.
Parts Location
Monitor unit
., L
Co
CPU Board
24P0062
ing
Monitor unit, rear cover opened
uild
Transponder unit
MOT Board
24P0036
ipb
TX Board
24P0032
Sh
PWR Board
24P0037
DA
Transponder unit, top cover removed

N
KA
AP-6
APPENDIX
td.
GPS Receiver
GN-8093
MAIN Board GPSTB Board
24P0035 24P0043
., L
Co
RX2 Board
24P0033
RX1 Board
24P0033
DSC Board
24P0033
ing
uild
Transponder unit, bottom cover removed
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
AP-7
APPENDIX
td.
Digital Interface (IEC 61162-1 Edition 2, IEC 61162-2)
Sentence data
., L
Input sentences
ABM, ACA, ACK, AIR, BBM, DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD,
PIWWIVD, PIWWSPW, PIWWSSD, PIWWVSD, RMC, ROT, SSD, VBW, VSD, VTG
Output sentences
Co
ABK, ACA, ACS, ALR, LRF, LR1, LR2, LR3, TXT, PIWWSPR, VDM, VDO
ABK: With each event
ACA, ACS: At RX
ALR: 30 s during alarm, 2 min normally no alarm
ing
LRF, LR1, LR2, LR3: At RX
TXT: Each update
VDM: At RX
VDO: 1 s
uild
Isolation: Provided
Input Impedance: Input Impedance: 110 ohms (130K ohms without jumper plug)
Max. Voltage: ±14 V to GNDiso
Threshold: ±0.2 V (A-B)
ipb
Output drive capability

Differential driver output
R=50 ohm 2 v min.
R=27 ohm 1.5 V min.
Sh
Driver short-circuit current

60 mA min. 150 mA max.
Data transmission
Data is transmitted in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard
referenced in 2.1 of IEC 61162-1/2. The first bit is a start bit and is followed by data bits,
DA
least-significant-bit as illustrated below.

Baud rate: 38.4 Kbps /4800 bps
N
Stop bits: 1
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
KA
Start Stop
bit Data bits bit
AP-8
APPENDIX
td.
Serial interface I/O circuit
COM1, 2, 3 port
Baud rate selectable from 4800 and 38400 (bps).
., L
110Ω
COM1_JP
LTC1535C
COM1_JP
RD COM1_RD_B
COM1_RD_A
Co
TD COM1_TD_B
COM1_TD_A
GND GND2
GND GND_ISO
COM 4, 5 port
ing
110Ω
COM4_JP
LTC1535C COM4_JP
COM4_2_RD_B
RD_2 COM4_2_RD_A
uild
TD COM4_TD_B
COM4_TD_A
GND GND2
GND GND_ISO
2.2kΩ PC400 470Ω

ipb
RD_1 COM4_1_RD_H
COM4_1_RD_C
COM6 port
Sh

110Ω
COM6_JP
LTC1535C COM6_JP
2_RD COM6_2_RD_B
COM6_2_RD_A
COM6_TD_B
DA
TD
COM6_TD_A
GND2
GND GND_ISO
470Ω
2.2kW PC400 COM6_1_RD_H
220Ω
1_RD/A D_DATA AD_DATA_H
COM6_1_RD_C/AD_DATA_C
N
2.2kW PC400
220Ω
AD_CLK AD_CLK_H
KA
AD_CLK_C
AP-9
APPENDIX
td.
DISP port
LTC1535C 110Ω
., L
DISP_RD_B
RD
DISP_RD_A
DISP_TD_B
TD
DISP_TD_A
GND GND2
Co
GND GND_ISO
Blue Sign port
TLP181 5V
270 ohm
RD
ing
Blue Sign_H
Blue Sign_C
Sentence description
uild
Input sentences
ABM - Addressed binary and safety related message
!--ABM,x,x,x,xxxxxxxxx,x,x.x,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--- 9
ipb
| | | | | | | +----- 8
| | | | | | +-------- 7
| | | | | +------------ 6
| | | | +--------------- 5
| | | +--------------------- 4
| | + --------------------------- 3
| +----------------------------- 2
Sh
+------------------------------- 1
1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9

2. Message sentence number, 1 to 9
3. Message sequence identifier, 0 to 3
4. The MMSI of destination AIS unit for the ITU-R M.1371 message 6 or 12
5. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message
6. VDL message number(6 or 12), see ITU-R M.1371
DA
7. Encapsulated data
8. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
9. Checksum
N
KA
AP-10
APPENDIX
td.
ACA - AIS regional channel assignment message
$--ACA,x,IIII.I, a,yyyyy.y,a,IIII.I,a,yyyyy.y,a,x,xxxx,x,xxxx,x,x,x,a,x,hhmmss.s*hh<CR><LF>
15
., L
14
13
12
11
10
9
Co
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ing
1. Sequence number, 0 to 9
2. Region Northeast corner latitude - N/S
3. Region Northeast corner longitude - E/W
4. Region Southwest corner latitude - N/S
5. Region Southwest corner longitude - E/W
uild
6. Transition Zone Size
7. Channel A
8. Channel A bandwidth
9. Channel B
10. Channel B bandwidth
11. Tx/Rx mode control
12. Power level control
ipb
13. Not used

14. In-use flag
15. Time of in-used change
ACK - Acknowledge alarm

Sh
$--ACK,xxx*hh<CR><LF>
| +--------------------- 2
+------------------------ 1
1. Local alarm number(identifier)

2. Checksum
N DA
KA
AP-11
APPENDIX
td.
AIR - AIS interrogation request
$--AIR,xxxxxxxxx,x.x,x,x.x,x,xxxxxxxxx,x.x,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | +--- 9
| | | | | | | +----- 8
| | | | | | +-------- 7
| | | | | +--------------- 6
| | | | +--------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------ 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
Co
| +------------------------------ 2
+------------------------------------- 1
1. MMSI of interrogated station 1

2. ITU-R M.1371 message requested from station 1
3. Message sub-section
4. Number of second message requested from station 1
5. Message sub-section
ing
6. MMSI of interrogated station 2
7. Number of message requested from station 2
8. Message data sub-section
9. Checksum
BBM - UAIS broadcast binary message.

uild
!--BBM,x,x,x,x,x.x,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
|| | | | | | |
|| | | | | | +--- 8
|| | | | | +------ 7
| | | | | +--------- 6
| | | | +------------- 5
ipb
| | | +---------------- 4
| | +------------------ 3
| +-------------------- 2
+---------------------- 1

Sh
3. Sequential Message identifier, 0 to 9

4. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message
5. VDL message number(8 or 14), see ITU-R M.1371
6. Binary data
8. Checksum
N DA
KA
AP-12
APPENDIX
td.
DTM - Datum reference
$--DTM,ccc,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | +--- 7
| | | | | | | +------ 6
| | | | | | +---------- 5
| | | | +---+------------- 4
| | +---+------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+---------------------------- 1
Co
1. Local datum W84 - WGS84
W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
999 - User defined
IHO datum code
2. Not used
ing
3. Lat offset, min, N/S
4. Lon offset, min, E/W
5. Not used
6. Reference dattum W84 - WGS84
W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
uild
7. Checksum
GBS - GNSS satellite fault detection
$--GBS,hhmmss.ss,x.x,x.x,x.x,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
ipb
| | | | | | | | +--------- 9
| | | | | | | +------------ 8
| | | | | | +---------------- 7
| | | | | +-------------------- 6
| | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | +--------------------------- 4
Sh
| | +------------------------------- 3
| +----------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------- 1
1. Not used
2. Expected error in latitude
3. Expected error in longitude
4. Not used
DA
5. Not used
6. Not used
7. Not used
8. Not used
9. Checksum
N
KA
AP-13
APPENDIX
td.
GGA - Global positioning system (GPS) fix data
$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9
| | | | | | | | | | +---+------------ 8
| | | | | | | | +---+------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +------------------------- 6
| | | | | | +---------------------------- 5
Co
| | | | | +------------------------------- 4
| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. Not used
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
ing
4. GPS quality indicator
5. Not used
6. Not used
7. Not used
8. Not used
9. Not used
10. Not used
uild
11. Checksum
GLL - Geographic position - latitude/longitude

$--GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
ipb
| | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | +----------- 4
| | | | +---------------- 3
| | +------+----------------------- 2
+--+----------------------------------- 1
Sh
1. Latitude, N/S
2. Longitude, E/W
3. Not used
6. Checksum
DA

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = estimated(dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
N
KA
be null fields.
AP-14
APPENDIX
td.
GNS - GNSS fixed data
$--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | +------ 10
| | | | | | | | | | +---------- 9
| | | | | | | | | +-------------- 8
| | | | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +---------------------- 6
| | | | | | +------------------------- 5
Co
| | | | | +------------------------------ 4
| | | +-------+--------------------------------- 3
| +--+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. Not used
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
ing
4. Mode indicator
5. Not used
6. Not used
7. Not used
8. Not used
9. Not used
10. Not used
uild
11. Checksum
HDT - Heading - true

$--HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--------- 2
ipb
+----+----------- 1

2. Checksum
LRF - Long-range function

Sh
$--LRF,x,xxxxxxxxx,c--c,c--c,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--6
| | | +--- 5
| | | +------ 4
| | +----------- 3
| +------------------- 2
DA
+------------------------- 1
2. MMSI of requestor
3. Name of requestor, 1 to 20 characters
4. Function request, 1 to 26 characters
5. Function reply status
N
6. Checksum
KA
AP-15
APPENDIX
td.
LRI - Long-range interrogation
$--LRI,x,a,xxxxxxxxx,xxxxxxxxx,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a*hh<CR><LF>
|| | | | | | | | | | | |
|| | | | | | | | | | | +--- 9
., L
|| | | | | | | | | +---+----- 8
|| | | | | | | +--+---------------- 7
|| | | | | +---+-------------------------- 6
|| | | +--+------------------------------------- 5
|| | +--------------------------------------------------- 4
|| +------------------------------------------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Co
+--------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
2. Control Flag
3. MMSI of requestor
4. MMSI of destination
5. Latitude - N/S(north-east coordinate)
6. Longitude - E/W(north-east coordinate)
7. Latitude - N/S(south-west coordinate)
ing
8. Longitude - E/W(south-west coordinate)
9. Checksum
OSD - Own ship data

uild
$--OSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +--------- 10
| | | | | | | | +----------- 9
| | | | | | | +-------------- 8
| | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | +--------------------- 6
| | | | +------------------------ 5
ipb
| | | +--------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------ 3
| +--------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------ 1

Sh
2. Heading status: A=data valid, V=data invalid

3. Vessel course, degrees true
4. Course reference, B/M/W/R/P(see note)
5. Vessel speed
6. Speed reference, B/M/W/R/P(see note)
7. Not used
8. Not used
9. Speed units, K(km/h) / N(Knots) / S(statute miles/h)
DA
10. Checksum
NOTES - Reference systems(speed/course):

B = bottom tracking log
M = manually entered
W = water referenced
R = radar tracking(of fixed target)
N
P = positioning system ground reference

KA
AP-16
APPENDIX
td.
RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data
$--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | +----- 9
| | | | | | | | | +--+------- 8
| | | | | | | | +--------------- 7
| | | | | | | +--------------------- 6
| | | | | | +------------------------- 5
| | | | +---+---------------------------- 4
Co
| | +---+---------------------------------------- 3
| +--------------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1

3. Latitude, N/S
4. Longitude, E/W
ing
7. Date: dd/mm/yy
8. Not used
9. Not used
10. Checksum
uild
A = Autonomous
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
ipb
ROT - Rate of turn

Sh
$--ROT,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--- 3
| +----- 2
+-------- 1
DA
1. Rate of turn, deg/min, "-"=bow turns to port

3. Checksum
N
KA
AP-17
APPENDIX
td.
SSD - UAIS ship static data
$--SSD,c--c,c--c,xxx,xxx,xx,xx,c, aa*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | +--9
| | | | | | | +--- 8
| | | | | | +----- 7
| | | | | +------- 6
| | | | +---------- 5
| | | +-------------- 4
| | +------------------ 3
Co
| +---------------------- 2
+--------------------------- 1
1. Ship's Call Sign, 1 to 7 characters

2. Ship's Name, 1 to 20 characters
3. Pos. ref. point distance, "A," from bow, 0 to 511 Meters
4. Pos. ref. point distance, "B," from stern, 0 to 511 Meters
5. Pos. ref. point distance, "C," from port beam, 0 to 63 Meters
ing
6. Pos. ref. point distance, "D," from starboard beam, 0 to 63 Meters
7. DTE indicator flag
8. Source identifier
9. Checksum
VBW - Dual ground/water speed

uild
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | | | +----- 10
| | | | | | | | +-------- 9
| | | | | | | +----------- 8
ipb
| | | | | | +-------------- 7
| | | | | +----------------- 6
| | | | +-------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------ 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------ 2
Sh
+---------------------------------- 1
1. Not used
2. Not used
3. Not used
4. Longitudinal ground speed, knots
DA
7. Not used
8. Not used
9. Not used
10. Not used
11. Checksum
N
KA
AP-18
APPENDIX
td.
VSD - UAIS voyage static data
$--VSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,c--c,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | +--- 10
| | | | | | | | +------ 9
| | | | | | | +---------- 8
| | | | | | +------------- 7
| | | | | +---------------- 6
| | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------------ 4
Co
| | +----------------------------------- 3
| +--------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------- 1
1. Type of ship and cargo category, 0 to 255

2. Maximum present static draught (Solas Draught), 0 to 25.5 Meters
3. Persons on-board, 0 to 8191
4. Destination, 1-20 characters
ing
5. Estimated UTC of arrival at destination
6. Estimated day of arrival at destination, 00 to 31(UTC)
7. Estimated month of arrival at destination, 00 to 12(UTC)
8. Navigational status, 0 to 15
9. Regional application flags, 0 to 15
10. Checksum
uild
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
ipb
| | | | | | +---+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
| | +--+----------------------- 2
+-+----------------------------- 1

Sh
2. Not used
6. Checksum

A = Autonomous
DA
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
N
KA
AP-19
APPENDIX
td.
Output sentences
ABK - UAIS addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement
., L
$--ABK,xxxxxxxxx,a,x.x,x,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--- 6
| | | | +----- 5
| | | +------- 4
| | +---------- 3
Co
| +------------- 2
+------------------- 1
1. MMSI of the addressed AIS unit

2. AIS channel of reception
3. Message type
4. Message sequence number
5. Type of acknowledgement
ing
6. Checksum
ACA - See “Input sentences.”
ACS - Channel management information source

uild
$--ACS,x,xxxxxxxxx,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
6
5
4
3
2
ipb
2. MMSI of originator
3. UTC at receipt of regional operating settings
4. UTC day, 01- to 31
5. UTC month, 01 to 12
Sh
6. UTC year
ALR - Set alarm state
$--ALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +------------- 6
DA
| | | | +----------------- 5
| | | +-------------------- 4
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1
1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC

N
2. Local alarm number(identifier)

3. Alarm condition(A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded)
4. Alarm’s acknowledge state, A=acknowledged V=unacknowledged
5. Alarm’s description text
KA
6. Checksum
AP-20
APPENDIX
td.
LRF - See “Input sentences.”
LR1 - Long-range reply with destination for function request “A”
., L
$--LR1,x,xxxxxxxxx,xxxxxxxxx,c--c,c--c,xxxxxxxxx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +---- 7
| | | | | +---------- 6
| | | | +----------------- 5
| | | +---------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------ 3
| +---------------------------------------- 2
Co
+---------------------------------------------- 1
1. Sequence Number
2. MMSI of responder
3. MMSI of requestor(reply destination)
4. Ship’s name, 1 to 20 characters
5. Call Sign, 1 to 7 characters
6. IMO Number, 9-digit number
7. Checksum
ing
LR2 - Long-range reply for function requests “B, C, E, and F”
$--LR2,x,xxxxxxxxx,xxxxxxxx,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,T,x.x,N*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 9
| | | | | | | | | | +---+----- 8
uild
| | | | | | | | +--+----------- 7
| | | | | | +----+----------------- 6
| | | | +---+---------------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------------------------ 4
| | +-------------------------------------------------- 3
| +----------------------------------------------------------- 2
+----------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. Sequence Number
ipb
3. Date: ddmmyyyy
4. UTC of Position
5. Latitude - N/S
6. Longitude - E/W
7. Course over ground, degrees True
8. Speed over ground, Knots
9. Checksum
Sh
N DA
KA
AP-21
APPENDIX
td.
LR3 - Long-range reply for function requests “I, O, P, U and W”
$--LR3,x,xxxxxxxxx,c--c,xxxxxx,hhmmss.ss,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | +---- 12
| | | | | | | | | | +------- 11
| | | | | | | | | +---------- 10
| | | | | | | | +-------------- 9
| | | | | | | +------------------ 8
| | | | | | +--------------------- 7
| | | | | +------------------------- 6
| | | | +-------------------------------- 5
Co
| | | +---------------------------------------- 4
| | +---------------------------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------------------------------ 2
+------------------------------------------------------------ 1
1. Sequence Number
3. Voyage destination, 1 to 20 characters
4. ETA Date: ddmmyy
ing
5. ETA Time
6. Draught
7. Ship/cargo(ITU-R M.1371, Table 18)
8. Ship length
9. Ship breadth
10. Ship type(ITUR-R M.1371, Table 18)
11. Persons, 0 to 8191
uild
12. Checksum
TXT - Text transmission

$--TXT,xx,xx,xx,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--- 5
| | | +--+----- 4
ipb
| | +---------- 3
| +------------- 2
+---------------- 1
1. Total number of message, 01 to 99

2. Message number, 01 to 99
3. Text identifier
Sh
4. Text Message
5. Checksum
N DA
KA
AP-22
APPENDIX
td.
VDM - VHF data-link message
!--VDM,x,x,x,a,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| || | | | |
., L
| | | | | | +--- 7
| | | | | +----- 6
| | | | +-------- 5
| | | +------------ 4
| | +-------------- 3
| +---------------- 2
+------------------ 1
Co
3. Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9
4. AIS channel
5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message
7. Checksum
ing
VDO - UAIS VHF data-link own-vessel report
!--VDO,x,x,x,a,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | || | | |
| | | | | | +--- 7
uild
| | | | | +----- 6
| | | | +-------- 5
| | | +------------ 4
| | +-------------- 3
| +---------------- 2
+------------------ 1
ipb

3. Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9
4. AIS channel
5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message
7. Checksum
Sh
N DA
KA
AP-23
APPENDIX
td.
Inland AIS specific sentences
Input sentences
., L
PIWWIVD - Inland waterway voyage data
$PIWWIVD x, x, x, xx.xx, xx.xx, x , xxx, xxxx, xxx, hh<CR><LF>
9
8
Co
7
6
5
4
3
2
ing
1
1. Reporting rate, 0-15 1 to 9

2. No. of blue cones, 0-3, 4=B-Flag, 5=unknown (default)
3. Loaded/unloaded, 1=loaded, 2=unloaded, 0=not available (default)
4. Inland draught, 0.01-20.00(m), 0=unknown (default)
uild
5. Air draught, 0.01-40.00(m), 0=unknown (default)
6. No. of tugboats, 0-6,7=unknown (default)
7. No. of crew members, 0-254, 255=unknown (default)
8. No. of passengers, 0-8190, 8191=unknown (default)
9. No. of shipboard personnel, 0-254, 255=unknown (default)
ipb
PIWWSPW - Inland AIS security password
$PIWWSPW a, x, c - - - c, x, hh<CR><LF>
4
Sh
3
2
1
1. Mode (E: Password input, C: Password change)

2. Password level (1: Maintenance password, 2: User password
3. Password (At least 6 characters)
DA
4. Valid time (0 and 1-60 (s))

N
KA
AP-24
APPENDIX
td.
PIWWSSD - Inland waterway static ship data
$PIWWSSD CCCCCCCC, xxxx, xxxx, xxxx, x, x, x, hh<CR><LF>
., L
7
6
5
4
3
Co
2
1
1. ENI no. (00000000-9999 9999)

2. ERI ship type (0-9999)
3. Length of ship (0.0-800.0(m))
4. Beam of ship (0.0-100.0(m))
ing
5. Quality of speed information (1: High, 0: Low)
6. Quality of course information (1: High, 0: Low)
7. Quality of heading information (1: High, 0: Low)
PIWWVSD - Inland waterway voyage data

uild
$PIWWVSD x, x, x, x, xx.xx, xx.xx, x, xxx, xxxx, xxx, hh<CR><LF>
10
9
8
7
ipb
6
5
4
3
2
Sh
1. Reporting rate. 1: SOLAS reporting rate, 2: 2s, 0:not available (default)

2. Blue sign, 1: Not set, 2: Set, 0: Not available (default)
3. Hazardous cargo 0-3, 4=B-Flag, 5=unknown (default)
4. Loaded/unloaded, 1=loaded, 2=unloaded, 0=not available (default)
DA
5. Static draught, 0.01-20.00(m), 0=unknown (default)

6. Air draught, 0.01-40.00(m), 0=unknown (default)
7. No. of tugboats, 0-6,7=unknown (default)
8. No. of crew members, 0-254, 255=unknown (default)
9. No. of passengers, 0-8190, 8191=unknown (default)
10. No. of shipboard personnel, 0-254, 255=unknown (default)
N
KA
AP-25
APPENDIX
td.
Output sentences
PIWWSPR - Inland AIS security password response
., L
$PIWWSPR a, x, x, x, hh<CR><LF>
4
3
2
1
Co
1. Mode (E: Password input, C: Password change)
2. Password level (1: Maintenance password, 2: User password
3. Valid time (0-60 (s))
4. Status (0: Pass, 1: Fail)
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
AP-26
APPENDIX
td.
VHF Channel List
International mode
., L
Ch No. Freq. Ch No. Freq. Ch No. Freq. Ch No. Freq.
1001 156.05 1088 157.425 277 156.8875 2079 161.575
1002 156.1 1201 156.0625 1278 156.9375 2080 161.625
1003 156.15 1202 156.1125 1279 156.9875 2081 161.675
1004 156.2 1203 156.1625 1280 157.0375 2082 161.725
1005 156.25 1204 156.2125 1281 157.0875 2083 161.775
Co
6 156.3 1205 156.2625 1282 1571375 2084 161.825
1007 156.35 1206 156.3125 1283 157.1875 2085 161.875
1018 156.9 1207 156.3625 1284 157.2375 2086 161.925
1019 156.95 208 156.4125 1285 157.2875 2087 161.975
1020 157 209 156.4625 1286 157.3375 2088 162.025
1021 157.05 210 156.5125 1287 157.3875 2201 160.6625
1022 157.1 211 156.5625 2001 160.65 2202 160.7125
1023 157.15 212 156.6125 2002 160.7 2203 160.7625
ing
1024 157.2 213 156.6625 2003 160.75 2204 160.8125
1025 157.25 214 156.7125 2004 160.8 2205 160.8625
1026 157.3 215 156.7625 2005 160.85 2206 160.9125
1027 157.35 216 156.8125 2007 160.95 2207 160.9625
1028 157.4 217 156.8625 8 156.4 2218 161.5125
uild
1060 156.025 1218 156.9125 9 156.45 2219 161.5625
1061 156.075 1219 156.9625 10 156.5 2220 161.6125
1062 156.125 1220 157.0125 11 156.55 2221 161.6625
1063 156.175 1221 157.0625 12 156.6 2222 161.7125
1064 156.225 1222 157.1125 13 156.65 2223 161.7625
1065 156.275 1223 157.1625 14 156.7 2224 161.8125
1066 156.325 1224 157.2125 15 156.75 2225 161.8625
ipb
67 156.375 1225 157.2625 16 156.8 2226 161.9125

68 156.425 1226 157.3125 17 156.85 2227 161.9625
69 156.475 1227 157.3625 2018 161.5 2228 162.0125
70 156.525 1228 157.4125 2019 161.55 2260 160.6375
71 156.575 1260 156.0375 2020 161.6 2261 160.6875
72 156.625 1261 156.0875 2021 161.65 2262 160.7375
Sh
73 156.675 1262 156.1375 2022 161.7 2263 160.7875

74 156.725 1263 156.1875 2023 161.75 2264 160.8375
75 156.775 1264 156.2375 2024 161.8 2265 160.8875
76 156.825 1265 156.2875 2025 161.85 2266 160.9375
77 156.875 1266 156.3375 2026 161.9 2278 161.5375
1078 156.925 267 156.3875 2027 161.95 2279 161.5875
1079 156.975 268 156.4375 2028 162 2280 161.6375
DA
1080 157.025 269 156.4875 2060 160.625 2281 161.6875

1081 157.075 270 156.5375 2061 160.675 2282 161.7375
1082 157.125 271 156.5875 2062 160.725 2283 161.7875
1083 157.175 272 156.6375 2063 160.775 2284 161.8375
1084 157.225 273 156.6875 2064 160.825 2285 161.8875
1085 157.275 274 156.7375 2065 160.875 2286 161.9375
N
1086 157.325 275 156.7875 2066 160.925 2287 161.9875

1087 157.375 276 156.8375 2078 161.525
KA
AP-27
APPENDIX
td.
USA mode
Ch No. Freq. Ch No. Freq. Ch No. Freq. Ch No. Freq.
1001 156.05 1088 157.425 277 156.8875 2079 161.575
., L
1201 156.0625 1278 156.9375 2080 161.625
1003 156.15 1202 156.1125 1279 156.9875 2081 161.675
1203 156.1625 1280 157.0375 2082 161.725
1005 156.25 1204 156.2125 1281 157.0875 2083 161.775
6 156.3 1205 156.2625 1282 157.1375 2084 161.825
1007 156.35 1206 156.3125 1283 157.1875 2085 161.875
Co
1018 156.9 1207 156.3625 1284 157.2375 2086 161.925
1019 156.95 208 156.4125 1285 157.2875 2087 161.975
1020 157 209 156.4625 1286 157.3375 2088 162.025
1021 157.05 210 156.5125 1287 157.3875 2201 160.6625
1022 157.1 211 156.5625 2001 160.65 2202 160.7125
1023 157.15 212 156.6125 2002 160.7 2203 160.7625
1024 157.2 213 156.6625 2003 160.75 2204 160.8125
1025 157.25 214 156.7125 2004 160.8 2205 160.8625
ing
1026 157.3 215 156.7625 2005 160.85 2206 160.9125
1027 157.35 216 156.8125 2007 160.95 2207 160.9625
1028 157.4 217 156.8625 8 156.4 2218 161.5125
1218 156.9125 9 156.45 2219 161.5625
1061 156.075 1219 156.9625 10 156.5 2220 161.6125
uild
1220 157.0125 11 156.55 2221 161.6625
1063 156.175 1221 157.0625 12 156.6 2222 161.7125
1064 156.225 1222 157.1125 13 156.65 2223 161.7625
1065 156.275 1223 157.1625 14 156.7 2224 161.8125
1066 156.325 1224 157.2125 15 156.75 2225 161.8625
67 156.375 1225 157.2625 16 156.8 2226 161.9125
68 156.425 1226 157.3125 17 156.85 2227 161.9625
ipb
69 156.475 1227 157.3625 2018 161.5 2228 162.0125

70 156.525 1228 157.4125 2019 161.55 2260 160.6375
71 156.575 1260 156.0375 2020 161.6 2261 160.6875
72 156.625 1261 156.0875 2021 161.65 2262 160.7375
73 156.675 1262 156.1375 2022 161.7 2263 160.7875
74 156.725 1263 156.1875 2023 161.75 2264 160.8375
Sh
75 156.775 1264 156.2375 2024 161.8 2265 160.8875

76 156.825 1265 156.2875 2025 161.85 2266 160.9375
77 156.875 1266 156.3375 2026 161.9 2278 161.5375
1078 156.925 267 156.3875 2027 161.95 2279 161.5875
1079 156.975 268 156.4375 2028 162 2280 161.6375
1080 157.025 269 156.4875 2060 160.625 2281 161.6875
1081 157.075 270 156.5375 2061 160.675 2282 161.7375
DA
1082 157.125 271 156.5875 2062 160.725 2283 161.7875

1083 157.175 272 156.6375 2063 160.775 2284 161.8375
1084 157.225 273 156.6875 2064 160.825 2285 161.8875
1085 157.275 274 156.7375 2065 160.875 2286 161.9375
1086 157.325 275 156.7875 2066 160.925 2287 161.9875
1087 157.375 276 156.8375 2078 161.525
N
1 W power on CH13 and CH67.

KA
AP-28
APPENDIX
td.
ERI Codes
ERI code AIS code
Full First Second
U Ship name (EN)
code digit digit
., L
8000 No VESSEL., TYPE UNKNOWN 99
8010 V MOTOR FREIGHTER 79
8020 V MOTOR TANKER 89
8021 V MOTOR TANKER, LIQUID CARGO, TYPE N 80
8022 V MOTOR TANKER, LIQUID CARGO, TYPE C 80
8023 V MOTOR TANKER, DRY CARGO AS IF LIQUID (E.G.CEMENT) 89
8030 V CONTAINER VESSEL 79
8040 V GAS TANKER 80
Co
8050 C MOTOR FREIGHTER, TUG 79
8060 C MOTOR TANKER, TUG 89
8070 C MOTOR FREIGHTER WITH ONE OR MORE SHIPS ALONGSIDE 79
8080 C MOTOR FREIGHTER WITH TANKER 89
8090 C MOTOR FREIGHTER PUSHING ONE OR MORE FREIGHTERS 79
8100 C MOTOR FREIGHTER PUSHING AT LEAST ONE TANK-SHIP 89
8110 No TUG, FREIGHTER 79
8120 No TUG, TANKER 89
8130 C TUG, FREIGHTER, COUPLED 31
8140 C TUG, FREIGHTER/TANKER, COUPLED 31
ing
8150 V FREIGHTBARGE 99
8160 V TANKBARGE 99
8161 V TANKBARGE, LIQUID CARGO , TYPE N 90
8162 V TANKBARGE, LIQUID CARGO , TYPE C 90
8163 V TANKBARGE, DRY CARGO AS IF LIQUID (E.G.CEMENT) 99
8170 V FREIGHTBARGE WITH CONTAINERS 89
8180 V TANKBARGE, GAS 90
8210 C PUSHTOW, ONE CARGO BARGE 79
uild
8220 C PUSHTOW, TWO CARGO BARGES 79
8230 C PUSHTOW, THREE CARGO BARGES 79
8240 C PUSHTOW, FOUR CARGO BARGES 79
8250 C PUSHTOW, FIVE CARGO BARGES 79
8260 C PUSHTOW, SIX CARGO BARGES 79
8270 C PUSHTOW, SEVEN CARGO BARGES 79
8280 C PUSHTOW, EIGTH CARGO BARGES 79
8290 C PUSHTOW, NINE OR MORE BARGES 79
8310 C PUSHTOW, ONE TANK / GAS BARGE 80
8320 C PUSHTOW, 2 BARGES AT LEAST ONE TANKER/GAS BARGE 80
ipb

8390 C PUSHTOW、9 OR MORE BARGES AT LEAST ONE TANKER/GAS BARGE 80
8400 V TUG, SINGLE 52
Sh
8410 No TUG, ONE OR MORE TOWS 31

8420 C TUG, ASSISTING A VESSEL OR LINKED COMBINATION 31
8430 V PUSHBOAT, SINGLE 99
8440 V PASSENGER SHIP, FERRY, CRUISE SHIP, RED CROSS SHIP 69
8441 V FERRY 69
8442 V RED CROSS SHIP 58
8443 V CRUISE SHIP 69
8444 V PASSENGER SHIP WITHOUT ACCOMODATION 69
8450 V SERVICE VESSEL, POLICE PATROL, PORT SERVICE 99
DA
VESSEL, WORK MAINTAINANCE CRAFT, FLOATING DERRICK, CABLE

8460 V SHIP, BUOY SHIP, DREDGE 33
8470 C OBJECT, TOWED, NOT OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 99
8480 V FISHING BOAT 30
8490 V BUNKERSHIP 99
8500 V BARGE, TANKER, CHEMICAL 80
8510 C OBJECT, NOT OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 99
1500 V GENERAL CARGO VESSEL MARITIME 79
1510 V UNIT CARRIER MARITIME 79
N
1520 V BULK CARRIER MARITIME 79

1530 V TANKER 80
1540 V LIQUIFIED GAS TANKER 80
1850 V PLEASURE CRAFT, LONGER THAN 20 METRES 37
KA
1900 V FAST SHIP 49

1910 V HYDROFOIL 49
AP-29
APPENDIX
td.
Terminology, Units, Symbols
Terminology
., L
Abbreviation Meaning
2D Two Dimensional Positioning
3D Three Dimensional Positioning
ABM Addressed Binary Message
ADRS Address
AIS Automatic Identification System
Co
ALARM Alarm
ALT Altitude
ANT Antenna
APR April
AtoN Aids To Navigation
AUG August
AUTO Automatic
ing
AVAIL Available
BRG Bearing
CH Channel
CHG Change
CLR Clear
uild
CNCL Cancel
COG Course Over the Ground
CONT Contrast
CPA Closest Point of Approach
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRS Course
D2D Differential and 2D
ipb
D3D Differential and 3D

DATE Date
DAY Day
DECR Decrease
DEL Delete
DEST Destination
Sh
DG Dangerous Goods
DGNSS Differential GNSS
DGPS Differential GPS
DIM Dimmer
DISP Display
DNG Danger
DA
DNGR Danger
DOP Dilution Of Precision
DPTH Depth
DSC Digital Selective Calling
DTL Detail
E East
N
E.G for example

EMMA European Multiservice Meteorological Awareness system
ENI Unique European Vessel Identification Number
ENT Enter
KA
EPFS Electronic Position Fixing System
AP-30
APPENDIX
td.
ERI Electronic Reporting International
ERR Error
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
EXT External
., L
FEB February
FIX Fix
FULL Full
GND Ground
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
Co
H High
HDG Heading
HECT Hectometer
HI High
HS Harmful Substances (applies to AIS)
HW Hardware
I/O Input/Output
ing
ID Identification
IF Interface
IFM International Function Message
IMO International Maritime Organization
INFO Information
uild
INT Internal
INTRD Intrude
JAN January
JUL July
JUN June
L Low, left
L/L Latitude/Longitude
ipb
LAT Latitude
LEN Length
LOG Log
LON Longitude
LR Long Range
MAR March
Sh
MAX Maximum
MAY May
MENU Menu
MIN Minimum
MKD Minimum Keyboard Display
MMSI Maritime Mobile Services Identity number
DA
MOT Mother Board

MP Maritime Pollutant (applies to AIS)
MSG Message
N North
NAV Navigation
NO. Number
N
NOV November
OCT October
OFF Off
KA
ON On
PA Position Accuracy
AP-31
APPENDIX
td.
PI Presentation Interface, Position Indicator
PORT Port
POSN Position
PWR Power
., L
R Right
R/B Range / Bearing
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
RAIN Rain
RAM Random Access Memory
REF Reference
Co
RFM Regional Function Message
RNG Range
ROM Read Only Memory
ROT Rate Of Turn
RTA Requested Time of Arrival
RX Receive
S South
ing
S/C SOG/COG
SAR Search And Rescue
SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic RAM
SEL Select
SEP September
uild
SET Set (i.e., set and drift, or setting a value)
SIM Simulation
SOG Speed Over the Ground
SOLAS Safety Of Life At Sea
SPD Speed
STS Status
ipb
SW Switch
SYM Symbol(s)
TCPA Time to CPA
TEST Test
TGT Target
TIME Time
Sh
TOW Vessel Engaged in Towing Operations

TX Transmit
UN/LOADED LOADED or UNLOADED
UTC Universal Coordinated Time
WARNING Warning
WAT Water
DA
WIG Wing In Ground

N
KA
AP-32
APPENDIX
td.
Units
Abbreviation Unit
° degree(s)
., L
cm centimeter
km kilometer
kn knot(s)
m meter
min minute(s)
Co
NM Nautical Mile(s)
s second(s)
Symbols
ing
uild
Icons
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
AP-33
APPENDIX
td.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
AP-34
FURUNO
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF U-AIS TRANSPONDER
FA-150
., L
1 TRANSPONDER UNIT
1.1 TX/RX frequency 156.025 MHz to 162.025 MHz
1.2 Output power 1W or 12.5 W selectable
1.3 Impedance 50 ohms
Co
1.4 DSC receiver CH70 fixed, 156.525 MHz, G2B, 1200 bps
1.5 Bandwidth 25 kHz/ 12.5 kHz
2 MONITOR UNIT
2.1 Display 4.5-inch, monochrome LCD
ing
2.2 Display size 60 (H) x 95 (W) mm, 120 x 64 dots
3 GPS RECEIVER
uild
3.3 Number of channel 12 channels parallel, 12 satellites
3.4 Position fixing method All in view, 8-state Kalman filter
3.5 Accuracy
GPS 10 m approx, 95% of the time, (HDOP ≤ 4)
DGPS 5 m approx, 95% of the time
ipb

3.7 Position-fixing time Warm start: 36 s, Cold start: 43 s
3.8 Position update interval 1 second typical
3.9 DGPS data receiving RTCM SC-104 ver-2.1
Sh
4 INTERFACE
4.1 Navigation I/O 4 ports, IEC 61162-1(Jul-00) or 61162-2(Sep-98)
Input VSD, SSD, ABM, BBM, ACA, ACK, AIR, DTM, GBS, GGA, GLL,
GNS, HDT, LRF, LRI, OSD, RMC, ROT, VBW, VTG
DA
Output VDM, VDO, ABK, ACA, ALR, TXT, LR1, LR2, LR3, LRF, LRI
4.2 Sensor input IEC 61162-1(Jul-00): 3 ports and 61162-2(Sep-98): 3 ports
DTM, GNS, GLL, GGA, RMC, VBW, VTG, OSD, HDT, GBS, ROT
4.3 External beacon or PC RS-232C
4.4 Heading sensor AD-10 format
N
4.5 Alarm output Contact closure

4.6 Bluesign input Contact closure
KA
SP-1 E4431S01H
FURUNO
td.
5 POWER SUPPLY
5.1 Transponder unit 12-24 VDC: 7-3.5 A
5.2 Monitor unit 12-24 VDC: 0.3-0.15 A
., L
5.3 AC/DC power supply unit (PR-240, option)
100-115/200-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
Co
GPS/VHF antenna -25°C to +55°C (storage: -25°C to +70°C)
Other units -15°C to +55°C
GPS/VHF antenna IPX6
ing
Transponder unit IP20
Monitor unit IP22
uild
7 COATING COLOR
7.1 GPS antenna N9.5
7.2 Transponder unit N3.0
7.3 Monitor unit Panel: N3.0, Chassis: 2.5GY5/1.5
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
SP-2 E4431S01H
td.
INDEX
., L
A base station.............................................. 1-18
AIS-SART test indication .............................. 3-14 mobile class A (class A AIS) ..................... 1-16
Alarm status.................................................... 3-8 mobile class B .......................................... 1-17
Alarm status display ..................................... 1-24 SAR .......................................................... 1-18
Initial settings
B class A...................................................... 1-37
Co
Breaker reset .................................................. 3-2 Inland AIS................................................. 2-26
Buzzer........................................................... 1-34 Inland AIS
C activating .................................................... 2-1
details display........................................... 2-11
Channels
dynamic data............................................ 2-10
setting ....................................................... 1-31
EMMA warning message ......................... 2-21
viewing...................................................... 1-30
ETA message ........................................... 2-15
Contrast .......................................................... 1-4
ing
mode .......................................................... 2-2
Controls .......................................................... 1-1
no. of persons message........................... 2-19
CPA/TCPA .................................................... 1-11
RTA message ........................................... 2-18
D RX logs..................................................... 2-25
Dangerous (target) list .................................. 1-22 static data ................................................... 2-8
Default settings............................................. 3-13 text message............................................ 2-13
uild
Details display TX logs ..................................................... 2-24
mobile class A (inland AIS) ....................... 2-11 voyage related data.................................... 2-3
Diagnostics water level message ................................ 2-23
GPS test (transponder) .............................. 3-6
memory test (transponder) ......................... 3-5
K
Key beep ...................................................... 1-34
monitor unit test.......................................... 3-3
power on/off history .................................... 3-7 L
ipb
TX on/off history ......................................... 3-7 Long range mode ......................................... 1-35

Digital interface ............................................ AP-8
DIM key........................................................... 1-4 M
Dimmer ........................................................... 1-4 Maintenance................................................... 3-1
DISP key....................................................... 1-12 Memory clear................................................ 3-13
Dynamic data Memory test (transponder)............................. 3-5
MENU key ...................................................... 1-5
Sh
class A ...................................................... 1-24

inland AIS ................................................. 2-10 Menu tree .................................................... AP-1
Messages
E EMMA warning (inland AIS) ..................... 2-21
EMMA warning message (inland AIS) .......... 2-21 ETA (inland AIS) ....................................... 2-15
ERI codes .................................................. AP-29 no. of persons (inland AIS)....................... 2-19
Error messages .............................................. 3-9 receive message pop-up window............. 1-28
ETA message (inland AIS)............................ 2-15 receiving (class A) .................................... 1-27
DA
F receiving (inland AIS) ............................... 2-25

RTA (Inland AIS)....................................... 2-18
Fuse replacement........................................... 3-2
text, class A .............................................. 1-25
G text, inland AIS ......................................... 2-13
GPS monitor ................................................. 3-11 water level (inland AIS) ............................ 2-23
GPS test (transponder)................................... 3-6 Monitor unit test.............................................. 3-3
N
I N
Info display NAV STATUS key .................................... 1-7, 2-3
AIS-SART ................................................. 1-19 No. of persons message (inland AIS)........... 2-19
KA
AtoN.......................................................... 1-20
IN-1
INDEX
td.
P
Parts location ............................................... AP-6
Plotter display ...............................................1-13
Power on/off....................................................1-2
., L
Power on/off history ........................................3-7
Program number record....................................vii
PWR key.........................................................1-2
R
RTA message (Inland AIS)............................2-18
RX logs
Co
class A ......................................................1-29
inland AIS .................................................2-25
S
Sensor status................................................3-12
Static data
class A AIS................................................1-22
Inland AIS ...................................................2-8
ing
System configuration ........................................ vi
System messages ..........................................3-9
System overview..............................................viii
T
Target list ......................................................1-15
uild
Terminology ............................................... AP-30
Text message
class A ......................................................1-25
inland AIS .................................................2-13
Transponder test.............................................3-5
Troubleshooting ..............................................3-3
TX logs
ipb
class A ......................................................1-29
inland AIS .................................................2-24
TX on/off history..............................................3-7
V
VHF channel list......................................... AP-27
Voyage-related data
Sh
class A ........................................................1-7
Inland AIS ...................................................2-3
W
Water level message (Inland AIS) ................2-23
N DA
KA
IN-2
KA
ND
AS
hip
bui
lding
Co
., L
td.
.
Ltd
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
.,
Co
DOPPLER SPEED LOG
lding
MODEL DS-80
bui
hip
AS
ND
KA
www.furuno.co.jp
td.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb

Sh
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200
DA
All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : FEB . 2000

N1 : APR . 26, 2010
Pub. No. OME-72470-N1
(TATA ) DS-80 *00080889612*
N
*00080889612*
* 0 0 0 8 0 8 8 9 6 1 2 *
KA
td.
IMPORTANT NOTICES
., L
General
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual.
Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
Co
ing
uild

Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For
disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance
(http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal.
ipb

Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery(ies), see
the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery(ies) is used.
Sh
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of

batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash
site. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site
according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive
Cd
2006/66/EU.
DA
In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that
Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled.
Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to
local laws.
Ni-Cd Pb
N

There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols
KA
can increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the future.
i
td.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
., L
WARNING CAUTION
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the equipment for other than
Do not open the equipment. its intended purpose.
Only qualified personnel Improper use of the equipment can result
Co
should work inside the in personal injury or equipment damage.
equipment.
Turn off the equipment immediately if
Immediately turn off the power at the you feel it is abnormal.
equipment or an object is dropped into Turn off the power from the switchboard if
the equipment. the equipment is emitting strange noises
or becomes excessively hot. Contact your
ing
Continued use of the equipment can cause dealer for advice.
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO
agent for service. The useable ambient temperature range
is 15°C to 55°C.
Do not place liquid-filled containers on
the top of the equipment. Do not use the equipment out of the
above temperature range.
uild
Fire or electrical shock can result if the
liquid spills into the equipment. Do not place objects around the
equipment.
Do not disassemble or modify the
equipment. Overheating may result.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can Do not power the equipment when the
result. transducer is in air.
ipb
Keep the equipment away from rain The transducer may become damaged.
and water splash.
Handle all units carefully.
Fire or electrical shock can result if the
rain or water gets into the equipment. Damage can lead to corrosion.
Do not operate the equipment with wet Do not use chemical cleaners such as
Sh
hands. alcohol, acetone and benzine to clean

the equipment.
Electrical shock can result.
Chemical cleaners can remove paint and
Keep heater away from equipment. markings. Use only a soft, dry cloth. For
stubborn dirt, use a soft cloth moistened
A heater can melt the equipment's power with water-diluted mild detergent.
cord, which can cause fire or electrical
DA
shock. When dry docked remove marine life

from the transducer.
Remove marine life to maintain good
Fuse rating is shown on the equipment. sensitivity.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
to the equipment. Do not paint the transducer face.
N
Further, handle the transducer with

care.
Paint will affect equipment performance.

KA
ii
td.
WARNING LABEL
A warning label is attached to the
Distributor, Transceiver and Terminal
Box. Do not remove the labels. If a
label is missing or is illegible, contact
., L
a FURUNO dealer or agent about
replacement.
WARNING Name: Warning Label (1)
remove cover. No user-serviceable Code No.: 100-236-230
parts inside.
Co
RECORD OF MODIFICATIONS IN THIS OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Outline of changes in
Pub No. Software (Prog. No.)
ing
Operator’s Manual
Publicized for submission to type 03I-02J-02K
test BSH (DS-800, DS-801,
Apr/2000 DS-810)
Publicized for submission to type 6550100003I (DS-800)
uild
test BSH 6550110003J (DS-801)
June/2000 6550120003K
(DS-810)
Modified to conform to IEC DS-800: 6550101003
61162-1 Edition 2 DS-801: 6550110003
2002/4 DS-810: 6550120003
ipb
Modified to conform to IEC62288 DS-800: 6550101-004 Modified abbreviations kn,

Mar. 2010 NM, SIM
Sh
N DA
KA
iii
td.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFICATIONS....................... SP-1 2 OPERATION OF OPTIONAL
., L
EQUIPMENT .............................. 12
FOREWORD ..................................... 1 2.1 Digital Indicator DS-830, Distance
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION............. 2 Indicator DS-840............................ 12
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ........... 3
Co
REMARKS ON USAGE .................... 4 3 MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING ............... 14
1 OPERATION OF DISPLAY UNIT . 5 3.1 Maintenance .................................. 14
1.1 Controls ............................................5 3.2 Troubleshooting ............................. 15
1.2 Turning the Power On/Off .................5 3.3 Diagnostics, Checking

Program Number ........................... 16
ing
1.3 Adjusting Contrast, Panel Dimmer....6
1.4 Selecting a Display ...........................6
1.5 Main Menu Operation .......................7 4 DIGITAL INTERFACE
1.6 Distance Run Operation ...................7 (IEC 61162-1 Edition 2) ............. 17
1.7 System Setting..................................9 4.1 I/O Sentences ................................ 17
uild
1.8 Simulation Mode .............................11 4.2 Sentence Description..................... 20
5 PARTS LOCATION AND

PARTS LIST ............................... 23
Parts Location ...................................... 23
ipb
Parts List .............................................. 25
CALIBRATION SHEET ................... 29

MENU OVERVIEW.......................... 30
Sh
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS............. 31
INDEX......................................Index-1
Declaration of conformity
N DA
KA
iv
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF THE DOPPLER SPEED LOG
DS-80
., L
1. GENERAL
(1) Speed Range Fore-Aft: -10.0 to +40 knots through-the-water
(2) Distance Run 0.00 to 999,999.99 nautical miles through-the-water
(3) Working Depth Water depth greater than 3 m beneath the keel.
Co
(4) Working Frequency 1.0 MHz
(5) Speed Accuracy 1.0% or 0.1 knots whichever is the greater
(6) Distance Accuracy 1.0% or 0.1 NM whichever is the greater
Note: Accuracy is subject to shallow water effects, to the effect of wind, current and tide, and
sensor location. Any ultrasonic equipment having the same frequency may interfere with
speed measurement. The Doppler Log transducer should be installed apart from the
ing
transducers of such kind of equipment.
2. DISPLAY UNIT
(1) Display Character size 15 or 21 mm H on monochrome LCD
uild
Nominal viewing distance: 0.5 m
(2) Indication
Ship’s speed Fore: c**.* knots (+40.0 kn max.)
Aft: d**.* knots (-10.0 kn max.)
Distance run ******.** NM
ipb
(3) Other Function Diagnostic check

(4) Backlight Setting frequency: 1.2 kHz
Control: Duty cycle of ON-OFF time
3. DIGITAL INTERFACE
Sh
(1) Serial Signal

Output: 2 ports; VBW, VLW in IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183 Ver 2.0)
Input: 1 port; IEC 61162 (NMEA 0183 Ver 2.0)
(2) Analog Signal Speed signal for Analog display: 2 port
-3.3 mA to 10 mA/ -10 kn to +30 kn
DA
Analog current output: 1 port

4 mA to 20 mA/ -10 kn to 30 kn
Analog voltage output: 1 port
-3.3 V to 10 V/ -10 kn to 30 kn
(3) Distance run output 2 ports; Contact closure each 0.005 nm, forward speed,
N
30 VDC: 0.4 A
(4) System Check signal 1 port, 30 VDC: 0.2 A, default: closed
KA
09/12/18 SP - 1
td.
4. POWER SUPPLY
(1) System Source 100/110/115/200/220/230 VAC:1.5/0.7 A max., 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
., L
5. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION (IEC 60945)
(1) Ambient Temperature -15°C to +55°C (units for protected area)
Analog display: 0°C to +50°C
(2) Relative Humidity 95% at 40°C
Co
(3) Vibration IEC 60945 adopted
(4) Category of Equipment
Display Unit/Distance indicator/Transceiver Unit:
For protected area
Transducer: For submerged use, 600 kPa x 12 h
Distributor/Terminal box: For protected area
ing
6. COATING COLOR
(1) Display Unit Cover: Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray), Panel: N3.0 (gray)
(2) Distribution Box Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray)
uild
(3) Transceiver Unit Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray)
(4) Terminal Box Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray)
(5) Analog Display Munsell 2.5GY5/1.5 (light gray)
7. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE

ipb
(1) Display Unit/Digital Indicator/Digital Distance Indicator

Standard: 0.50 m, Steering: 0.40 m
(2) Transceiver Unit Standard: 2.05 m, Steering: 1.40 m
(3) Distribution Box Standard: 3.10 m, Steering: 2.10 m
(4) Terminal Box Standard: 0.65 m, Steering: 0.45 m
Sh
SAFETY PRECAUTION
- There is no unit giving rise to a dose rate > 0.5 mrem/h at 50 mm.
- There is no harmful radiation from the screen.
- All units of this equipment comply with EMC requirements in IEC 60945, as required by IMO
DA
Res. A.813 (19).
Note
- This equipment is not affected by magnetic fields.
- This equipment does not use video signals.
N
- This equipment complies with IEC 61023 standards for display resolution.
KA
09/12/18 SP - 2
td.
FOREWORD
Foreword Features
., L
Thank you for purchasing the FURUNO The FURUNO DS-80 displays ship’s speed
DS-80 Doppler Speed Log. We are relative to water, using the Doppler
confident you will discover why FURUNO principle; ship’s speed is measured by
has become synonymous with quality and detecting the Doppler shift frequency from
Co
reliability. the signal returned from the watermass.
Dedicated in the design and manufacture of The output is interfaced with ARPA, AIS,
marine electronics equipment for half a and other shipborne equipment in IEC
century, FURUNO Electric Company has 61162-1 format.
gained an unrivaled reputation as a world
The main features of the DS-80 are
leader in the industry. This is the result of
ing
our technical excellence as well as our • Simple operation. In most cases all that
worldwide distribution and service network. is required to display ship’s speed is to
turn on the equipment.
Please carefully read and follow the safety
• Pair-beam system effectively reduces
information and operating and maintenance
error caused by pitching. The transducer
uild
instructions set forth in this manual before
assembly symmetrically emits two sonic
attempting to operate the equipment and
beams, one fore and the other aft. By
conduct any maintenance. Your Doppler
averaging the Doppler shift in both
speed log will perform to the utmost of its
directions accurate speed data is
ability only if it is operated and maintained
available under rough sea conditions.
in accordance with the correct procedures.
ipb
• Speed and distance information on the

This equipment is designed, produced and
adjustable-contrast LCD display.
documented by FURUNO Electric Co., Ltd.,
• Analog display, digital Indicator and
complying with ISO 9001 standards as
digital distance indicator display
certified by the Lloyd’s Register of Quality
optionally available.
Sh
Assurance System.
• Conforms to the following standards: IMO
A.824(19), as amended by MSC.97(72),
IMO A.694(17), IEC 61023, IEC 60945
(3rd edition), IEC 61162-1 (2nd edition)..
N DA
KA
1
td.
., L
DISPLAY UNIT
DS-800
Co
ANALOG INDICATOR MF-22A,
TERMINAL BOX FL-200S, SL-200
DS-802
DIMMER MF-22L-1/MF-22L-2
ing
IEC 61162-1 Input
(Navigational equipment, GGA, VTG, VBW)
Power ON SW Signal
DISTRIBUTION BOX Distance Run Signal
DS-801 IEC 61162-1 Output
uild
DIMMER MF22L-1/MF22-2
JUNCTION BOX TERMINAL BOX DIGITAL INDICATOR DS-830

CI-630 DS-802 DISTANCE INDICATOR DS-840
ipb
SHIP'S MAINS
115 VAC or 230 VAC
TRANSCEIVER
1φ, 50/60 Hz
UNIT DS-810
: STANDARD SUPPLY
Sh
: OPTIONAL SUPPLY
TRANSDUCER
DS-820 : LOCAL SUPPLY
N DA
KA
2
td.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The Doppler speed log measures ship's The relative motion causes the Doppler
., L
speed by using the Doppler Effect, which is shift and the ultrasonic waves reflected at
observed as a frequency shift resulting from the watermass (plankton or any underwater
relative motion between a transmitter and objects) are received at the frequency of fr
receiver or reflector of acoustic or = fo + fd where fd is the number of
electro-magnetic energy. A common frequency shifts counted at the receiver
Co
example of the Doppler Effect is a train. circuit. To calculate ship’s speed, the
When a train is approaching, the whistle following formula is used.
has a higher pitch than normal. You can
hear the change in pitch as the train V = fd/fo • c/2sinθ
passes. c: Underwater velocity
ing
The DS-80 has a pair-beam, one directed Note that the sound velocity in water
in the fore direction and the other in the aft changes with water temperature and water
direction, which emits ultrasonic waves at pressure but the DS-80 readout is
an angle of θ to the waterline towards ship’s automatically compensated for change by
fore and aft directions. The frequency of the using a temperature sensor.
uild
received signal is then compared with that V
of the transmitted frequency to measure
doppler shift to calculate ship’s speed. SEA
SURFACE
ipb
θ fo
fr = fo + fd
WATERMASS
Sh
N DA
KA
3
td.
REMARKS ON USAGE
Remarks on Usage The accuracy will not be affected by:
., L
The DS-80 measures ship’s speed by • - water temperature (sound velocity)
detecting the Doppler shift frequency of the • salinity
echo reflected by a watermass (water layer
• pitch/roll ±10°
containing plankton and other
Co
micro-organisms) located within the
measuring area, which is usually about 2 m. Beware of Transducer
In some instances, however, no signal is Location
returned because of too few plankton in the The transducer may be damaged if it hits
sensing depths. This phenomenon can the dry dock blocks. Take the following
occur in particular areas in particular measures to prevent damage to the
ing
seasons. The probable cause is the transducer.
plankton are lying in deep water because 1. Before delivering the ship, draw up a
an ice-melted cold water mass covers the suitable docking plan taking into
sea surface. Similar cases may also occur account the dimensions and location of
in a freshwater lake. Under these the transducer. Store the plans onboard
uild
circumstances the DS-80 will not show the the ship.
correct ship’s speed.
2. Place the dry dock blocks according to
the plan.
Conditions Affecting the
3. Have a diver check the position
Accuracy
between the transducer and the blocks
ipb
(with ref to IMO A.824/3.3)

before removing the water. Confirm that
The Doppler speed log DS-80 is designed for
the transducer will not touch the blocks.
reliable and accurate performance through
FURUNO’s long experience and advanced
technology. It operates on the best choice of
Sh
system frequency and power output. As far

as the sonic energy is used, the performance
(accuracy) may be reduced or even lost
under:
• rough weather (may be sea state 6 or
DA
severer)
• improper location of sensor, e.g., too close
to the propeller, thrusters, drain tubes,
echo sounder transducer
• depth under the keel if less than 3 m
N
KA
4
td.
1 OPERATION OF DISPLAY UNIT
1.1 Controls
., L
Omnipad
Co
Selects items, options
on menus.
Opens/closes the menu. MENU ENT Registers options on menus.
ing
Selects display; speed DISP DIM Adjusts panel illumination.
plus distance or speed.
Adjusts LCD contrast.

*
uild
DS-80 PWR Turns power on/off.
1.2 Turning the Power On/Off

ipb
Note: STW means Speed Through Water. This

1.2.1 Power on
indication flashes when transducer temperature,
which can be monitored on the TEST display
Press the [POWER] switch to turn on the
(see page 16), is abnormal. This means speed
equipment. The last-used display appears.
accuracy is less than stated in the
The example below shows the speed and
Sh
specifications.
distance run.
SPEED STW *
S 1.2.2 Power off
DISTANCE
10.0 kn
Speed
Press the [POWER] switch to turn the

12.50 Distance power off.
DA
NM Run
Note: Keep the DS-80 energized
*: Bar mark rotates at normal condition. continuously unless it fails. Turning off the
If the equipment freezes, it stops. DS-80 may cause an inconvenience in
associated equipment, such as a radar.
N
KA
5
td.
1.3 Adjusting Contrast, Panel 1.4 Selecting a Display
Dimmer Press the [DISP] key to select display
1.3.1 Contrast desired. Each time the key is pressed the
., L
display shows speed and distance run or
1. Press the [*] key to open the contrast speed alone as below.
adjustment dialog box.
SPEED STW
DISTANCE
S
10.0 kn
Speed
Co
SPEED INDICATOR
12.50NM
Distance
Run
2. Press the Omnipad at or to adjust
the contrast. The setting range is 0 to
[DISP] key
63 and the default setting is 48.
to switch
3. Press the [ENT] key.
ing
SPEED STW
Note: The contrast is automatically set to
default (48) when the power is turned on.
1.3.2 Panel dimmer

S
10.0
kn
uild
SPEED INDICATOR
1. Press the [DIM] key to show the
dimmer adjustment dialog box.
• Arrow indicates direction: indicates
DIMMER (1~8) fore; , aft.
7 • The distance run indication shows the
EXIT: [ENT] total distance run in forward speed only.
ipb
• The distance run is backed up when the

2. Press the Omnipad at or to adjust
power is turned off.
the dimmer. The setting range is 1 to 8
and the default setting is 4. Note: Speed error may occur in rough seas
3. Press the [ENT] key to conclude. because of air bubbles, etc.
Sh
When speed error occurs, the speed

Note: The [DIM] key is inoperative when indication freezes, and “kn” is highlighted
dimmer is controlled externally. and blinks. If speed error continues more
than 30 seconds, the speed indication
changes to **.*.
N DA
KA
6
td.
1.5 Main Menu Operation 5. Press the [MENU] key twice to close
the menu. (Some menus require only a
Functions of the DS-80 are selected
single pressing of the [MENU] key.)
through the menu.
., L
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the To enter numerical data
menu.
Some menus require input of numeric data.
MENU This is done with the Omnipad.
DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY
1. Select the digit or sign (+ or -) to
SIM
Co
SYSTEM MENU change with or on the Omnipad.
SYSTEM MENU2 (The cursor shows the digit or sign
selected.)
2. Enter a figure at each digit by hitting the
2. Press the Omnipad at or to Omnipad at or . The example
select a menu item (current selection is below shows the DISTANCE RUN
ing
highlighted) and press the [ENT] key. DISPLAY menu, where you may adjust
For example, when DISTANCE RUN the distance run indication for SET.
DISPLAY is selected the following
display appears. Distance run is a form DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY
of contact closure, 200 pulses/NM. To DATA DISPLAY

uild
CONTACT CLOSURE
select IEC 61162 sentence, see RESET OFF
paragraph 1.6.1. SET
Cursor 000000.00NM
DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY ENT SET
DATA DISPLAY
CONTACT CLOSURE 3. Press the [ENT] key to conclude.
ipb
RESET OFF
SET
0.00NM 1.6 Distance Run Operation
ENT SET
The operator may adjust and reset the
3. Press the Omnipad at or to distance run indication and select display
method.
Sh
select the menu item desired and press

the [ENT] key. For example select
RESET. 1.6.1 Selecting display method
DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY The default setting provides for
DATA DISPLAY independent display and adjustment of the
CONTACT CLOSURE
DA
RESET OFF distance run indication on all displays

SET (display unit, Digital Indicator, distance
OFF indicator).
ON
To show the same distance run indication
4. Press the Omnipad at or to on all displays do the following:
N
select the menu option desired and

1. Press the [MENU] key to open the
press the [ENT] key.
menu.
KA
7
td.
MENU The cursor circumscribes the leftmost
DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY digit of the distance run figure.
SIM
SYSTEM MENU
., L
SYSTEM MENU2
DATA DISPLAY
CONTACT CLOSURE
RESET OFF
2. Press the Omnipad at to select SET
DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY and press Cursor 000000.00NM
Co
the [ENT] key. ENT SET
DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY 4. Press the Omnipad at or to select

DATA DISPLAY the digit to change.
CONTACT CLOSURE
RESET OFF 5. Press the Omnipad at or to
SET change value. The setting range is 0.00
0.00NM
ing
ENT SET
NM to 999999.99 NM.
6. Press the [ENT] key followed by
3. Select DATA DISPLAY and press the pressing the [MENU] key twice to
[ENT] key. conclude your selection and close the
menu.
uild
DATA DISPLAY
CONTACT CLOSURE 1.6.3 Resetting distance run to zero
RESET
IEC61162(VLW) OFF
SET
CONTACT CLOSURE
0 . 0 0 nm Distance run can be reset to zero when the
ENT SET menu item DATA DISPLAY is selected to
ipb
CONTACT CLOSURE. It may also be reset

4. Press to select IEC 61162(VLW) to zero only at the display unit when IEC
and press the [ENT] key. 61162(VLW) is selected.
5. Press the [MENU] key twice to close 1. Press the [MENU] key to open the
the menu. menu.
Sh
2. Press the Omnipad at to select

1.6.2 Adjusting distance run
DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY and press
Distance run can be changed when the the [ENT] key.
menu item DATA DISPLAY is selected to 3. Select RESET and press the [ENT] key.
CONTACT CLOSURE. It may also be
DA

changed only at the display unit when IEC
DATA DISPLAY
61162(VLW) is selected. . CONTACT CLOSURE
RESET OFF
SET
menu. OFF
ON
N
2. Use to select DISTANCE RUN

DISPLAY and press the [ENT] key.
4. Press the Omnipad at to select
3. Select SET and press the [ENT] key.
KA
8
td.
ON. 3. Select averaging time period desired
5. Press the [ENT] key to finish and press among 15, 30, 45 and 60 seconds.
the [MENU] key twice to close the 4. Press the [ENT] key.
menu.
., L
5. Press the [MENU] key twice to close
The distance run indication reads 0.00. the menu.
1.7 System Setting 1.7.3 Speed offset (calibration)

The system setting provides the
Co
Calibration of any speed log is necessary
fundamental parameters for intended through the sea trials during the
performance of the DS-80. commissioning tests. Fill in the calibration
sheet which is on page 25 of this manual.
1.7.1 Displaying the system menu Us the resultant data to calculate speed
offset and enter it as below. The setting
ing
range is -25.0% to +25.0%.
menu.
1. Open the SYSTEM MENU.
2. Select SYSTEM MENU and press the
[ENT] key. 2. Select SPEED OFFSET and press the
[ENT] key.
SYSTEM MENU
uild
SYSTEM MENU
SHIP SPEED AVG 15 SEC
SPEED OFFSET +0.0% SHIP SPEED AVG 30 SEC
TRACK DEPTH 2.0 m SPEED OFFSET +0.0%
XDR OFFSET +00˚ TRACK DEPTH 2.0 m
SPD DATA SELECT XDR OFFSET +00˚
DOPPLER SPD DATA SELECT
ENT: SET DOPPLER
ipb
ENT: SET
1.7.2 Ship speed average 3. Select the digit to change with or

Wind and currents affect ship’s speed, and and change the value with or on
speed data is averaged over the time the Omnipad.
Sh
period set on this menu. Increase the 4. Press the [ENT] key.
speed averaging period if the speed
reading is unstable.
the menu.
2. Select SHIP SPEED AVG and press the 1.7.4 Tracking depth
DA
[ENT] key.
Doppler shift measuring depth in the DS-80
15 SEC is 2 m at default. If the speed readout is
30 SEC
unstable due to air bubbles near the ship’s
45 SEC
60 SEC hull, increase or decrease the track depth
to stabilize the readout. The setting range is
N
1.0 m to 9.9 m.
KA
9
td.
SYSTEM MENU 1.7.6 Speed data selection
SHIP SPEED AVG 30 SEC
SPEED OFFSET +0.0% When the DS-80 fails to work as an SDME,
TRACK DEPTH 2.0 m the display unit can be used as a monitor
., L
XDR OFFSET +00˚
SPD DATA SELECT display tool for a GPS speed or other
DOPPLER equipment measuring the ship’s speed.
ENT: SET
2. Select TRACK DEPTH and press the
2. Select SPD DATA SELECT and press
[ENT] key.
Co
the [ENT] key.
SYSTEM MENU
SHIP SPEED AVG 30 SEC GPS
SPEED OFFSET +0.0% DOPPLER
TRACK DEPTH 2.0 m AUTO
XDR OFFSET +00˚
SPD DATA SELECT 3. Select the option GPS and press the
DOPPLER
ing
ENT: SET [ENT] key.
3. Select the digit to change or and
the menu.
change the value with or on the
Omnipad. See the illustration below for speed display
uild
information. If the speed displayed is
unstable perform the check described in
5. Press the [MENU] key twice to close paragraph 3.2.
the menu. GPS-measured
speed
1.7.5 Transducer offset SPEED STW SPEED GPS

ipb
S S
DISTANCE
10.0 kn
DISTANCE
10.0 kn
Sets the deviation angle of the transducer’s

12.50 12.50
orientation with reference to the ship’s NM NM
longitudinal axis. This is done at Doppler speed GPS speed

installation; no user adjustment is
Sh
necessary. "AUTO" position indicates a Doppler speed

(SDME) but if the DS-80 fails, a GPS speed
will be indicated.
Note 1: If the log speed fails, the display

unit reads a GPS speed, but speed data
DA
will not be output to other equipment.
Note 2: Doppler speed is used to calculate

speed when both DOPPLER and GPS are
abnormal in AUTO.
N
KA
10
td.
1.7.7 System menu 2 4. Select the digit to change with or .
5. Use or to set. (The setting range
The System Menu 2 contains the diagnostic
is
test and selection of dimmer control and
., L
-10.0 to +40.0 kn, and the default
display language.
setting is +10.0 kn.)
menu.
7. Press the [ENT] key to open the DATA
2. Select SYSTEM MENU 2 and press the
DISPLAY menu.
Co
[ENT] key.
SIM
SPEED
SYSTEM MENU2 +10.0 kn
TEST DATA DISPLAY OFF
DIMMER INTERNAL ON
/LANG. ENGLISH OFF
ENT: SET
ing
ENT: SET 8. Press to select ON and press the
[ENT] key.
TEST: Checks the equipment for proper
operation. For further details see Chapter 3. 9. Press the [MENU] key twice to close
the menu.
uild
DIMMER: See paragraph 1.3.2.
The indication “SIM” appears at the top
LANG.: Selects the language to use in right-hand corner when the sim mode is on.
menus, English or Japanese. To turn off the simulation display, show the
SIM menu and set SPD to OFF.
1.8 Simulation Mode
ipb
SPEED SIM Simulation

S
The simulation mode outputs the Doppler
speed signal to external equipment. This
DISTANCE
10.0 kn
mode "ON"
checks if the signal is being correctly

output. )
Sh

menu.
2. Select SIM and press the [ENT] key.
SIM
SPEED
DA
+10.0 kn
DATA DISPLAY OFF
ENT: SET
3. Select SPEED and press the [ENT] key.

N
KA
11
td.
2 OPERATION OF OPTIONAL
EQUIPMENT
., L
The Digital Indicator DS-830 and Distance
SPEED STW
Indicator DS-840 have the same controls
as the display unit. This chapter explains
DISTANCE
S
10.0 kn
Speed
the features which are not shared with the

12.50 Distance
Co
display unit.
DISTANCE INDICATOR NM Run
2.1 Digital Indicator DS-830,

[DISP] key
Distance Indicator DS-840 to switch
2.1.1 Selecting a display

DISTANCE
ing
Press the [DISP] key to select the display
mode. Each time the key is pressed the
display shows speed plus distance run or
12.50
speed alone as below. DISTANCE INDICATOR
NM
uild
SPEED STW
DISTANCE
S
10.0 kn
Speed Distance Indicator DS-840
SPEED INDICATOR
12.50 NM
Distance
Run
2.1.2 Menu operation
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the

ipb
display below.
[DISP] key
to switch MENU
SPEED STW SYSTEM MENU2
S
10.0
Sh
SPEED INDICATOR kn 2. For details refer to the following:

Digital Indicator DS-830 DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY: See paragraph
DA
1.6.
SYSTEM MENU 2: See 1.7.7 System

Menu 2.
2.1.3 Adjusting dimmer and

N
contrast
See paragraph 1.3.
KA
12
td.
ANALOG DISPLAY UNIT
CORRECTION DIAGRAM AT EXTREME TEMPERATURES
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
Doppler Speed Log DS-80

CORRECTION FACTOR FOR ANALOG DISPLAY MF-22A-1
Example:
If the analog speedometer reads 14.2 kn at a temperature of –15°C, the correct speed
through the water is 15 kn. Failure of correction in low temperature can result in a maximum
DA
error of –0.8 kn or 5.3% for 14.2 kn readout. IMO limit of ±2% is exceeded over 10.0 – 30.0
kn reading but correction by this graph brings a correct measurement.
At +55°C, an error of +0.0 kn (+2.7%) occurs at a speed of 30 kn; no other point IMO limit of
±2% is exceeded.
N
When the digital display and analog display readouts are different, take precedence of the
digital readout. At temperatures 0°C to 50°C, the speedometer never exceeds the IMO
limits.
KA
13
td.
3 MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
., L
WARNING CAUTION
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment. Do not paint the transducer.
Only qualified personnel Painting will affect performance.
Co
equipment.
3.1.3 Fuse replacement
3.1 Maintenance Fuses in the units of the system protect the

electrical circuitry from burning by
3.1.1 Preventive maintenance
overcurrent. If the equipment cannot be
ing
Check the following points regularly to energized check the fuse in the power
maintain performance. cable connected to the display unit. Locate
the cause before replacing the fuse.
• Check that the connectors on all units of
the system are firmly fastened and free of
uild
Rating, Type,
Unit Location
rust. Clean if soiled or corroded. Qty Code No.
• Check that all ground wires are tightly FGMB 1A Fuse
Display 1A, 125 VAC, holder in
fastened. Unit 2 pcs. 000-114-8 power
• Dust and dirt on the display unit including 05 cable
the screen may be removed with a soft FGBO 3A Inside
ipb
Distribution 3A, 250 VAC unit

cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to
Box 2 pcs. 000-549-
clean the display unit; they can remove 021
paint and markings. FGBO 1A
Transceiver 1A, 250 VAC,
Unit 2 pcs. 000-549-
3.1.2 Transducer maintenance
Sh
019
Marine life (barnacles, etc.) adhering to the

transducer face will reduce sensitivity. CAUTION
Periodically remove any marine life from
the transducer face with fine sandpaper or
DA
a piece of wood. Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire or

equipment damage and void the warranty.
N
KA
14
td.
3.2 Troubleshooting
This section provides troubleshooting procedures. Advanced level troubleshooting should
be done by referring to the Service Manual (optional supply).
., L
Problem Probable cause Remedy
General
Cannot turn on the Loosened power cable Fasten the power cable.
power. Blown fuse Replace the fuse.
Co
Power is on but Contrast too low. Press the [*] key several times.
nothing appears on
the screen.
Doppler speed indication
SPEED STW Last correct speed Ship’s speed cannot be calculated
DISTANCE
S
10.0 kn
is displayed
(display freezes).
because of air bubbles, etc. (Speed error :
30 seconds)
ing
12.50 NM
Reverse video
and blinking
SPEED STW • Problem with the transducer or air
S Speed shown as "**.*".
**. * kn bubbles.
uild
DISTANCE
12.50 • Speed error continues more than 30

NM
seconds.
SPEED STW
STW • Temperature sensor is abnormal.
S
DISTANCE
10.0 kn flashing
12.50 NM
ipb
GPS speed indication

SPEED GPS GPS data error.
Speed indication shown as "**.*".
DISTANCE
**.* kn
12.50 NM
• No GPS data for 30 seconds.

Sh
SPEED ---- "GPS" is replaced with "----".

DISTANCE
---kn • GPS receiver disconnected.
12.50 NM
If any abnormal speed indication continues

N DA
KA
15
td.
3.3 Diagnostics, Checking control is operated within five seconds,
Program Number the equipment automatically begins
checking the LCD.
The diagnostic facility checks the ROM, Transducer temperature
., L
RAM, SIO and displays program ID. Name of control operated
appears here.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the TEST
menu. ROM : OK 12.3CX X appears when
RAM : OK temperature
SIO : OK sensor is
2. Select SYSTEM MENU2 and press the PUSH KEY abnormal
(STOP: PWR OFF)
Co
[ENT] key. 6550100003I
6550110003J
SYSTEM MENU2 No. of times test CNT: 006 6550120003K
consecutively
TEST executed. 6550100003I = Display Unit DS-800
DIMMER INTERNAL 6550110003J = Distribution Box DS-801
/LANG. ENGLISH 6550120003K = Transceiver Unit DS-810
Control operated and indication
Control Indication
ing
UP
3. Press the [ENT] key. The following DOWN
display appears. LEFT
RIGHT
TEST START ? MENU MENU
(STOP: PWR OFF)
uild
ENT ENT
ARE YOU SURE ? DISP DISP
YES NO DIM DIM
* *
4. Press the [ENT] key to start the test. In 5. The equipment automatically checks
a few moments the display should the LCD, displaying the following in
ipb
changes as shown at the top of the order.

adjacent column.
<LCD CHECK>
The ROM, RAM and SIO (if special
ALL ON 2 SEC.
connector is used) are checked for ALL OFF 3 SEC.
proper operation and the results shown
Sh
as OK or NG (No Good). For NG,

The program number also appears
here.
“PUSH KEY” is highlighted, prompting
DA
you to check the controls. Operate any

control (except the [POWER] switch)
within five seconds. The name of the
activated control appears on screen if it 6. The test repeats itself. To stop the test,
is operating normally. Note that if no turn the power switch off and on again.
N
KA
16
td.
4 DIGITAL INTERFACE (IEC 61162-1
Edition 2)
., L
4.1 I/O Sentences
Input sentences of IEC61162_RX port
GGA, VTG
Co
Output sentences of IEC61162_TX1, IEC61162_TX2 ports
VBW, VLW (Talker: VD)
3 s for VBW; 1 s for VLW
ing
Data transmission
Data is transmitted in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced
in 2.1 of IEC 61162-1. The first bit is a start bit and is followed by data bits,
least-significant-bit as illustrated below.
uild
Baud rate: 4800
Stop bits: 1
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Start Stop
ipb
bit Data bits bit

Sh
N DA
KA
17
td.
Schematic diagrams
IEC61162 RX port
DS-801
., L
65P6010
TB3 .
F2047A-20P-B .
Co
.
JP6
. PC400
ERJ_6GEY0R00V
IEC61162_RX_A 11 <11< R121 22Ω U42 6
1 2
IEC61162_RX_B 12 <12< 1
R122 120Ω
. 4
R123 120 Ω 3
.
R124 22Ω CR17 1SS181
5
JP7
ing
ERJ_6GEY0R00V

uild
Max. Voltage: ±2.6V
Threshold: 4 mA
IEC61162 TX1 port

ipb
Sh
N DA

KA
Max. 20 mA
18
td.
IEC61162 TX2 port
DS-801
., L
65P6010
Vcc
TB3 .
1 U43
F2047A-20P-B .
. R136 SN75ALS191PS
. 47 8 2
IEC61162_TX2_A 9 <7<
Co
7
IEC61162_TX2_B 10 <8<
. R135
. 47 4
.
.
Max. 20 mA
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
19
td.
4.2 Sentence Description
Time, position and fix related data for a GPS receiver.
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9
Co
| | | | | | | | | | +---+------------ 8
| | | | | | | | +---+------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +------------------------- 6
| | | | | | +---------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------- 4
| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
ing
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
uild
4. GPS quality indicator (see note)
ipb
11. Checksum
NOTE
0 = fix not available or invalid
1 = GPS SPS mode, fix valid
2 = differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid
Sh
3 = GPS PPS mode, fix valid

4 = Real Time Kinetic. Satellite system used in RTK mode with fixed integers
5 = Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK mode with floating fingers
6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
7 = Manual input mode
8 = Simulator mode
The GPS quality indicator shall not be a null field.
DA
Note: Item Only GPS quality indicator and antenna altitude above/below are used.
N
KA
20
td.
The actual course and speed relative to the ground.
| | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | | +--+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
| | +--+----------------------- 2
Co
+--+----------------------------- 1

ing
6. Checksum

A = Autonomous
uild
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
ipb
Note: Speed, course degrees magnetic and course degrees true not used.
Sh
N DA
KA
21
td.
VBW - Dual ground/water speed
Water-referenced and ground-referenced speed data.
| | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | | | +----- 10
| | | | | | | | +-------- 9
| | | | | | | +----------- 8
| | | | | | +-------------- 7
| | | | | +----------------- 6
Co
| | | | +-------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------ 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------ 2
+---------------------------------- 1
1. Longitudial water speed, knots

2. Transverse water speed, knots
ing
3. Status: water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
4. Longitudial ground speed, knots
7. Stern transverse water speed, knots
8. Status: stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
uild
9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots
10. Status: stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
11. Checksum
Notes
1. Longitudinal speed: “-” astern.
* Not used.
ipb
VLW - Distance travelled through the water

The distance travelled, relative to the water.
$--VLW,x.x,N,x.x,N*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | |
Sh
| | | | +--------- 3
| | +--+----------- 2
+--+----------------- 1
1. Total cumulative distance, nautical miles

2. Distance since reset, nautical miles
3. Checksum
N DA
KA
22
td.
5 PARTS LOCATION AND PARTS LIST
Parts Location
., L
Display unit DS-800
U10 (ROM)
Co
ing
uild
ICP Board 65P6000, parts side
Distribution box DS-801
From right TB1, TB2, TB3

ipb
TB101
POWER
Sh
switch
JPW Board
N DA
Distribution Box DS-801, inside view

KA
23
td.
Transceiver unit DS-810
TB101
TB1
., L
POWER
Switch
Co
KCP Board
ing
uild
Transceiver Unit DS-810, inside view
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
24
td.
Parts List
component level are not practicable (IMO A.694(17)/8.3.1). Only some discrete components
., L
are used. FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. believes identifying these components is of no
use for shipborne maintenance; therefore, they are not listed in this manual. Major modules
can be located on parts location photos on the preceding page.
Co
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
25
td.
Model DS-80
Unit DISPLAY UNIT DS-800
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref.Dwg. C3441-K01-C
., L
2000-01 Block.No.
SYMBOL TYPE CODE No. REMARKS SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY

65P6000, ICP 000-142-649 X
Co
CABLE w/CONNECTOR
MJ-A7SPF-005-020 000-139-384 20S0251
MJ-A6SPF-003-020 000-142-658 65S1231
MJ-PH 6P 000-142-659 65S1227
MJ-PH 7P 000-142-660 65S1228
ing
uild
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
26
td.
Model DS-80
Unit TRANSCEIVER DS-810
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref.Dwg. C7247-K02-A
., L
2000-01 Block.No.
ASSEMBLY

65P6020,KCP 002-889-570 X
Co
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
DS-810 002-889-530 X
SWITCH
S1 S-331 000-474-214
ing
VARISTOR
CR1 ERZV-20D471 000-136-287
TRANSFORMER
T1 65S1218 000-142-647
uild
TERMINAL BOARD
TB101 F1003-20A-5725-6P 000-137-321
NOISE FILTER
XF1 ZGB2202-01U 000-132-968
CABLE w/CONNECTOR
66-045(2P) 002-889-550 VH CONNECTOR
ipb
65-046(6P) 002-889-560 VH CONNECTOR

Sh
N DA
KA
27
td.
Model DS-80
Unit DISTRIBUTOR DS-801
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref.Dwg. C7247-K03-A
., L
2000-01 Block No.
ASSEMBLY

65P6010,JPW 002-889-490 X
Co
ASSEMBLY
DS-801 002-889-470 POWER SUPPLY X
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY

DS-801-100 002-889-410 X
DS-801-110 002-889-420 X
X
ing
DS-801-115 002-889-430
DS-801-200 002-889-440 X
DS-801-220 002-889-450 X
DS-801-230 002-889-460 X
SWITCH
uild
S1 S-331 000-474-214
VARISTOR
CR1 ERZV-20D471 000-136-287
TERMINAL BOARD
TB101 F1003-20A-2P 000-142-631
ipb
FUSE HOLDER
F1 FH-001AF 000-138-909
POWER SUPPLY
PD1 FAW-24-2R1 000-142-633
Sh
NOISE FILTER
XF1 ZAC2210-11 000-120-155
N DA
KA
28
CALIBRATION SHEET FOR DS-80 DOPPLER SPEED LOG
DATE: TEST SITE SHIP'S LENGTH (M) DRAFT Fore Aft Mean (m)
SHIP'S NAME Ser. No. DOCKYARD TRIM (m)
KA
N Location of Transducer (m) from bow or frame No.
(NM) SEA STATE

(kn)
DA kn
(kn)
Sh
ipb
29
uild
ing
DS-80
Co
.
., L
CALIBRATION SHEET
td.
td.
MENU OVERVIEW
Default settings in bold italic.
., L
[MENU] key
DISTANCE RUN DISPLAY DATA DISPLAY (CONTACT CLOSURE, IEC 61162-1(VLW))

RESET (ON, OFF)
SET (0.0 NM-999999.99 NM, 0.00 NM)
Co
SIM SPEED (-10.0 to +40.0 kn, +10.0 kn)
DATA DISPLAY (OFF, ON)
ing
SYSTEM MENU SHIP SPD AVG (15, 30, 45, 60 SEC)
SPEED OFFSET (-25.0% to +25.0%, 0%)
TRACK DEPTH (1.0 m to 9.9 m, 2 m)
XDR OFFSET (-40˚ to +40˚, 0˚)
uild
SPD DATA SELECT (GPS, DOPPLER, AUTO)
SYSTEM MENU2 TEST (Check of ROM, RAM, LCD, Key Panel)

DIMMER (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)
LANG. (ENGLISH, JAPANESE)
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
30
td.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation Meaning
., L
AVG Average
DEP Depth
DIM Dimmer
DISP Display
DIST Distance
ENT Enter
Co
kn Knot(s)
LANG Language
MENU Menu
NM Nautical Mile(s)
OFF Off
OFFSET Offset
ON On
ing
PWR Power
SEC,s Second(s)
SEL Select
SIM Simulation
SPD Speed
uild
TRK Track
XDR Transducer
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
31
td.
INDEX
., L
C P
Contrast .......................................................... 6 Parts list ........................................................26
Control description ......................................... 5 Parts location ................................................23
POWER switch ...............................................5
D
S
Co
Diagnostics................................................... 16 Ship's speed
Digital indicator............................................. 12 averaging time.............................................9
Digital interface............................................. 17 offset.......................................................... 9
Digitial display .............................................. 12 source........................................................10
DIM key .......................................................... 6 SIM t............................................................. 11
Dimmer........................................................... 6 System configuration ......................................2
ing
Distance run System menu ..................................................9
adjusting ..................................................... 8 System menu2 ..............................................11
display method............................................7
T
resetting to zero .......................................... 8
Transducer
F
uild
maintenance..............................................14
Fuse replacement......................................... 14 position offset ............................................10
Troubleshooting ............................................15
M
Maintenance ................................................. 14
MENU key ...................................................... 7 W
Menu operation .............................................. 7
ipb
Water tracking depth..................................... 9

Menu tree ..................................................... 30
Sh
N DA
KA
Index-1
KA
ND
AS
hip
bui
lding
Co
., L
td.
Back
td.
., L
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Co
NAVIGATIONAL ECHO SOUNDER
ing MODEL FE-700

uild
ipb
Sh
DA
N
KA
www.furuno.co.jp
td.
., L
Co
ing
uild
ipb

Sh
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200
DA
All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : JAN . 2000

T2 : APR . 26, 2010
Pub. No. OME-23660-T2
(TATA ) FE-700 *00080890817*
N
*00080890817*
* 0 0 0 8 0 8 9 0 8 1 7 *
KA
td.
IMPORTANT NOTICES
., L
General
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong
operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
Co
•
ing
Save this manual for future reference.
uild
Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in
the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct
method of disposal.
ipb
Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery(ies), see the chapter
on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery(ies) is used.
Sh
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries
must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the
used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national
legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU. Cd
DA
In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd and
lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the used
batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws. Ni-Cd Pb
N

KA
There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can
increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the future.
i
td.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
., L
WARNING CAUTION
Do not power the equipment when the
Co
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment. transducer is in air.
Only qualified personnel The transducer may become damaged.

equipment.
Immediately turn off the power at the
ing
equipment.
Continued use of the equipment can cause WARNING LABEL

fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO A warning label is attached to the equip-
agent for service. ment. Do not remove the label. If the
uild
label is missing or illegible, contact
Do not disassemble or modify the a FURUNO agent or dealer.
equipment. WARNING Name: Warning Label (1)
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can remove cover. No user-serviceable Code No.: 100-236-231
parts inside.
result.
ipb
Immediately turn off the power at the

switchboard if the equipment is emitting
smoke or fire.
Continued use of the equipment can cause About the TFT LCD
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO
Sh
agent for service. The TFT LCD is constructed using the

latest LCD techniques, and displays
Make sure no rain or water splash leaks 99.99% of its pixels. The remaining 0.01%
into the equipment. of the pixels may drop out or blink, how-
ever this is not an indication of malfunc-
Fire or electrical shock can result if water tion.
leaks in the equipment.
DA
Use of a wrong fuse can result in equipment

damage and void the warranty.
N
KA
ii
td.
CONTENTS
., L
3.3 System Menu 2 .................................... 12
FOREWORD ......................................... iv
3.4 System Menu 3 .................................... 13
A Word to FE-700 Owners.............................iv
Features.........................................................iv 4 ECHO QUALITY SETTING............. 14
4.1 Demonstration Display ......................... 14

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .................. v
Co
4.2 Bottom Level ........................................ 14
SPECIFICATIONS OF FE-700 ......... SP-1
4.3 TVG Level ............................................ 15
1 OPERATION ..................................... 1 4.4 Echo Offset........................................... 15
1.1 Control Description................................. 1 5 OPERATION OF DIGITAL DEPTH
ing
1.2 Indications, Markers ............................... 2 INDICATOR FE-720 (OPTION) ..... 16
1.3 Turning On/Off........................................ 3 5.1 Basic Operation..................................... 16
1.4 Tone and Brilliance ................................. 3 5.2 Menu Operation .................................. 17
1.5 Panel Dimmer......................................... 3 5.3 Diagnosis ............................................ 18

uild
1.6 Display Mode.......................................... 4 5.4 Factory Setting.................................... 18
1.7 Range Scale ........................................... 7

6 MAINTENANCE,
1.8 Gain Control ........................................... 7 TROUBLESHOOTING .................... 19
1.9 Automatic Operation............................... 7
6.1 Checking .............................................. 19
ipb
1.10 Picture Colors ..................................... 7

6.2 Cleaning the Display Unit..................... 19
1.11 Shallow Depth Alarm ............................ 8
6.3 Transducer Maintenance ..................... 19
1.12 Draft ...................................................... 8
6.4 Replacing the Fuse, Battery................. 19
Sh
2 MENU OPERATION.......................... 9 6.5 Troubleshooting.................................... 20
2.1 Menu Overview ...................................... 9 6.6 Diagnostic Test ..................................... 21
2.2 Suppressing Low Level Noise ............. 9 6.7 Test Pattern .......................................... 21
2.3 Suppressing Interference ....................... 9 6.8 Clearing the Memory............................ 22

DA
2.4 Picture Advance ................................... 10 7 MENU TREE ................................... 23

2.5 Trend .................................................... 10
8 DIGITAL INTERFACE (IEC 61162-1
2.6 Interval.................................................. 10
EDITION 2) .................................. 24
2.7 Choosing the Transducer ..................... 10
9 PARTS LOCATION, PARTS LIST .. 32
N
3 SYSTEM MENU .............................. 11

Declaration of Conformity
3.1 System Menu ....................................... 11
KA
3.2 System Menu 1 .................................... 12
iii
td.
FOREWORD
., L
A Word to FE-700 Owners Features
Thank you for purchasing this navigational echo The FURUNO FE-700 is comprised of display
sounder. We are confident you will discover why unit and transducer unit. Echo sounding data is
FURUNO has become synonymous with quality displayed on the bright 6.5-inch color TFT (Thin
Co
and reliability. Film Transistor) LCD display.
Dedicated in the design and manufacture of The main features of the FE-700 are
marine electronics equipment for over 60 years, 1. Complies with the IMO and ISO standards
FURUNO Electric Company has gained an MSC.74(69) Annex 4 and ISO9875.
unrivaled reputation as a world leader in the
2. Cost-effective; no paper, no consumables;
industry. This is the result of our technical
high accuracy and high reliability - no rotating
ing
excellence as well as our worldwide distribution
gears and belts as in the paper echo
and service network.
sounders
Please carefully read and follow the safety 3. High-contrast 6.5-inch color LCD display
information and operating and maintenance featuring a wide viewing angle and adjustable
instructions set forth in this manual before
uild
brightness.
attempting to operate the equipment and
4. Wide variety of modes with never-get-lost
conduct any maintenance. Your navigational
default position.
echo sounder will perform to the utmost of its
ability only if it is operated and maintained in 5. Automatic function permits unattended
accordance with the correct procedures. adjustment of range, gain, and pulselength.
The range scale and gain automatically
ipb
change to display the bottom.

This equipment is designed, produced and 6. Position, course, speed, time are repeated
documented by FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD., from the external devices.
complying with ISO 9001 standards as certified
by the Lloyd’s Register of Quality Assurance 7. Alarms: shallow water, bottom lost, power
Sh
System. drop
8. The dual frequency display can be shown by
using the optional matching box MB-1200.
N DA
KA
iv
td.
DISPLAY UNIT
., L
FE-701
Terminal Box
DS-802
Co
IEC 61162-1 DIGITAL DEPTH
INDICATOR
FE-720
IEC 61162-1
Navigation Device
DISTRIBUTION IEC 61162-1
BOX Navigation Device
EIA-232C
ing
FE-702
Personal Computer
CONTACT CLOSURE
Alarm Unit
AU-12
100/110-115/
200/220-230 VAC
or
uild
24 VDC
DISTRIBUTION TRANSDUCER
BOX SWITCH BOX
MB-1200 EX-8
JB JB JB JB JB
JUNCTION BOX
JISF8821-1M0 0-20A3P
ipb
MATCHING BOX
MB-502 (for 50B-6B)
MB-504 (for 200B-8B)
Sh
: Standard Supply
TRANSDUCER : Optional Supply
50B-6B, : Local Supply
200B-8B
FE-700 system configuration

DA
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The FE-700 uses ultrasonic pulses to detect the seabed and other underwater objects. The display unit
contains all basic electric circuits and logic processor. Electrical pulses are converted into acoustical
energy in the transducer fitted on the ship’s hull. The processor measures the time of pulses travelling
between the seabed and transducer and displays the water depths in the graphical form or other forms.
N
The transducers have a specific beam width with respect to their working frequency, 50 kHz or 200 kHz.
The high frequency has a narrow beamwidth and is immune to aeration when the ship is going astern or in
KA
rough weather. The low frequency has a wide beamwidth and more powerful sounding capability.
v
FURUNO FE-700
td.
SPECIFICATIONS OF NAVIGATIONAL ECHO SOUNDER
FE-700
., L
1 GENERAL
1.1 Transmit frequency 50 kHz, 200 kHz, or 50/200 kHz alternating transmit
1.2 Output power 600 Wrms
1.3 Beam width 50B-6B (50 kHz): 35°, 200B-8B (200 kHz): 6°
1.4 Basic display range
Co
Range
Unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Meter 5 10 20 40 100 200 400 800
Feet 15 30 60 120 300 600 1500 2500
Fathom 3 5 10 20 50 100 200 400
*Default settings; it could be customized for use w/o range 3 and 6.
ing
1.4 Accuracy ±2.5% on any range
1.5 Minimum range 0.5 m (200 kHz), 2.0 m (50 kHz)
1.6 Draft 0 to 30 m in 0.1 m steps, default 0 m
1.7 Pulse repetition rate (PRR)
Depth (m) P/L (ms) PRR (pulse/min)
5, 10, 20 0.25 750
uild
40 0.38 375
100 1.00 150
200 2.00 75
400,800 3.60 42
2 DISPLAY UNIT
ipb
2.1 Graphical display 6.5-inch color TFT LCD, 320 x 234 pixels
2.2 Echo colors 8 colors or 8 level monochrome
2.3 Display area 133 x 97 mm
2.4 Display mode “NAV”: Basic echo presentation with the depth below transducer (or keel)
“DBS”: Echo presentation with the depth below sea surface
“HISTRY”: Historical Echo presentation with the depth
Sh
“LOGBOOK”: Echo presentation with the pop-up table showing

Time, Depth and L/L* data memorized at preset interval
“OS DATA”: Echo presentation with the pop-up table of present
navigational data; L/L*, course*, speed*, time, depth
“HELP”: Echo presentation with the help menu and note
“MENU”: Echo presentation with the user menu
DA
2.5 Picture advance speed

Slow mode 15 minutes or more
Fast mode Picture advance range
Range (m) 5 10 20 40 100 200 400 800
Interval (min.) 1.8 8 20 30
N
2.6 User setting Gain, Range, Alarm, Draft, Brilliance, Dimmer, Color, Auto
2.7 Auto set mode Gain, range and clutter will be automatically adjusted.
2.8 Alarm Shallow water (default 20 m), Bottom lost, Power drop
KA
2.9 Logbook display Depth, Internal clock, L/L*
SP - 1 E2366S01T
FURUNO FE-700
td.
1 hour at 5 sec Interval, 12 hours at 1 minute interval and 24
hours at 2 minutes interval
*: External navigational sensor required.
., L
3 DIGITAL DEPTH INDICATOR
3.1 Display 4.5-inch monochrome LCD
3.2 Depth indication **.* m (less than 100m), **** m (100 m or more)
Co
4 INTERFACE
4.1 Serial input data IEC61162-1, current loop; 1 port
RMA: L/L, Ground track speed, Track
RMC: L/L (GPS), Ground track speed, Track, Time
GGA/GLL: L/L
VTG: Ground track speed, Track (true/magnetic selected on menu)
ZDA: Time
ing
4.2 Serial output data IEC61162-1, output period: 1 sec.; 3 outputs/ 1 port
SDDPT: Depth (m), Draft (m)
SDDBT: Depth (ft, m, fa) below transducer
SDDBK: Depth (ft, m, fa) below keel
SDDBS: Depth (ft, m, fa) below sea surface
uild
4.3 Serial I/O data RS-232C, 1 port
Output Depth, Clock, L/L, Ship’s speed, Course
Input Control command for PC
4.4 Alarm (Depth, Power) Contact closure signal, normal open or normal close,
250 VAC/ 200 VDC, 3A max.
ipb
5 POWER SUPPLY
5.1 Distribution box (FE-720) 100/110-115/200/220-230 VAC: 0.2 A max., 1 phase, 50/60Hz or
24 VDC: 0.6 A
5.2 Digital depth indicator 24 VDC, 0.15A
Sh
6.1 Temperature -15°C to +55°C
6.2 Relative humidity 93% at +40°C
Display unit, Digital depth indicator IPX5
Distribution box, Matching box IPX2
DA

6.5 EMC IEC 60945
7 COATING COLOR
7.1 Display unit Panel: N3.0, Chassis: 2.5GY5/1.5 (fixed)
N
7.2 Digital depth indicator Panel: N3.0, Chassis: 2.5GY5/1.5 (fixed)

7.3 Distribution box (FE-720) 2.5GY5/1.5 or 7.5BG7/2
7.4 Distribution box (MB-1200) N3.0
KA
7.5 Matching box 2.5G7/2 (fixed)
SP - 2 E2366S01T
td.
1 OPERATION
., L
1.1 Control Description
All operation of the FE-700 is carried out with the controls on the front panel of the display unit. Rotary
controls respond immediately to your command but some touch keys require the successive operation.
Co
ing
uild
•
•
•
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
1
td.
1.2 Indications, Markers
Display mode
Gain setting
., L
Transducer in use
Range
setting
Auto Alarm
Alarm Range scale
mode off
setting
AU
AU
TO ALARM 15m
TO ALARM 15m
Co
FORE 50kHz
0
FORE 50kHz
RANGE: 4
GAIN: 5.5
MODE: NAV
20
Depth alarm line
ing40
uild
Depth LOGBOOK
60 HISTORY
DBS
OS DATA
HELP
Depth unit NAV MENU
49.6m
ipb
BELOW TRANSDUCER 80
Screen Control panel

Explanation of depth
(Below transducer, below surface, or below keel)
Sh
Ex. Single frequency display
ALARM:20m DRAFT: 10.0m When connecting two transducers via the optional
0
AFT 50/FORE 200 distributor box MB-1200, the dual frequency display
RANGE:4
GAIN:5.5 (as left) can be shown. To switch SINGLE and DUAL,
MODE:DBS
see the Installation Manual.
DA
20
40
60
N
49.6 49.6
BELOW SURFACE m 80
KA
2
td.
1.3 Turning On/Off 1.4 Tone and Brilliance
1. Turning on: Press the POWER Switch. 1. Press the BRILL key. The tone and brilliance
., L
Self-test starts, showing the condition of the setting window appears.
logic circuits. The program number is
displayed. LOW
BRILL: 8
ROM: OK LOW- +HIGH
DRAM: OK TONE: 3
Co
SRAM: OK
BATTERY: OK
2. Press the [+] or [-] key for desired tone (in
reality, Contrast).
3. Press the [▲] or [▼] key for desired
PROGRAM NO. 02522970xx brilliance. Pressing the BRILL key also
changes the brilliance from minimum to
ing
maximum and vice-versa.
Note: Tone or brilliance must be adjusted within

2. Select a mode with the MODE Selector. The 10 seconds after pressing the BRILL key.
NAV position of the selector is recommended Otherwise the tone and brilliance window
for general use. Display color is amber by will be erased.
uild
default but may be customized. The unit of
measurement is meters. You can freely
select another mode at any time.
1.5 Panel Dimmer
3. Turning off: Press the POWER Switch 1. Press the DIM key. The panel dimmer setting
again. window appears.
ipb
Wait at least 5 s before reapplying the power. LOW- +HIGH

DIMMER: 5
Note: When two transducers are installed, make
sure which transducer is used. 2. Press the [+] or [-] key for desired
illumination of the control panel. Pressing
Note: When lat/long data input error occurs, DIM key also changes the illumination level.
Sh
“EPFS” ERROR appears on the screen.

(EPFS: Electronic Position-Fixing System
such as GPS receiver)
N DA
KA
3
td.
1.6 Display Mode
CAUTION
The Mode Selector choose the display mode
DBS is not a water clearance below
., L
among NAV, DBS (depth below surface),
keel.
HISTORY, LOGBOOK, OS DATA, HELP, and
Do not use this mode in shallow
MENU. waters to avoid grounding.
1.6.1 NAV mode

1.6.3 HISTORY mode
Co
The depth from the transducer to the seabed
(bottom clearance) is shown on the screen. Note This mode provides a mix of Contour and Strata
“BELOW TRANSDUCER” appears at the bottom displays. The Contour display can be scrolled
of the screen in this mode. If the transducer over the past 24 h while the right side Strata
setting is DEPTH BELOW KEEL, “BELOW display (layers of different colors according to
KEEL” appears at the bottom of the screen. reverberation strengths) shows the latest
ing
Default is, sounding for 5 minutes.
Color: Amber Pressing the [+] or [-] key moves the Contour
Range: Automatic range switching display forwards or backwards, respectively.
Window: 15 minutes
Shallow depth alarm: 20 m
uild
HISTORY
NOTE: These parameters can be customized to

your preference and the last setting is used at a
next switch-on. This is true on all other modes.
1.6.2 DBS mode

ipb
LOGBOOK
HISTORY OS DATA
DBS HELP
The Depth Below Surface mode provides a NAV MENU
draft-adjusted depth reading and will be useful in

referencing to the nautical chart. The draft should
be adjusted by the DRAFT key according to the History of the bottom
actual draft value. If you find any difficulty to
Sh
check for the draft value, use the NAV mode.
When the DBS mode is selected, the message If the range scale for both the Contour and Strata
“Confirm and set ship’s draft to use DBS mode” display must be the same. If they are not, the
appears. Confirm ship's draft and set it by message “OUT OF RANGE” appears.
referring to section 1.12. The update of the contour data may take max.
DA
one minute. Wait for one minute to display

BELOW SURFACE appears at the bottom of the
accurate contour if you change the range scale.
display and the draft value appears at the upper
right-hand corner in the DBS mode.
N
KA
4
td.
1.6.4 LOGBOOK mode 1.6.5 OS DATA mode
The LOGBOOK shows time, depth and own ship This display mode indicates own ship position,
., L
position in tabular form in a pop-up window. The GPS-derived course and speed, and time and
logging is selected with the INTERVAL option on depth in digital form. You can read the data of
the menu among 5 s, 1 min and 2 min. (See your particular interest in large characters. The
section 2.6.) screen continues to display the sounding data in
the background. Part of graphical indication is
There are 60 pages and the total memory
visible to the right of data slips.
Co
capacity is 720 points. Page 60/60 is the latest
data and 1/60 is the oldest data. Pressing [-] or TRUE(true course) or
MAG (magnetic course) appears.
[+] key changes the pages.
Note that if DEPTH BELOW KEEL is chosen, OS DATA
DBK also appears together with depth indication

N
in the DEPTH column. E
ing
60/60
TIME DEPTH L/L
11:00:00 47.5 36 55.012'N

135 23.123'E HISTORY
LOGBOOK
OS DATA
11:01:00 47.5 36 55.012'N DBS

NAV
HELP
MENU
135 23.123'E
uild
11:02:00 47.5 36 55.012'N
135 23.123'E
11:03:00 47.5 36 55.012'N
135 23.123'E BT means Bottom track
11:04:00 47.5 36 55.014'N
135 23.123'E
11:05:00 47.5 36 55.014'N
135 23.123'E There are two kinds of OS DATA displays: DATA
1 and DATA 2, as selected on the system menu.
ipb
DATA 1 is shown in the figure above.

60/60
TIME DEPTH L/L The DATA 2 display is as below.
FORE 50kHz
11:00:00 47.0 36
135
55.012'N
23.123'E
TIME UTC TIME UTC
11:01:00 46.2 36 55.012'N
11:02:00 46.0
135
36
23.123'E
55.012'N 11:23:45 11:23:45
Sh
135 23.123'E
11:03:00 45.8 36 55.012'N
135 23.123'E DEPTH AFT FORE
11:04:00 45.5 36
135
55.014'N
23.123'E
DEPTH
AFT 200kHz
17.2 m 17.2 m 17.2 m
11:00:00 45.1 36 55.012'N
135 23.123'E
11:01:00 45.0 36 55.012'N (Single) (Dual)
135 23.123'E
11:02:00 44.9 36 55.012'N
135 23.123'E
DA
11:03:00 44.6 36 55.012'N Note: When lat/long data input error occurs in
135 23.123'E
11:04:00 44.5 36 55.014'N the DATA 1 mode, “EPFS” ERROR
135 23.123'E
appears on the screen. (EPFS: Electronic
Position-Fixing System such as GPS
* Depth below keel shown when transducer receiver)
setting is DEPTH BELOW KEEL.
N
KA
5
td.
Enlarging data of interest 1.6.7 MENU display
You can enlarge one of the data indications as
The menu provides functions which normally do
follows:
., L
not require frequent adjustment. For details see
1. Press the [▲] or [▼] key to select the data Chapter 2.
you want to enlarge. Current section is CLUTTER
circumscribed with the blue cursor. For AUTO (0-16)
example, select the depth cell. INTERFERENCE REJECT

OFF IR1 IR2 IR3
Co
2. Press the [+] key. PICTURE ADVANCE
SLOW FAST
DEPTH AFT FORE
DEPTH TREND INDICATOR
17.2 | 17.2 OFF ON
17.2 m m 5s
INTERVAL
1min 2 min
m : To select item
1/2
- +: To set option
ing
(Single display) (Dual display) (Page 1/2)
3. To return to the original display, press the [-] Press the [▼] key when the cursor is on the
key. “INTERVAL”, and the following appears.
1.6.6 HELP display
ECHO XDR*
FORE AFT
uild
This mode provides information about keys.
CAUTION!
Press desired key to obtain the corresponding SYSTEM MENU IS ONLY
FOR INSTALLATION. DO
information. The example below shows help NOT CHANGE SETTINGS.
information for MUTE ALARM. GO TO SYSTEM MENU?
NO YES
HELP MENU
MUTE
ipb
2/2
DRAFT ALARM
: To select item
- + : To set option
DIM BRILL (Page 2/2)
*For Dual display, "HISTORY XDR" appears.

AUTO COLOR
Sh
- +
PRESS KEY.
MUTE ALARM
To set or
acknowledge alarms:
DA
1. Press MUTE ALARM

key.
2. Press [-] or [+]
key to set alarm
depth.
3. Press MUTE ALARM
N
key to silence
the alarm.
PRESS KEY.
KA
6
td.
1.7 Range Scale • Clutter level (on the menu), which works as a
threshold control to suppress overall noise, is
If the depth goes out of the correct display area,
automatically adjusted.
., L
increase or decrease the range until the seabed
appears near the center of the screen. Note: The AUTO MODE is cancelled whenever
the range or the gain is changed.
Adjust the Range Control, and current range
selection is shown in the range display window.
How to enable/disable automatic
RANGE 5m
Co
operation
In the AUTO mode, the range scale is
automatically adjusted. See section 1.9 for 1. Press the AUTO key. The AUTO mode
details. window appears.
AUTO MODE
1.8 Gain Control
OFF ON
ing
The GAIN Control adjusts the sensitivity of the
receiver. The AUTO mode provides automatic - / +: To set option
adjustment and you are normally not required to
adjust it. Current setting is shown at the upper
2. Press the [+] key to select ON or the [-] key
left-hand corner. Adjust the GAIN Control and the
uild
to select OFF.
following window appears.
GAIN 5.5 1.10 Picture Colors

Adjust the GAIN Control so that a slight amount 1. Press the COLOR key. The following window
of noise remains on the screen. Generally, use a appears.
ipb
higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower

COLOR
setting for shallower waters. Adjusting range is
-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +
between 0.0 and 10.0 in 0.5 steps.
2. Press the [+] or [-] key to select a number,

1.9 Automatic Operation referring to the table below. (You can see the
Sh
result of your selection on the display.)

The automatic function automatically selects the
proper gain, range scale and clutter level Background Seabed Others marks
according to depth. It works as follows:
1 Monochrome, 8 intensities
• The range changes automatically to locate the 2 Blue Red infill 6 colors
bottom on the lower half of the screen. It jumps
DA
3 Black Red infill 6 colors

to one step shallower range when bottom
echoes reach a halfway point of the full scale 4 White Red infill 6 colors
from top and to one step deeper range when 5 Blue Yellow infill 6 colors
they come to the lower edge of the scale. 6 Black Yellow infill 6 colors
• The gain is automatically adjusted to display 7 White Yellow infill 6 colors
N
the seabed in specified color. 8 Black 7 colors (Strata)

9 White 7 colors (Strata)
KA
7
td.
Monochrome (amber) is the default setting. The 1.12 Draft
Strata display contains multiple colors depending
It is necessary to set the draft to use the DBS
on the reflectivity from underwater objects of the
., L
display mode, which shows depth below surface.
sounding pulses. Red is strongest, followed by
brown, orange, yellow, blue, and light blue at the (Single display)
default setting. 1. Select DBS with the MODE control.
“Confirm and set ships draft to use DBS
1.11 Shallow Depth Alarm mode.” appears.
Co
The shallow depth alarm sounds when the 2. Press the DRAFT key to display the draft
seabed is shallower than the preset depth. The setting window.
default in the NAV position is 20 m. You can
adjust the alarm depth as below:
ing
Activating/deactivating the alarm 0.0 m
1. Press the MUTE ALARM key to display the

-/+: To set option
depth alarm setting window.
DEPTH ALARM
3. Press the [+] key to increase the setting
uild
10 m
depth and [-] key to decrease it. The setting
- / +: To set option
depth is 0 to 30 m in steps of 0.1 m.
The above window disappears in 10 seconds.
2. Press the [+] or [-] key to change setting The draft setting is displayed at the upper right
depth. The setting is shown digitally at the corner and the range scale is shifted according to
top of the screen and graphically key the the draft setting.
ipb
depth alarm line.

(Dual display)
When the alarm is activated, the message
1. Select DBS with the MODE control.
“SHALLOW DEPTH ALARM” is displayed at the
“Confirm and set ships draft to use DBS
center on the screen.
mode.” appears.
Sh
Note: When the keel setting is 0.0 – 10.0 in

2. Press the [DRAFT] key to display the draft
the DBK mode, the shallow depth alarm setting
setting window for FORE.
will show a minus value. At this time, the alarm
setting value indication shows “****” and the 3. Press the [+] key to increase the setting
alarm function is disabled. depth and [-] key to decrease it. The setting
depth is 0 to 30 m in steps of 0.1 m. The
above window disappears in 10 seconds.
DA
Acknowledging the alarm

4. Press the [DRAFT] key while the FORE
You can silence the alarm by pressing the MUTE setting window is shown, to display the draft
ALARM key. The message “SHALLOW DEPTH setting window for AFT.
ALARM” moves to upper side of the screen.
5. Press the [+] key to increase the setting
N
depth and [-] key to decrease it. The setting

depth is 0 to 30 m in steps of 0.1 m. The
above window disappears in 10 seconds.
KA
8
td.
2 MENU OPERATION
., L
2.1 Menu Overview 2.2 Suppressing Low Level
The menu has several functions for advanced Noise
operation. Light-blue dots may appear overall screen. This
1. Select MENU with the MODE Selector. is mainly due to dirty water or noise. This noise
Co
can be suppressed by adjusting CLUTTER (in
CLUTTER
AUTO (0-16) reality, Threshold of the amplifier).
INTERFERENCE REJECT
When the automatic mode is on, the
OFF IR1 IR2 IR3 suppression setting is automatically adjusted.
For manual override, do the following:
PICTURE ADVANCE
SLOW FAST 1. Select MENU with the MODE Selector.
ing
TREND INDICATOR 2. Select CLUTTER by pressing the [▲] key.
OFF ON
3. Press the [-] or [+] key to select clutter
INTERVAL
5s 1min 2 min rejection level desired. The higher the
1/2 number the higher the degree of
uild
: To select item
- + : To set option
suppression. Note that weak echoes may
(1/2) not be displayed when the clutter circuit is
on.
ECHO XDR*
FORE AFT
2.3 Suppressing Interference

CAUTION!
ipb
SYSTEM MENU IS ONLY

FOR INSTALLATION. DO Interference from other acoustic equipment
NOT CHANGE SETTINGS. operating nearby or other electronic equipment
on your boat may show itself on the display.
To suppress interference, do the following:
GO TO SYSTEM MENU?
NO YES 1. Select MENU with the MODE Selector.
Sh
2/2
2. Select INTERFERENCE REJECT by
: To select item
- + : To set option pressing the [▲] or [▼] key.
(2/2, single mode) 3. Press the [-] or [+] key to select degree of
*For the dual mode. "HISTORY XDR" appears.
suppression desired; OFF, IR1, IR2 or IR3.
2. Press the [▲] or [▼] key to select menu The higher the number the greater the
DA
degree of suppression.
item. As you operate the [▲] or [▼] key, the
selected item and its current setting appear Note that oversuppression will weaken the
in reverse video. sensitivity.
3. Press the [-] or [+] key to select option

desired.
N
4. Set the MODE Selector in another position

to close the menu.
KA
9
td.
2.4 Picture Advance 3/60
TIME DEPTH L/L
The picture advance speed determines how 11:00:00 47.5 36°55.012’N
., L
quickly the vertical scan lines run across the 135°23.123’E
screen. 11:01:00 47.5 36°55.012’N
135°23.123’E
1. Select MENU with the MODE Selector. 11:02:00 47.5 36°55.013’N
2. Select PICTURE ADVANCE by pressing the 135°23.123’E
11:03:00 47.5 36°55.013’N
[▲] or [▼] key.
Co
135°23.123’E
3. Press the [+] or [-] key to select speed 11:04:00 47.5 36°55.014’N
FAST or SLOW, respectively. The advance 135°23.123’E
11:05:00 47.5 36°55.014’N
speed varies with the range scale and the
135°23.123’E
viewing length of 15-16 minutes is available
on all ranges (IMO requirements).
Range (m) Display window (minute) In this example, the setting of INTERVAL is
ing
5, 10, 20 1.8/15 (FAST/SLOW) 1 minute. That is, the depth and lat/long data are
40,100 8/15 displayed at 1 minute intervals.
200 16/20
400, 800 33/33
2.7 Choosing the Transducer
uild
2.5 Trend Choose the transducer to use on all modes in
the single display and HISTORY mode in the
The future trend of the seabed depths can be dual display.
predicted over a specified period of time (See
1. Select MENU with the MODE Selector.
page 13). The trend index is set with the item
TREND INDICATOR and appears at the top left 2. Select ECHO XDR (single display) or
ipb
corner. The default setting is ON. HISTORY XDR (dual display) by pressing
the [▲] or [▼] key.
θ is inclination angle of bottom.
ECHO XDR*
FORE AFT
CAUTION!
SYSTEM MENU IS ONLY
Sh
FOR INSTALLATION. DO
NOT CHANGE SETTINGS.
GO TO SYSTEM MENU?
−2°≤θ≤2° 2°<θ≤10° 10°<θ≤45° 45°<θ≤90° NO YES
2/2
: To select item
DA
- + : To set option
(Page 2/2)
−2°>θ≥−10° −10°>θ≥−45° −45°>θ≥−90° *For Dual display, "HISTORY XDR" appears.
2.6 Interval 3. Press the [+] or [-] key to FORE or AFT.
The interval for sampling data for the 4. Set the MODE Selector in another position
N
LOGBOOK and HISTORY modes can be set to close the menu.

with INTERVAL, among 5 s, 1 min and 2 min.
The default setting is 1 min.
KA
10
td.
3 SYSTEM MENU
., L
3.1 System Menu The system menu 1 appears.
The system menu should be set just after 5. With the cursor selecting MENU SELECT,
installation and is not always necessary to be operate the [-] or [+] key to select system
adjusted. If you change any items of the system menu desired; 1, 2 or 3.
Co
menu or even if you open the system menu, the SYSTEM MENU 1
sounding picture will be cleared. There are three MENU SELECT 1 2 3
menus: 1,2,and 3. DEPTH UNIT m ft fa
SPEED UNIT kt MPH km/h
1. Select MENU with the MODE Selector. COURSE TRUE MAG
CLUTTER BOTTOM LOST OFF ALARM
AUTO (0-16) GPS ALARM OFF ALARM
INTERFACE 1:95 1:98 NMEA
ing
INTERFERENCE REJECT
OFF IR1 IR2 IR3 ALARM SOUND 1 2 3
OS DATA DATA1 DATA2
PICTURE ADVANCE
SLOW FAST
LANGUAGE English
ALM BUZZER OFF ON
TREND INDICATOR ▼▲: To select item
OFF ON
uild
- +: To set option
INTERVAL Select other mode to exit.
5s 1min 2 min
1/2
↓ Press [+] at menu 1.
: To select item ↑ Press [-] at menu 2.
- + : To set option SYSTEM MENU 2
(1/2) MENU SELECT 1 2 3
2. Press the [▼] key several times to display TIME ADJUST INTERNAL EXTERNAL
DAY 1
ipb
following window.
( ) MONTH JAN
YEAR 2009 (∼2100)
ECHO XDR*
FORE AFT HOUR 0 (0∼23)
MINUTE 0 (0∼59)
CAUTION!
SECOND 0 (0∼59)
Sh
SYSTEM MENU IS ONLY

FOR INSTALLATION. DO 01 AUG 2009 00:00:00
NOT CHANGE SETTINGS.
▼▲: To select item
- +: To set option
GO TO SYSTEM MENU?
Select other mode to exit.
NO YES
2/2 ↓ Press [+] at menu 2.
↑ Press [-] at menu 3.
DA
: To select item
- + : To set option SYSTEM MENU 3
MENU SELECT 1 2 3
(2/2, single display)
*For the dual display. "HISTORY XDR" appears. BASIC RANGE1 5 (2∼800)
RANGE2 10 m
3. Select YES by pressing the [+] key. RANGE3 20
RANGE4 40
Confirmation message “ARE YOU SURE?” RANGE5 100
N
appears. RANGE6 200

RANGE7 400
4. Press the [+] key again. RANGE8 800
KA
TREND 1 min
11
td.
3.2 System Menu 1 OS DATA: Selects own ship data display mode;
DATA 1 or DATA 2. DATA1 is the default setting.
DEPTH UNIT: Selects unit of depth
If a navigation device is not connected to the
., L
measurement among meters, feet, or fathoms.
FE-700, select DATA 2.
Default setting is meters.
LANGUAGE: Currently English is only available.
If "ft" or "fa" is selected, the depth unit is shown
in red characters. ALM BUZZER: When the alarm unit AU-12 is
connected, select OFF. Then, the alarm off icon
SPEED UNIT: Selects unit of speed
Co
appears. If an alarm occurs, the AU-12 (not
measurement among knots, statute miles per
FE-700 display unit) sounds alarm.
hour, or kilometers per hour. Default setting is
knots. Requires speed data, from external 3.3 System Menu 2
device.
TIME ADJUST: Selects internal clock or external
COURSE: Selects heading reference; true or
clock (UTC clock). Default setting is INTERNAL.
magnetic. Default setting is TRUE.
ing
For INTERNAL, set current day, month, year,
BOTTOM LOST: Turns on or off the bottom loss hour, minute and second with [+], [-], [▼] or [▲]
warning. “ALARM” sounds the alarm if the key. The setting clock appears and it counts
bottom signal is not detected. Default setting is upward.
“ALARM” (alarm is enabled). SYSTEM MENU 2
uild
MENU SELECT 1 2 3
GPS ALARM: The audible alarm may be
TIME ADJUST INTERNAL EXTERNAL
released when the position-fixing mode is DAY 1
switched from DGPS to GPS and vice versa. MONTH JAN
Default setting is “ALARM” (alarm is enabled). YEAR 2001 (∼2100)
Choose “OFF” if you do not need to be alerted HOUR 0 (0∼23)
with the audible alarm when the position-fixing MINUTE 0 (0∼59)
SECOND 0 (0∼59)
ipb
mode is switched.
INTERFACE: Selects I/O signal format between 01 AUG 2009 00:00:00

the FE-700 and external equipment; IEC format
“1:95” (1995 version) or “1:98” (1998 version), or
- +: To set option
NMEA format. Default setting is IEC “1:98”.
Sh
When selecting the “1:98”, DPT has max. range

in use (See page 24). If EXTERNAL is selected, the screen changes
Output Input as follows.
IEC 61162-1 DPT RMA, RMC SYSTEM MENU 2
DBT GLL, VTG MENU SELECT 1 2 3
ZDA, GGA TIME ADJUST INTERNAL EXTERNAL
DA
NMEA 0183 DBT (Ver.1.5) RMA, RMC TIME DIFFERENCE AUTO MANUAL
DBS (Ver.1.5) GLL, VTG
DBK (Ver. 1.5) ZDA, GGA 01 AUG 2009 00:00:00
DPT (Ver.2.0)
ALARM SOUND: Selects audio alarm sound

N
among 1, 2 or 3. Default setting is 1.

1: Continuous sound - +: To set option
2: Intermittent sound; 0.5 s on and 0.5 s off.
KA
3: Intermittent sound; 1 s on and 1 s off.
12
td.
TIME DIFFERENCE: Selects auto (UTC) or 3.4 System Menu 3
manual. Auto uses the time difference in ZDA
(IEC 61162-1). In manual, it is necessary to RANGE 1- 8: Activates or deactivates specific
., L
enter the time difference in hours and minutes. range scales. Default ranges are 5, 10, 20, 40,
SYSTEM MENU 2 100, 200, 400, and 800 (meters). Setting area is
MENU SELECT 1 2 3 2 m to 800 m. The ranges 20 m and 200 m can
TIME ADJUST INTERNAL EXTERNAL not be changed. They are essential in this
TIME DIFFERENCE AUTO MANUAL equipment.
TIME DIFF HOUR 0 (0∼13)
Co
TIME DIFF MIN 0 (0∼59)
Note: Ranges must be set in numerical order.
TIME DIFF SIGN - , +
For example, if range 1 is 5 m and range 3 is 20
01 AUG 2009 00:00:00 m, range 2 should be between 6 and 19 m.
- +: To set option Trend: The trend index shows the probable
Select other mode to exit. bottom shape over a specified time within 1-10
ing
minutes. The default setting is 1 minute.
uild Set the Trend time with [+] or [-].
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
13
td.
4 ECHO QUALITY SETTING
This chapter describes functions useful for
., L
improving echo sounding performance. 4.2 Bottom Level
If the depth indication is unstable or the seabed
4.1 Demonstration Display cannot be displayed steadily notwithstanding the
adjustment of the control panel, you may adjust
The demonstration program shows how the
Co
the bottom echo level.
FE-700 works.
1. Turn off the equipment. CAUTION
If the level is set too low, the FE-700
2. Press the POWER Switch while pressing any may not be able to distinguish the
key. Release the key when the following bottom from fish echo and the
depth indication may be unstable
EXTENSION MODE display appears.
and if set to high the depth
EXTENSION MODE indication does not appear.
ing
+: TRANSDUCER SETTING
-: TEST 1. Press the MUTE ALARM key three times at
▲: CLEAR MEMORY the EXTENSION MODE. The start-up screen
▼: DEMONSTRATION appears and shortly thereafter the BOTTOM
LEVEL display appears.
uild
BOTTOM LEVEL
3. Press the [▼] key to select
200kHz = 80 (20∼200)
DEMONSTRATION. -+: 200kHz*
DEMONSTRATION
*: Either 200 kHz or 50 kHz is displayed
depending on which frequency is used.
OFF ON
2. Set the level with the [+] or [-] key. The
ipb
-/+: To set option default level is 80.

▼: EXTENSION MODE
3. Press the POWER switch to finish the
adjustment. Wait about 5 s and then turn on
4. Press the [+] key to select ON.
the power again.
5. Reset the power. "DEMO" appears above
Sh
Note: Do not switch transducer (frequency) at

the depth indication on the echo sounder
the EX-8 when setting the Bottom Level menu. If
displays and at the top right-hand corner on
it is necessary to set bottom level for a different
the data and graphic displays.
frequency, turn off the FE-700, switch transducer
To return to the normal operation, select at EX-8 and then turn on the FE-700 again.
OFF at step 4 above. Restart the display
unit.
N DA
KA
14
td.
4.3 TVG Level 4.4 Echo Offset
TVG (Time Varied Gain) compensates for The echo offset feature functions to compensate
., L
propagation attenuation of the ultrasonic waves, for too weak or too strong echo level. If the on-
reducing surface noise to provide a smooth screen echo level appears to be too weak or too
display. The TVG lowers receiver sensitivity at strong and the level cannot be adjusted
the time of pulse emission and gradually satisfactorily with the GAIN control, do the
increases it with time, thereby making objects of following to adjust echo level.
same reflectivity at different depths appear at the
Co
1. Press the DIM key three times at the
same intensity or colors on the display. The TVG
EXTENSION MODE display. The ECHO
working depth is down to approximately 150 m
OFFSET screen appears.
on the 200 kHz system and 350 m on the 50 kHz
ECHO OFFSET
system. Outside this range the echoes from the
seabed and fish schools are received in full level. 200kHz: 0 (-99∼+99)
There is no perceivable deterioration in
ing
performance. -+: 200kHz
1. Press the DRAFT key three times at the

2. Set the offset with [+] or [-]. The default
EXTENSION MODE display. The TVG
value is 0.
SELECT window appears.
TVG SELECT 3. Press the POWER switch to finish the
uild
adjustment. Wait about 5 s and then turn it
200kHz = 5 (0∼9) on again.
-+: 200kHz
2. Set the TVG curve with [+] or [-]. The default

level is 5. Attenuation compensation curve is
ipb
at 20LogR curve.
3. Press the POWER switch to finish the
adjustment. Wait 5 s, and then turn it on
again.
Sh
Note: Do not switch transducer (frequency) at

the EX-8 when setting the TVG Level menu. If it
is necessary to set TVG level for a different
frequency, turn off the FE-700, switch transducer
at EX-8 and then turn on the FE-700 again.
N DA
KA
15
td.
5 OPERATION OF DIGITAL DEPTH
INDICATOR FE-720 (OPTION)
., L
2. Press [ ] or [ ] until the required value is
reached. The range of adjustment is from
Omnipad 0 (Min.) to 63 (Max.). The default is 48.
3. Press the ENT key to set.
Co
MENU ENT Note: The contrast is automatically set to the
DISP DIM default when you turn on the power.
*
PWR 5.1.4 DEPTH MODE
ing
Depths are read either below transducer (keel) or
The Digital Depth Indicator FE-720 is an optional
below seaface irrespective of the main display.
remote display. The panel illumination can be
Select the mode as below:
locally adjusted on the control panel or on the
optional hand dimmer box. 1. Press the DISP key to select the wanted
mode. The mode changes as below with
uild
each press.
5.1 Basic Operation
DEPTH FORE 50kHz
5.1.1 Turning on
123 m
Press the POWER key. The unit beeps and starts
BELOW TRANSDUCER
ipb
up with the last-used display. To turn off the unit,

press the POWER key again. Depth below transducer
5.1.2 Adjusting panel dimmer

DEPTH FORE 50kHz
Sh
1. Press the DIM key.

2. Press [ ] to increase the dimmer or [ ] to 128 m
decrease it. The default is level 4.
BELOW SURFACE*
3. Press the ENT key to finish the adjustment.
DRAFT: 5.0 m
5.1.3 Adjusting Contrast Depth below surface. Draft is

DA
determined on the main Display Unit

1. Press the [∗] key. The following window FE-701.
appears.
*: If the keel distance is 0.1 to –10.0 (refer to
page 8.) BELOW KEEL is displayed
CONTRAST (0-63)
instead of the BELOW SURFACE.
N
48
EXIT: [ENT]
KA
16
td.
5.2 Menu Operation 5.2.2 Selecting language
The language in use on the screen is either
., L
5.2.1 Dimmer control English or Japanese.
1. Press the MENU key to display main menu.
The dimmer is controlled either with the DIM key,
or the optional Dimmer Controller. The method of 2. Press [▲] or [▼] to select the /LANG.
control must be selected on the menu.
3. Press the ENT key. The following window
1. Press the MENU key to display the main appears.
Co
menu.
ENGLISH
MENU
DIM CONTROL
PANEL ONLY
/LANG. ENGLISH 4. Press [▲] or [▼] to select appropriate option.
UNITS m
The default is English.
ALARM SET ON
ing
TEST 5. Press the ENT key to set.
6. Press the MENU key to finish.
2. Press [▲] or [▼] to select DIM CONTROL.
5.2.3 Selecting the unit of depth
uild
appears. measurement
MENU
The unit of depth measurement is separately
DIM CONTROL
PANEL ONLY selected from the Main Display FE-701.
/LANG. PANEL ONLY 1. Press the MENU key to display main menu.
UNITS EXT CONTROLLER
2. Press [▲] or [▼] to select the UNITS.
ipb
ALARM SET EXT DISP

TEST
appears.
4. Press [▲] or [▼] to select option desired. m
ft
Sh
PANEL ONLY: The illumination of the control fa

panel is adjusted with the DIM key.
EXT CONTROLLER: Illumination of control 4. Press [▲] or [▼] to select unit.
panel is adjusted with the optional dimmer The default is meter (m).
controller (hand dimmer box). The DIM key is
inoperative.
DA
EXT DISP: Not used.

N
KA
17
td.
5.2.4 Alarm 4. With YES selected, press the ENT key to
start the test. The equipment tests the ROM
You can set turn alarm on or off. In the ON mode, and RAM, displaying the results as OK or
., L
if the main display unit activates the alarm, the NG (No Good). If NG appears, contact your
FE-720 also. dealer for advice.
1. Press the MENU key to display main menu. TEST
ROM : OK
2. Press [▲] or [▼] to select ALARM. RAM : OK
Co
PUSH KEY
appears.
(STOP: PWR OFF)
ON CNT: 001 65-5-0100-003
OFF
5. After "PUSH KEY" is displayed, press each
4. Press [▲] or [▼] to select appropriate option. key one by one. The name of the key
ing
The default is ON. pressed momentarily appears if the key is
5. Press the ENT key to set. functioning properly.
6. Press the MENU key to finish. The display shows the following message to
If the alarm sounds, press any key to silence it. inform you that the program is now going to
check the LCD.
uild
5.3 Diagnosis
The diagnostic test checks ROM, RAM, keys and <LCD CHECK>
LCD of the FE-720. ALL ON 2 SEC
ALL OFF 3 SEC
1. Press the MENU key to display main menu.
ipb
2. Press [▲] or [▼] to select TEST.

The whole display brightens for 2 seconds then
3. Press the ENT key. The following window turns off for 3 seconds. Test repeats. CNT, which
appears. is number of times the test has been
consecutively executed, is counted up.
TEST START?
Sh
(STOP : PWR OFF) 6. To stop the test, turn off the power.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
5.4 Factory Setting
You can restore default settings to start operation
anew. Press the POWER switch while pressing
DA
[▲]. The message "RESET BACKUP DATA!"

appears. After a while, all default settings are
restored and the depth indication appears.
N
KA
18
td.
6 MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
., L
6.3 Transducer Maintenance
WARNING Marine life on the transducer face will result in a
Do not open the cover. gradual decrease in sensitivity. Check the
transducer face for cleanliness each time the
Co
There are no user-serviceable parts inside. ship is dry-docked. Carefully remove any marine
Refer any repair work to a qualified
life with a piece of wood or fine-grade sandpaper.
technician.
6.4 Replacing the Fuse, Battery

NOTICE If a fuse blows, find the cause before replacing it.
Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive
ing
Use only designated fuses. Using the wrong fuse
sealant or contact spray to coating or will damage the unit and void the warranty.
plastic parts of the equipment.
Three types of fuses are used in the distribution
Those items contain organic solvents that box FE-702.
can damage coating and plastic parts,
especially plastic connectors. For Display Unit : 3 A x 1 pc (24 VDC)
uild
For Digital Depth Indicator: 0.5 A x 2 pcs
For AC input: 1 A x 2 pcs
6.1 Checking The Digital Depth Indicator FE-720 uses one fuse
of 1 A, which is inserted in the positive line of
Regular maintenance is essential for good
interconnection cable.
performance. Checking the items listed in the
ipb
table below on a regular basis will keep the A battery installed on a circuit board inside the
equipment in good shape for years to come. display unit preserves data when the power is
turned off. The life of the battery is about three
years. When the battery voltage is low, “battery”
Item Action
NG appears at the self-test. When this happens,
Cable run If conductors are
Sh
contact your dealer to request replacement of the

exposed, replace
cable. battery.
Power cable, If loosened, tighten. TYPE Code Number

transducer cable plug
Lithium Battery CR2450-F2 ST2 000-133-495
Display unit ground If corroded, clean.
Ship's mains voltage If out of rating, correct
DA
problem.
6.2 Cleaning the Display Unit

Dust or dirt on the display unit should be
N
removed with a soft cloth. If desired a

water-moistened cloth may be used. Do not use
chemical cleaners; they can remove paint and
KA
markings.
19
td.
6.5 Troubleshooting
The table below provides simple troubleshooting procedures which you may follow to restore normal
., L
operation. If you cannot restore normal operation, contact your dealer.
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSES REMEDY

No picture; no reading Low power supply Check the supply voltage.
measure Fuse blown Replace the fuse.
Co
Power cable damaged Check the cable and repair.
No echo sounding picture Transducer cable damaged Repair the cable.
Transducer cable connection Tighten the connections.
loosened
Transmitter not working Make sure the maximum output power is
selected. (See section 3.2 System Menu 1.)
ing
Irregular display Low sensitivity Increase the Gain by turning the GAIN control
clockwise.
Low reflectivity from seabed Suspect muddy seabed.
Marine life on transducer Remove marine life from the transducer when
dry docked.
uild
Loss of seabed display Out of range Check the range scale setting.
Air bubbles caused by going This is normal, it is not a sign of equipment
astern or running over other trouble.
ship wakes
Heavy noise Wrong installation place of Find cause of noise. Relocate the transducer if
transducer noise persists.
Other echo sounders nearby If more than one echo sounder is working on
ipb
the ship, there is no ideal measure to cure the

problem.
Surface noise Aeration in near surface area Not an equipment problem.
Rough weather Not an equipment problem.
Sh
N DA
KA
20
td.
6.6 Diagnostic Test 6.7 Test Pattern
The diagnostic test checks the ROM, RAM, color The test pattern is used to check color
., L
bar and keyboard for proper operation. performance.
1. Turn on the power while pressing any key. 1. Turn on the POWER SWITCH while pressing
Release the keys when the following display any key.
appears.
2. Press the BRILL key three times. Press the
EXTENSION MODE BRILL key again to change the test pattern
Co
+: TRANSDUCER SETTING
as below.
-: TEST
▲: CLEAR MEMORY
▼: DEMONSTRATION
SELECT MODE
BLACK
ing
2. Press the [-] key.
↓
Color bar
(16 colors)
ROM : OK WHITE
uild
DRAM : OK Key status
SRAM : OK
RANGE: 4 Position of Range knob ↓

GAIN : 150 Gain knob setting
MODE : 5 Position of Mode knob
BLK RED GRN Blue YEL PPL Aqua WHT

BATTERY : OK
ipb
PROGRAM No.: 0252297005
↓
3. The ROM, DRAM, SRAM and internal
battery are checked and the results are 3. Press the BRILL key again to return to the
Sh
displayed as OK or NG (No Good). EXTENSION MODE menu.

If NG appears, contact your dealer for
advice.
4. Press and release each key (except the
POWER switch) one by one. If the key is
normal, its on-screen location lights in black
DA
while the key is pressed.

5. Operate the controls. The RANGE and
MODE control setting indications should be
the same as actual control settings. The
GAIN control setting indication should be
N
between 0 and more than 230.

6. Press the POWER SWITCH to finish. Turn
on the power again to resume operation.
KA
21
td.
6.8 Clearing the Memory
All menu settings can be cleared to start afresh.
., L
All default menu settings are restored when the
memory is cleared. For your reference all default
settings are shown in the menu tree at the end of
this manual.
1. Turn on the power while pressing any key.
Co
Release the keys when the EXTENSION
MODE menu appears.
2. Press the [▲] key. The following window
appears.
ing
Restore factory settings.
+: YES
-: NO
uild
3. Press the [+] key to clear the memory. The
following window appears.
DON’T TURN POWER OFF

UNTIL COMPLETED MEMORY CLEAR
ipb
Then the following display appears after the

memory is cleared.
Sh
Set data to default.
4. After data is cleared, the EXTENSION

MODE menu appears.
Note: The setting for the items LANGUAGE and

DA
TRANSDUCER in the system menu is not

disturbed when the memory is cleared.
N
KA
22
td.
7 MENU TREE
., L
MENU CLUTTER (AUTO, 0-16)
INTERFERENCE REJECT (OFF, IR1, IR2, IR3)
PICTURE ADVANCE (SLOW, FAST)
TREND INDICATOR (ON, OFF)
INTERVAL (5S, 1MIN, 2MIN)
ECHO XDR (FORE, AFT)
HISTORY XDR (FORE, AFT)
Co
GO TO SYSTEM MENU? (NO, YES)
SYSTEM MENU 1 MENU SELECT (1, 2, 3)

DEPTH UNIT (m, ft, fa)
SPEED UNIT (kt, MPH, km/h)
COURSE (TRUE, MAG)
BOTTOM LOST (OFF, ALARM)
GPS ALARM (OFF, ALARM)
ing
INTERFACE (1:95, 1:98, NMEA)
ALARM SOUND (1, 2, 3)
OS DATA (DATA1, DATA2)
LANGUAGE (English)
ALM BUZZER (OFF, ON)

uild
TIME ADJUST (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)
DAY
MONTH
YEAR (to 2100)
HOUR (0-23)
MINUTE (0-59)
SECOND (0-59)
ipb
TIME ADJUST (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)

TIME DIFFERENECE (AUTO, MANUAL)
TIME DIFF HOUR (0-13)
TIME DIFF MIN (0-59)
TIME SIGN (+, -)
Sh

BASIC RANGE1
BASIC RANGE2
BASIC RANGE3 (fixed with 20 m/60 ft/10 fa)
BASIC RANGE4
BASIC RANGE5
BASIC RANGE6 (fixed with 200 m/600 ft/100 fa)
BASIC RANGE7
DA
BASIC RANGE8
TREND (1-10 min) Setting range for RANGE 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 and 8:
2 to 80 m/7 to 2500 ft/1 to 400 fa
Any key +[POWER] TRANSDUCER SETTING

TEST
CLEAR MEMORY
DEMONSTRATION
N
ECHO OFFSET (DIM key x 3 times, setting range: -99 to +99)

TVG SELECT (DRAFT key x 3 times, setting range: 0 to 9)
BOTTOM LEVEL (ALARM key x 3 times, 20 to 200)
KA
DISPLAY TEST (BRILL key x 3 times)
23
td.
8 DIGITAL INTERFACE
(IEC 61162-1 EDITION 2)
., L
1. I/O Sentences
Input sentences of channel 1 (NAV IN)
Co
RMA, RMC, GLL, GGA, VTG, ZDA
Output sentences of channel 2 (NAV OUT)

DBT, DPT, DBS (NMEA 0183), DBK (NMEA 0183)
1 s for any sentence
ing
Data transmission
Data is transmitted in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in 2.1 of
IEC 61162-1. The first bit is a start bit and is followed by data bits, least-significant-bit as illustrated
below.
uild
Baud rate: 4800
Stop bits: 1
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
ipb
Start Stop
bit Data bits bit
Sh
N DA
KA
24
td.
2. Schematic Diagrams
NAV IN port (listener)
., L
FE-702 FE-701
02P6283 02P6281 02P6280

TB1 J1 J1
P1 J1 J3
236-410M1-10 B10B-XH-A XHP-10 MJ-A10SRMD MJ-A10SRMD J4 00-9072-230-101-883
Co
00-900-9072-901-883
1 1 1 1 FL3 1 1 R30
NAV IN 560 1 4
6 6 6 19 19 U9
FL5 PC400 5
RD1_A 9 7 7 7 20 20
.
. .
. .
. CR1 3
RD1_B 10 . . . 1SS226
FL6 10 10 10 30 30
ing
uild
Max. Voltage: ±15V
NAV OUT ports
FE-702 FE-701
J1 J1 02P6281 02P6280
B10B-XH-A P1 MJ-A10SRMD J4
TB1 J1 00-9072-230-901-883 J3
ipb
236-410M1-10 XHP-10 00-9072-230-101-883

MJ-A10SRMD
1 >1> >1>> <<1< <1<<1<
. . . .. .
. . . .. .
NAV OUT 1 . . . .
FL3 .. FL3
14 U8
TD1_A 7 >4> >4>> <<4< <17<<17< 15
TD1_B 13
8 >5> >5>> <<5< <18<<18<
. . .
. ..
Sh
. . .
. FL4 . ..
. . .. .
10 >10> >10>> <<10< <30<<30<

TB3
236-410
NAV OUT 2
M1-10
TD1_A 1
TD1_B 2
.
DA
.
.
TD1_A 6
TD1_B 7
.
NAV OUT 3 .
.
10
N
Total output for NAV OUT ports: Max. 20 mA

KA
25
td.
3. Sentence Description
DPT - Depth
., L
$--DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | |
| | | +----- 4
| | +--------- 3
| +------------ 2
+---------------- 1
Co
1. Water depth relative to trancsducer, in meters
2. Offset from transeducer, in meters(see notes 1 and 2)
3. Maximum range scale in use
4. Checksum
NOTE1 "positive"=distance from transeduser to water-line.

"-"=distance from transducer to keel.
NOTE2 For IEC applications the offset should always be applied
ing
so as to provide depth relative to the keel.
DBK – Depth below keel
$--DBK,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
uild
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+----------------------- 1

2. Water depth, m
ipb
DBS – Depth below surface
$--DBS,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
Sh
+--+----------------------- 1

2. Water depth, m
DBT – Depth below transducer

DA
$--DBT,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+----------------------- 1
N

2. Water depth, m
4. Checksum
KA
26
td.
GLL - Geographic position - latitude/longitude
$--GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | +----------- 4
| | | | +---------------- 3
| | +------+----------------------- 2
+---+----------------------------------- 1
Co
1. Latitude, N/S
2. Longitude, E/W
3. UTC of position
6. Checksum
ing
A = Autonomous
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
uild
be null fields.
ipb
Sh
N DA
KA
27
td.
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9
| | | | | | | | | | +---+------------ 8
| | | | | | | | +---+------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +------------------------- 6
| | | | | | +---------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------- 4
Co
| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. GPS quality indicator (see note)
ing
11. Checksum
NOTE
uild
0 = fix not available or invalid
1 = GPS SPS mode, fix valid
2 = differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid
3 = GPS PPS mode, fix valid
4 = Real Time Kinetic. Satellite system used in RTK mode with fixed integers
5 = Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK mode with floating fingers
6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
7 = Manual input mode
ipb
8 = Simulator mode
The GPS quality indicator shall not be a null field.
Sh
N DA
KA
28
td.
RMA - Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data
$--RMA,A,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9
| | | | | | | | | +---+----------- 8
| | | | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +---------------------- 6
| | | | | | +-------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------ 4
Co
| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+-------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. Status: A=data valid, V=blink, cycle or SNR warning

2. Latitude, degrees N/S
3. Longitude, degrees E/W
ing
4. Time difference A, microseconds
5. Time difference B, microseconds
8. Magnetic variation(see note 1),degree E/W
9. Mode indicator(see note 2)
10. Checksum
uild
NOTE 1 - Easterly variation(E) subtracts from true course
Westerly variation(W) adds to true course
NOTE 2 Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
ipb

M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
Sh

N DA
KA
29
td.
RMC - Recommended specific GPS/TRANSIT data
$--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | +----- 9
| | | | | | | | | +--+------- 8
| | | | | | | | +--------------- 7
| | | | | | | +--------------------- 6
| | | | | | +------------------------- 5
| | | | +---+---------------------------- 4
| | +---+---------------------------------------- 3
Co
| +--------------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1

3. Latitude, N/S
4. Longitude, E/W
ing
7. Date: dd/mm/yy
8. magnetic variation, degrees E/W
10. Checksum

A = Autonomous
uild
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
ipb

Sh
N DA
KA
30
td.
VTG- Course over ground and ground speed
| | | | | | | | | |
., L
| | | | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | | +--+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
| | +--+----------------------- 2
+--+----------------------------- 1
Co
6. Checksum
ing
A = Autonomous
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
uild
ZDA - Time and date
$--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
ipb
| | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | +----------- 6
| | | | +-------------- 5
| | | +------------------ 4
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1
Sh
1. UTC
2. Day, 01 to 31(UTC)
3. Month, 01 to 12(UTC)
4. Year(UTC)
5. Local zone hours, 00h to +-13h
6. Local zone minutes, 00 to +59
as local hours
DA
7. Checksum
N
KA
31
td.
9 PARTS LOCATION, PARTS LIST
., L
MAIN BOARD 02P6280
ANLG 02P6281
HEATSINK
INTERFACE
Co
ing
uild
PNL 02P6250 MEM 02P6282
(Beneath)
MAIN DISPLAY UNIT FE-701, INSIDE VIEW
(SHIELD COVER REMOVED)
ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
ipb
CON 02P6283
Sh
DA
TB5
TB6 TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4
N
DISTRIBUTION BOX FE-702,

INSIDE VIEW
KA
32
td.
FURUNO Model FE-700
Unit DISPLAY UNIT FE-701
., L
DISTRIBUTION BOX FE-702
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref.Dwg. Page
Jan-99 Blk.No.
ASSEMBLY
Co
02P6281,ANLG 001-229-240 FE-701 O
02P6282,MEM 001-229-220 FE-701 O
02P6283,CONE 001-229-030 FE-702 O
02P6280,MAIN 001-229-190 FE-701
PANEL ASSEMBLY
FE-701 001-229-370 w/PAL 02P6250 O
ing
COVER
FE-701 001-229-340 O
POWER ASSEMBLY
FE-702 001-228-980 O
uild
TRANSFORMER
T1 02S1256-0 000-142-779 FE-702
SWITCH
S1 M-2032L/B 000-474-351 FE-702
ipb
FILTER
FL1 ZCB2203-11 000-128-847 FE-702
FUSE HOLDER
FX1 FH043A 000-138-885 FE-702
FX2 FH043A 000-138-885 FE-702
Sh
TERMINAL BOARD
TB6 ML250S1AXF-3P 00-142-535 FE-702
TB7 ML250S1AXF-3P 00-142-535 FE-702
JACK
J1 MJ-A10SRMD 000-126-663
DA
FUSE
F1 FGMB 1A 250V 000-142-771
F2 FGMB 1A 250V 000-142-771
N
KA
33
KA
ND
AS
hip
bui
lding
Co
., L
td.

Em 25

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Em 25

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

td.

2． DATA SELECTOR MD-200

6． NAV. ECHO SOUNDER FE-700

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

2.3 Projection Mercator

Plot interval By time 0 to 60m00s or by distance 0 to 99.99 nm, sm/km or halt

4.1 Display unit 24VDC: 0.4A (w/ internal beacon receiver)

Display unit -15ﾟC to 55ﾟC

5.4 Vibration IEC 60945 ed.4

7 COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE

*TTYCS-1 VOYAGE DATA RECORDER

SCALE MASS ±10％ NAME

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

2.3 Projection Mercator

Plot interval By time 0 to 60m00s or by distance 0 to 99.99 nm, sm/km or halt

4.1 Display unit 24VDC: 0.4A (w/ internal beacon receiver)

Display unit -15ﾟC to 55ﾟC

5.4 Vibration IEC 60945 ed.4

7 COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE

*TTYCS-1 VOYAGE DATA RECORDER

SCALE MASS ±10％ NAME

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

H8P-SHF-AA J3 1 S1 SRRM43 J1 H8P-SHF-AA

TD4-A 13 *1 TTYCS-1 MARINE RADAR/ARPA

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

3.6 Tracking velocity 900 kt

4.5 Alarm output Contact closure

PILOT PLUG UNIT

MARINE RADAR/ARPA: FAR-2837S

MULTI DISTRIBUTOR: No.1 MD-550

7 ANTENNA CABLE ASSY. 8D-FB-CV 1 30m EXTENSION

17 ACCESSORIES FP14-02801 1 FOR MONITOR UNIT

MJ-A10SPF0012,25m,φ8.9 MJ-A10SPF COM

*4: PRODUCED BY AMP INC. IV-2sq. 17/Jun/10 S.Hori

Input: 1 port; IEC 61162 (NMEA 0183 Ver 2.0)

Analog voltage output: 1 port

7. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE

(1) Display Unit/Digital Indicator/Digital Distance Indicator

(4) Terminal Box Standard: 0.65 m, Steering: 0.45 m

Countermeasure to protect Transducer from being by Dry Dock Blocks

1 Range scale -10 to 30kt (clockwise indication)

7 TERMINAL BOX DS-802 1.1 1

19 INSTALLATION MATERIALS CP14-06601 1 FOR MULTI DISTRI-

*4. GROUNDING THRU CABLE CLAMP. NAME

TD2-A 7 *1 TTYCS-1 MARINE RADAR/ARPA

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

100 1.00 150

“HISTRY”: Historical Echo presentation with the depth

“HELP”: Echo presentation with the help menu and note

Range (m) 5 10 20 40 100 200 400 800

3 TRANSDUCER TYPE AND BEAMWIDTH

SDDBT: Depth (ft, m, fa) below transducer

Input Control command for PC

100VAC, 1phase, 60Hz: 20VA.

7 CABLE ASSY. FP-C6FPS0002-100 1

SCALE MASS NAME

・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : FEB . 2006

Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a

The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all

In the other countries